Professional Documents
Culture Documents
e
Document Name:
CFR Section(s):
Standards Body:
Official Incorporator:
THE EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
Adopted by
The American Associotion of Sto te Highwoy OfFiciols
ELEVENTH EDITION
J 973
J oy W. Brown, Florido,
973
973
GUAM
HA\\'AII
IDA HO, ROI3ERT JARVIS
ILU NO 15, C.E. T IIUN I\TAN, IR.,
DWARD J. IIII L
.K.MRUM
. SMITH
CONTENTS
Preface
Introduction
Division I Design
Division II Constiuction
Appendix A Tables of Maximum Moments, Shears and Reactions, Standard Loadings
Appendix B I'ruck Train and Equivalent Loadings
Appendix C Formulas for Steel Columns
Appendix D Position and Diiection of Neutral Axis and Formulas :for
Stresses
Index
Division
247
411
41?
41fi
433
434
DESIGN
-4i'ficle
Design Analysis
1.1.8
1.1.4
1.1.?
1.1.6
1.1.7
1.1.8
1.1.10
1.1.11
1.1.12
1.1.13
1.1.14
1.1.15
1.1.16
Bridge Locations
.. .......... .... ........ ............
.
1
Bridge Waterways ............................................................................................................... 1
(A) Site Data
. .. .. .. .. .... ... .. . .. .
1
(B) H3droIogic Analysis
.. .. . .... .. . .. .
2
(C) Hydraulic Analysis
.
. .. .
. . . .
2
Pier Spacing, Orientation and Type
... .. .
...
2
Culvert Waterway Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..... ....
2
Culvert Location and Length .
. . .
...
?
Width o:I Roadway and Sidewalk
. . ......
.
8
Cleaiances .
. .
. ...... . . . .. .
13
(A) Navigational .. . .......... .
. .
..
. .
?
(B) Vehicular
.
.
..
..
. . . . .
4
(C) Other
fi
Curbs :ind Sidewalks
5
Railings . . . . . .... . . .
. ..
..
(A) Trafhc Railing
.
. .
.
(B) Pedestrian Railing .. . ..
.
.
7
Roadway Drainage . . . . . .. . .
...
.
. . ..
8
Superelevation
. . .. .
..
. . . .......... .
8
Floor Surfaces . . . . .
.. . . .. . . . .
8
Blast Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
Utilities
. . . .
.
.
.
.
9
Roadway Width, Curbs and C learances for Tunnels
At i:oadway Width . . . .
.. .
.
.
(B) Clearance Between Walls . . . . . .
.
.
(C) Curbs .. . .
.
. .
. . .
. . .. . . . ..
(D) Vertical Clearance
. ..
. . ... .
Roadway Width, Curbs and Clearances for Depressed Roadways
!)
9
I II
TU
IO
1 II
(A)
W
i
d
t
h
GONTENTS
Aiticle
1.1.17
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.?
1.2.
1.2.7
1.2.8
1.2.9
1.2.10
1.2.11
1.2.12
1.2.13
1.2.14
1.215
1.2.16
1.2.17
1.2.18
1.2.19
1.2.20
1.2.21
1.2.22
Loals ............................................................................................................ 12
Dead Load ......................................................................................................... 12
(A) Unit Load on Culverts ....................................................... 18
(B) Shear in Top Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
Live Load................................................................................................................................ 14
Overload Provision
............... ...... .....
..
14
Highway Loadings
. ....
.
. .. . ....
.
14
(A) General
. .. .
.. . . .. . ..
.
14
(B) H Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..
TO
(C) HS Loadings ............................................................................................16
(D) Classes of Loadings . . . .
..
. .
.
IG
(E) Designation of Loadings .
. .. .. .
. .
18
(F) Minimum Loading ....................................................................................... 18
Traffic Lanes
.
.
. .. . .
. .
18
Standard Trucks and Lane Loads
..
.
18
Application of Loadings
. . .
TO
Superstructure Design
. .
Substructure llesigii
..
. .... . . ..
Overturning Forces
. .
.
. . .
Therma1 F'orces .... . . .
. . . .
.
.
Uplift . .
. .. .
.
.
.. .. .
......
Force of Stream Current, Floating Ice and Drif t
.
.
.
24
24
2f
26
2G
27
Earth Pressure
.. '. .
. . ' .
27
Earthquake Stresses
.
. . . . .
. . .
27
Centrifugal Forces
.
.
. .. . .
. .
28
Loading Combinations . . . . . . . . . . , ...............................................................................................28
SECTION 5
DI STRIBUTION OF LOADS
29
CONTENTS
Article
1.3.2
Distribution of Loads and Design of Concrete Slabs and MultiBeam Precast Concrete Bridges
.........
. .... .
(A)
Span Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(C)
Bending Moment . .
(B)
. .. ...
32
34
1.3.8
1.3.4
1.8.fi
1.3.
1.8.7
(H)
Cantilever Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
(A)
( B)
Continuous
( I)
Slabs Supported on Four Sides . . . . . . . . .
.. ....
(I)
Median Slabs . . . .
. . .. . .. . .
.. . .
Distribution of Wheel Loads Through Earth Fills
.
.
Distribution of Wheel Loads on Timber Flooring . . . . . . . . . . .
(A ) Flooring Transverse
. ... .. .. ....
.
( B ) Flooring Longitudinal
. .. . ..
...
. .
( C) Continuous Flooring
.. . ... ... . .. .
. .
Disti-ibuti on of Loads and Design of Composite Wood-Concrete
Members
. . . . ..... . . ... . . ..... ... ..... . .... ..
..
ment and Shear
Dist ribution of Bending Moments in
Spans
( C ) Design .
Distribution of Wheel Loads on Steel Grid Floors
(A) General
( B ) Floors Filled with Concrete .
( C) Open Floors .
Moments, Shears and Reactions
1.4.3
1.4.4
Allowable Stresses . . . . . . . . . .
. .. ..
33
3fi
36
35
35
35
86
37
87
87
37
37
38
38
39
89
40
32
411
4ti
Pov'er . .
.. ....... .. .. .
.. . .... ... .
4U
Angles of Repose ............................................................................................................... 41
Bearing Value o1 Piling . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
(A) General
. .. ....... .
...
. . .
41
( B ) Case A. Capacity o:I Pile as a Structural Member
41
( C ) Case B. Capacity o:I Pile to Transfer Load to the
Ground
1.4.fi
Piles
(G)
(A)
B
D)
E)
F
)
I)
46
General
.. . ..
.... .
46
46
4f
4f
47
Iluoyancy
47
. . .... . .. .
. .. , ..
CONTENTS
Article
1.4.6
1.4.7
1.4.8
1.4.9
1.4.10
Footings
(A)
( B)
(C)
(D)
( E)
Page
150
Depth
Anchorage
Distribution of Pressure .
Spread Footings
(G)
Abutments
(A) Genei'al
( B) Rein:forcement for Temperature .
( C) Wing walls
(D) Drainage
Retaining Walls
(A ) General
( B ) Base oi- Footing Slabs .
(C) Vertical Walls
( D ) Counterforts and Buttresses
( F) Reinforcement for Temperatu re
( F) Expansion and Contraction Joints
(G) Drainage
.
Piers
(A) General
(B) Pier Nose .
Tubular Steel Piers
(A) Use
( B) Depth
( C) Piling
(D) Dimensions of Shell
( E) Splices and Joints
(F) Bracing
'
Strength of Concrete
(F)
(G)
Girders
Reinforcement
for
T-beams
60
60
G0
60
60
131
61
61
.
62
and
Box
CONTENTS
Article
1.6.6 cont.
1.6.7
1.fi.8
1.fi.9
1.fi.10
1.6.11
1.6.12
1.fi.13
(H)
(I)
(I)
Page
G3
fi4
fi4
General ..................................................................................................................................... 76
(A) Application .
.
. ..
.
7fi
(B) Other Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
..
76
Notation
.... .
.. . . .
.
.
.
7fi
(A) Loads and Forces . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
76
(B) Dimensions and Constants
....
.
. ..
7G
Materials Properties .......................................................................................................... 77
(A) Concrete
.
.
. ..
. . .. . .
77
(B) Reinforcement
..
. .
.
78
Loads and Lo:id Factor Equations.......................................................................... 7
(A) Loads .... .
. . .. .
. .
.
.
7'J
(B) Load Factor Equations ...................................................................... 79
Str-ength Provisions .......................................................................................................... 79
(A) Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
... ... .
79
Aitic1e
Flexure
..
(A)
(B)
(C)
( B)
Page
811
80
I- and T-sections
. . . .
8J
Rectangular sections with compression reinforcement
81
(D) Other cross sections
82
Shear .
.
.
..
..
82
(A) Shear stress
. . . . . ..
.
82
(B) Shear' reinforcement
. . ....
. . .. . . .
83
(C) Stress restrictions .. .
.
. ..
88
(D) Shear reinforcement restiictions . . . . . . . . . .
.
83
(E) Shear stress in slabs and footings
......
84
Columns
. .
84
(A) Croneral
. .
.
.
84
(B) Column Section Capacities
. . .
86
(C) Slenderness effects in columns
.
.
8f
Bearing .. .
.. .
. .. . . .
. .. .
.
.
88
Service Lo:id Requirements .
..
.
88
(A) Seivice Load Stresses ............................................................................ 88
T"atigue
. . .
. .. .
. . .
.
8!1
(A) Concieto
.
. .
.
89
.
.. .......
89
( B) Reinforcement
F1exuial Stress Limitations
. ......... .........
89
( A) General................................................................................................................ 89
v aterproof tleck protecti on system
Deflection s
( A) Super structure depth recommendafi ons
(R ) Dead load deflections at falsexvork removal .
( C) Longtime deflections caused by dead loads, crecJi
an1 shrinkage
. . .
. .
Overload ..
.
.
. .
. . ..
.
. . . .. .
Development of Reinforcement
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
(F)
(G)
(H)
(I)
(I)
(K)
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
16.4
1.6.5
1.6.6
1.G.7
. . . .. .
8
HO
Al
1)1
General
.
.
.
Al
Positive moment reinforcement
.
92
Negative moment reinfoi cement . . . . . . . . , .............................. 92
Special members
.
.
fi8
Development length of ileformecl bars in tension .
!i3
Development length of deformed liars in compression
I)?
Development length of bundled laai s . . . .
.. ,
04
Standai'd hooks in tension .
.
.
.
fi4
Comloin:ition development length
.
114
Mechanical anchorage . . . ..
. ..
fi4
Anchorage of she:ir reinforcement
...,
114
. .
.
.
.. .... .
.. .. . . .
.
9
!l
9fi
fi6
97
Jfi
011
lIlG
GONT5NTS
Ai ticle
1.6.8
1.6.9
Flexure
1.6.11
1.6.12
1.6.13
1.6.14
Steel Stiess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shear
(C)
1.6.24
101
101
102
102
102
102
102
103
103
1113
103
1fl5
19ii
1fl5
106
106
Bundling
101
104
Composite Stiuctures
(A) General
( B) Sheai-
1.5.18
.. ..
Page
101
10
107
107
107
107
197
108
108
108
i08
108
Diaphragms
Isolated Beams .
Girders
(A I
110
110
111
111
lit
111
Allowable Stresses
Allowable Stresses for \Veld Metal .
Fatigue Stresses
1.7.4
1.7.5
116
117
Ai'tic1e
1.7.fi
Iron
1.7.7
1.7.8
1.7.9
1.7.10
1.7.11
1.7.12
1.7.13
1.7.14
1.7.15
1.7.16
1.7.17
1.7.18
1.7.19
1.7.20
1.7.21
1.7.22
1.7.23
1.7.24
1.7.25
1.7.2B
1.7.27
1.7.28
1.7.29
1.7.30
1.7.31
1.7.32
1.7.83
1.7.34
1.7.8?
1.7.36
1.7.87
.7. 9
.7.
. .
.7.4
.7.
.7.44
.7.
. .46
.7.4
.7. 8
( A)
( B)
( G)
124
Bearing on Masonry .
124
124
126
125
125
DETAILS OF DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12?
Bronze or Copper-alloy
CON'IENTS
Article
BEARINGS
Fixed Bearings
Expansion Bearings
Rollers
Sole
Masonry Bearings .... . . .. . . . .
.. .
. .
. .
139
Anchor Bolts ................................................................................................................... 139
Pedestals and Shoes .................................................................................................... 140
FLOOR SYSTEM
1.7.57
1.7.58
1.7.69
1.7.60
1.7.61
1.7.62
1.7.63
1.7.64
140
Stringers
. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. ..
. . . .
140
Floorbeams ......................................................................................................................... 140
Cross Fram s .. . ....
Expansion
. .. . . .. .. .
. .. .
. .
1411
Rearing Stiffeners
....... .
.. .. . . .. .
..
..
142
Cover Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7.68
1.7.69
1.7.70
143
143
143
143
148
144
144
14G
Longitudinal Sf iffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bearing Stiffeners
(A)
(B)
Camber
TRUSSES
1.7.76
1.7.76
1.7.77
1.7.78
1.7.79
1.7.80
1.7.81
1.7.82
1.7.83
1.7.84
1.7.8?
1.7.86
142
ILATE GIRDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .......
Plate Girders, General . . . . . . . .
.. .... ........ ..
.
Flanges . . .
.... .
.
..
.. .. . .
(A) Welded Girders
.. . . .
.
. .... .
(B) Riveted or Bolted Girders . .. .
. . . .
Thickness of: Web Plates . . . .
.. .. .. . .
.. .
(B) Girders Not Stiffened Longitudinally
(A)
1.7.74
142
142
. . .. ..
.. .. .
Welded Girders . .
........
. . .
.. ..
..
. .
146
148
149
149
ISO
1fi0
HO
Trusses, General . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .
..
. . 1fi0
Truss Members . .
. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . UI
Secondary Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . .
............. ....... .
TU
Diaphragms ........................................................................................................................ 152
Camber .. . . . .. . .... . . . . . .
.
. .
.
1fi2
Working Lines and Gravity Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ifi2
Portal and Svay Bracing . .. . .
.. ... .. ... . ..
.
152
Fillers, Development, Maximum Numbers, Etc. .
12
Perforated Cover Plates and Lacing Bars .
.
.
18
(A) Perforated Cover Plates ................................................................... 153
(B) Lacing Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
..
1fi3
Gusset Plates .................................................................................................................. 164
Half-Through Truss Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
US
Fastener Pitch in Ends of Compression
......
. . . 15fi
Article
1.7.87
1.788
1.7.89
1790
1.791
Page
Net Section of Riveted or High Strength Bolted Tension Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . US
Compression Members'Thickness of Metal . . . . . .
.
.
.
156
Stay
Plates
.......................................................................................................................... 158
RIBBED
ARCHES
168
Thickness
of
Web
Plates,
Solid
Rib
Arches
168
1.7.92
1.7.93
1.7.94
1.7.9?
1.7.96
1.797
1.7.98
1.7.?
17.100
1.7.101
1.7.102
1.7.103
1.7.104
1.7.106
1.7.107
1.7.108
1.7.109
1.7.112
1.7.118
. .
. . .
.
.....
.
U'l
COMPOSITE
CIRDERS
.................................................................................................................................................. 160
Composite I-Girders, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
lftl
Shear Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hit
Effective Flange Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1
Stresses
. .
..
.
1ti1
Shear .. .
. . .
.
.. .. .... .... . ..
..
1 2
(A) Hoiizonta1 Shear
. . . .... .. . .... .
.
1f2
(B) Vertical Shear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . US
Deflection
. .... . .
.. . . .
.... .
.
. .
1tU
Composite Box Girders, General . .
. ....
. .. .
US
Lateral Distribution of Loads for Bending Moment
16G
Design o:I Web Plates
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IGA
(A) Vertical Shear
166
(B) Secondary Bending Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lfiti
Design of Bottom Flange Plates . .
. . . . . . . . 1f7
( A) Tension Flanges .......................................................................... 167
( B) Compression Flanges Unstiffened
.
.
. . . 1G7
(D)
1.7.111
.. .
. .
169
( C)
1.7.110
. .
. . .
167
ROLLED
PLATE
GIRD
ERS
S
c
o
p
e
M
i
n
i
m
u
m
R
a
d
i
u
s
o
f
C
u
r
v
a
t
u
r
e
C
a
m
b
e
r
CONTLNTS
Article
LOAD FACTOR DESIGN
1.7.117
1.7.118
1.7.119
1.7.120
1.7.121
1.7.122
1.7.123
1.7.124
1.7.12?
1.7.12
1.7.127
1.7.128
1.7.129
1.7.180
1.7.132
1.7.1?3
1.7.134
1.7.136
Scope . .. .
h
1.74
.. . . .. . . .. .... .
.. .. .. .. . .... . . . .. .. .. .
Notation . . . . .... .. . .
Loads ......
. . .... .
Design Theory . . . . .
.
Assumptions
.
Design Strength :for Steel . . . . . .
..
. .
. ..
..
J74
174
.
.
.
17fi
17
. . . . . .. .. .. . .
17f
.. ... ...
... 17f
17fi
189
Aitic1e
1.7.1?7
1.7.188
Page
Fatigue
19?
( A)
General
(B)
Composite
Construction
BRIDGES
Bridges. General
. .. . .. ... . . ... . .
19fi
...
196
1.7.142
1.7.143
(A)
(B)
Allowable
(A)
(B)
( C)
(D)
Thickness
(A)
1.98
.... .
(B) GidersandTinnsverseJ3cams..
Diaphragms ..
1.7.14T
\Vearing
..
Stiffness Requirements
(A)
(B)
..
..
..
.......
.
. .
. 148
..
1.82
1.8.3
1.8.4
1.8.?
1.86
1.8.7
1.8.8
I99
21It1
General
.
.
200
Design
.
. ..
.... .. .
2110
(A) Seam Sti'ength ....................................................................................... 201
(B) Handling and Installation Strength
201
(C) Failure of the Conduit Wall
.
. 201
(D) Deflection or Flattening
.
. . 203
Chemical and Mechanical Requirements
.
204
(A) AluminumCorrugated
Metal Pipe and Pipe-Arch
204
(B) AluminumStructural Plate Pipe and Pipe-Arch . . 204
(C) SteelCorrugated Metal Pipe and PipeArch
204
(D) SteelStructural Plate Pipe and Pipe-Arch
.
20fi
.kbrasive or Corrosive Conditions . . . . . .
. . .
205
Rivets & Bolts ................................................................................................................ 206
Multiple Structures
. . . . .
..
.
.
20fi
Sloped EnclsSkewed
..
.
.
. ..
206
Maximum Depths of Cover .
.................
. . . . . 20G
SECTION 9STRUCTURAL PLATE ARCHES
Gcneral ...
.
.
. . .
1.9.
1.fi.4
198
198
Defections
.
.
.
.
.
199
Vibrations .................................................................................................. 199
181
11)7
197
11)?
197
197
197
197
1.98
198
1.7.144
1.7.14?
1.7.14
17.148
Mani
He,.ha
ScourConditlons
n p
i. .
Multiple Arches
.
.
Suhstructure Design . . . . . .
: ::
.
. .
.... .
.... .
20?
20fi
. . .
..
.
.. . .
2tJG
207
207
2tI7
CONTENTS
Page
At-ticle
SECTION
Allow able
(A)
( B)
( C)
(D)
1.10.2
( F)
Formulas
(A)
(B)
( C)
( D)
(E )
(F )
(G)
(H)
(I)
(I)
( K)
1.10.8
1.10.4
1.10.?
1.10.6
1.10.7
1.10.8
General
I0PIMBER STRUCTURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stresses . . . .
... .
.
. .
.
Allowable Unit Stresses for Stress-Grade Lumber
Allowable Unit Stresses :for Glued Laminated Tim1er
Allowable Unit Stresses for Normal Loading Conditions . . . . .
.
.
.
.
Allowable Unit Stresses for Permanent Loading . .
Allowable Unit Stresses for Wind, Earthquake or
Short Time Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combined Stresses .
.
. .
....
.
.
for the Computation of Stresses in Timber . . . . . . . .
Horizontal Shear in Beams . .
.. . ... . .. .
Secondary Stresses in Curved Glued Laminated
M
rb sion or Bearing Perpendicularto Grain'.
Simple Solid Column Design
208
208
209
209
200
209
217
221
223
224
226
'
Bolts
Washers
Hardware for Seacoast Structures
Columns and Posts
Pile and Framed Bents
(A) Pile Bents
fB) Framed Bents
(C) Sills and Mud Sills .
( D) Caps
(E) Bracing
(F) Pile Bent Ab utments .
TruSSes
( A) Joints and Splices
( B ) Floor Beams
( C) Hangers
( D) Eyebars and Counters
(E) Bracing
( F) Cambei
Floors and Railings
(A) Stringers
(B) Bridging
(G) Nailing Strips .
( D ) Flooring
( E) Retaining Pieces
( F) Wheel Guards
( G) Drainage
(H) Railings .
Fire Stops
SECTION 11 LOAD CAPACITY RATING OF EXISTING
BRIDGES
Under Permit .
207
207
207
207
226
22G
226
227
227
230
280
230
2
2
2
2
21
231
232
232
232
232
233
233
233
233
233
233
233
234
234
234
234
A iticle
1.11.2
Impact
1.11.4
Ad justable Loads
Stress Analysis
Allowable Stresses
1.12.1
Gcneial
Design
240
]4O
242
Loads
1.134
113.7
1.138
1.13. 11
1.13. 12
Design
Joint Strength
Handling and Installation Strength
Critical Buckling of Liner Plate \Va1l .
Defloctlon or Flattening
Chem ical and Mech anical Requirements
( A) Ch emical Composition
( R) Minimum Mechanical Properties
Before Cold Forming
Sectional Proper ties
Coatings
Rolts
Safety Fiictors
Division
242
242
243
248
of
Flat
Plate
244
244
244
24?
24?
II
CONST RUCTION
SECTION IEXCAVATION AND FILL
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.?
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.1.8
2.1.9
2,1.111
2.1.11
2.2.1.
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
General
..
...
..
......
247
Preservation of Channel
..
.
.
.
.
247
Depth of Footings ........................................................................................ 248
Preparation of Foundations for Footings . . . . . . . .
.
248
Cofferdam and Cribs
. .
248
(A) General
.
.
.
.
248
(R) Protection of Concrete
. . .
.
248
(C) Ilrav ings Required ................................................................. 249
(D) Removal
.
. .. . . . . .. .. .. . .... .. 24!)
Pumping ........................................................................................................... 249
Inspection
. . ..
. .. .
.
. .
249
Back-fill
.
.
.
249
.
.
.. .. . . .
2fi(J
Filled Spandrel Arches . .... . .
Approach Emliankment
..
..
.
...
2fi0
Classification of Excavation
.
.
.
2fit1
Measurement and Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.......
2fit)
SECTION 2SHEET PILES
General
. ........ .
.. .
Timber Sheet Piles . .. .. .
.
Concrete Sheet Piles ........
.
Steel Sheet Piles
Measurement and Payment
. ... ...
SECTION 3DEARING PILES
2.3.1
247
Materials
. .. .
. . .
.. ...
. . .
.... . ..
. . .
.
..
.
..............
. . .
...
..
.
. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .
2 1.
2fi1
2fi1
2U
261
2 2
2?2
2 2
A ti
2. .2
2. .
Page
Design and Conditions of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . .
252
Preparation
for
Driving
.................................................................................................................................................. 252
(A)
Excavation
....................................................................................................................................... 262
( B)
Caps . .
.............. .... .
(C)
Collars
( E)
(F)
Splicing Piles
Painting Steel Piles
IDA
Pintinq;
. . . . . . .. .. .. .
....
..
..
. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
......
.. . .
..
. . . .. . . . . .. . .
2fi2
2fi
2fi8
2a3
253
Methods of Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
2j3
(A) General ........................................................................................................... 2
(B) Ihammers for Timber and Steel Piles
. . 253
t C) Hammers for Concrete Piles
.
.
. .
253
(D) Additional Equipment ...................................................................... 264
{E) Lcads
Defective Piles
2.3.7
2.3.8
2.3 .9
2.3.1G
2.3.11
2.8.12
2.3.13
.. . ,
. .. .
254
. .
,. .......... 264
.
. .
2fi4
264
2fi4
Geneia1
....... ......
258
268
2fi9
2fit9
(B)
2.3.19
2 20
2.4.1
General
Method A
. .. .
. .
. ..
. .
2fi9
250
2fi9
2a9
(C) Method B .
. .. . .
.... ..
. .
.
2G0
(D) Falsexvork and Defective Piles ........................................................ 261
(E) Additional Requirements .................................................................... 261
. . .
.. .
.
. .
2G2
2G2
SE
CT
IO
N
4
Ge
ner
al
. . .
. ..
. . .
.. .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.. .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. .
2f32
Page
Article
2.4.2
243
2.4.4
2.4.?
2.4.6
2.4.7
2.4.8
249
2.4.10
2.4.11
2.4.12
2.4.1B
2.4.14
(A)
(B)
(G)
(D)
Cement . . .
.. ....
. .
2f2
2f4
24
2 5
. . . . .
..
2f8
. . . . .
2f8
Mixing Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.... . .
2G9
( A) General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . 26!)
(B) Mixing at Site ....................................................................................... 269
(C) Truck Mixing .......................................................................................... 269
(D) Partial Mixing at the Central Plant ........................................ 270
(E) Plant Mix
. . .. .. .. .. . . .. . .. .. . . ..
270
(F) Time of Hauling and Placing Mixed Concrete .................... 270
(G) Hand Mixing ............................................................................................ 270
(H) Delivery .........................................................................................................271
(I)
Retempering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .. .. ..
271
Handling and Placing Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
271
(A) General ......................................................................................................... 271
(B) Culx-erts ......................................................................................................... 273
(C) Girders, Slabs and Columns ............................................................ 274
(D) Arches . . .. . .
.. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. .. . . 27fi
Pneumatic Placing ....................................................................................................... 275
Pumping ............................................................................................................................... 276
Depositing Concrete Under Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27fi
Construction Joints
..
.. .. .. . . .
27fi
(A) General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
276
(B) Bonding
. .. .
...... .... .
.... . .. .
276
Rubble or Cyclopean Concrete .............................................................................. 277
Concrete Exposed to Sea Water ......................................................................... 277
Concrete Exposed to Alkali Soils or Alkali Water
278
2.4.24
2.4.2?
2426
2.4.27
2.4.28
282
General
282
283
28
28
28
CONTENTS
Article
2.4.29
24.J0
2.4.31
2.4.32
2.4.33
2.4.34
2.5.2
2.5.B
2.5.4
2.5.5
2.?.6
2.5.7
2.5.8
2.?.0
2510
2.6.1
2.6.2
Page
284
..
..
..
Mortar
. .. .
. . ..
. .. . . . .. .. .. .
. . .. . . . .. .. .
. .. . . . .
..
... ..... . . . . . .
29?
29
29?o
2I1fi
Article
2.6.3
2.6.4
2.6.6
2.6.6
2.6.7
2.6.8
2.6.9
2.6.10
2..11
2.G.12
2.6.13
2.G.14
2.6.16
2.6. 16
2.G.17
2.7.1
2.7.2
Page
He:iders
. .. . .
.. . .. . ..
..
282
28
2.8.4
2.8.5
2.8.6
287
2.8.8
29(;
2g7
Resetting
.. . .. . .. . . ... . . . .. ..
. . . . . . .. . .. .
298
Dowels and Cramps .................................................................................................... 298
Copings
.
.
. . .. ................ .
.
299
301
3tl1
?02
ot12
3t12
03
308
?03
?03
'3tl 3
808
$0?
. .
. .. .
04
3Q4
(A)
BIick
304
(B)
Mortar
. . .. . .
Copings, Bridge
. .
.. . .
...
.... .. .
Type of Fabrication
...... .
Construction
2.10.1
. ..
. . . ..
Description
2.9.2
.. .
Laying Stone . . .. .
. . .
. .
. .
..
.
297
(A) General ........................................................................................................ 297
(B) Face Stone .... ......
. .
.. .
. .
297
Laying Stone
281
.. .. . .
..... .
.......
?04
?04
FOR
0fi
CONTENTS
A ti
2.
.2
2.1 .
Quality of \V orkmansh ip
Materials
( A)
( l3 )
( C)
( II )
(E)
(F)
(G)
(H)
(I)
(I)
( K)
2. 10.4
2.10.5
2.10.6
2. 10.7
.. .. ..
.. .. . . .. . .. ..
2. 10.12
. 7
2.
2.
.
.
( B)
2.1020
I C) Turned Bolts .
( D ) Ribbed Bolts
Connections Using High Strength Bolts .
( A ) General
( B) Bolts. Nuts and Washers .
( C ) Bolted Parts
( D)
2.111.21
0 ti
81f1
Al.II
?11
'311
312
812
?12
?12
312
Bolts
2.10.13
2.10.14
2.
d06
2.10.11
2.10.1?
2.10.16
Punchecl Holes
Reamed or Drilled Holes .
Subpu nch ing and Rearing o1 Field Connections .
Accuracy of Punched and Drilled Holes . Accuracy
2.10. 10
Structural Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Forgings and Steel Shafting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Castings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . ....
Iron C astings . .
.. . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . .. . . . . .. .. ...
Ductile Iron Castings
.
Malleable Castings
. .
.
Bronze Castings and Copper-Alloy Plates. . . . . . . . .
Sheet Lead
... . .
. . .
.
.
Sheet Zinc
. . . .
. . .
.......
Galvanizing
. .
...... . .
. .. .
Canvas and Red Lead for Bedding Masonry Plates
Page
?0o
2.10.8
2.10.9
( E)
Rivetincr
Installation
Inspection
317
317
320
320
3211
820
3211
320
320
321
? 2J.
321
?23
324
Aiticle
2.10.22
Page
32fi
32fi
\Velds . . .
.. ..
.
...
.
. .
(A) General
. .
.. .
( B ) Filler Metal
. . .
.
.
(C)
lreheat and Interpass Temperature
( D ) Qu:ilification of \Veldeis, Welding Operators
?2
and
Tackers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.10.24
2.10.26
2.10.26
2.10.27
2.10.28
2.10.29
2.10.30
2.10.31
2.10.32
2.10.33
2.10.34
2.10.3?
?. 10.3G
2.1 0.37
2.10.38
2. 10.811
2.10.40
2.111.41
2.10.42
2. 10.43
2.10.44
2. 10.4?
2. 10.4
2.10.47
(E)
(F)
Procedure Qualification . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection of \Ve1ds
. .
. .
fG)
.
. .
?31
882
833
3?fi
344
344
21048
328
328
328
33fJ
Or thotropic-Dock Biidges
346
4
46
34
48
48
CONTENTS
Article
2.10.68
2. 10.69
2.10.60
2. 10.61
2.10.62
2.10.63
2.10.64
Page
Assembling Steel ......................................................................................... 353
Riveting .......................................................................................................... 353
Pin Connections .... .
I\Iisfits
.. .
. ..
. .
....
...... .
.... .... . .
.. .... . .
. . . .
3 4
?54
3fi4
I\fothod of Measurement
.. .. . . .. .
.
.
Basis of Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
365
3fi7
EXPANSION PLATES
2.11.1
2.11.2
( C)
2.11.3
2.11.4
2.11.6
2.11.6
358
Powder
5intered
Bearings
SECTION
General
Materials
( A) Steel
2.12.3
2.12.4
2.12.5
2.12.6
2.12.7
2.12.8
2.12.9
( C ) Concrete
( D) Skid Resistance .
Arrangement of Sections .
Provision :for Camber .
Field Assembly
Connection to Supports .
Welding
Repai ring Damaged Galvanized Coatings .
Concrete Filler
Painting
Measurement and Payment .
( B)
2.12.10
2. 12.11
Expansiori
2122
2.12.1
and
Protective Treatment
( Shop Coat)
359
35?
360
360
360
360
360
361
361
361
................................... 362
METAL RAILING
362
2.13.4
Construction
362
362
2.1B 6
General
2.13.?
Painting
CONCRETE RAILING
2.1
7
2138
GONTENTS
Page
Article
364
General
WOOH RAILINC
General
3G4
3a4
SECTION 1
2.14.1
2.14.2
2.14.
2.14.4
2.14.?
2.14.6
2.14.7
2.14.8
2.14.9
2.14.10
Material .
(A) Shop Coat ( Prime Coat) .
( B ) First Iield Coat
( C)
Mixin(; of Paint .
Weathei- Conditions
AJi pli cation
(A) ieneral
(B) Biush Qing
( U) Inaccessible Surfaces . .. ..
..
.. .. . .. .
Removal of Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86fi
SGD
367
8G7
Thinning Paint
(B)
(C)
(D)
2.14.11
2.14.12
(E)
...
.. ........... . ...
.....
. ..
Shop Painting
..
..
iJ6ti
3 7
3fi7
367
368
3fiI1
PROTECTI ON OF
EMBANKMENTS
AND
General
MATERIAL
Materials
CONSTRUCTION
Loose Riprap for Slopes.
371
.
. .
Mortar Riprap :for Slopes.
. . .. . .. .
Stone Ripiap :for Foundation Protection. . . . . . . , .
Conci ete Ripiap in Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Concrete Slab Riprap .. .... . . .. . .
.
FILTER MATERIAL
2.1?.8
871
?72
375
HTS
873
CONTENTS
Article
Page
374
MEASUREMENT
I\Measurement
PAYMENT
2.16.10
Payment
SECTION 1
2.16.1
CONCRETE CRIBBING
371
General
2.16.2
2.16.3
Construction
Measurement and Payment .
2.17.1
General .
.. ..
.. .
..
.
. . .
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(A)
Mortar
377
?77
SECTION 18
?81
SECTION 17
2.17.2
2.17.8
2.17.4
2.17.5
2.17.6
2.17.T
2.17.8
2.17.0
2.18.1
2.18.2
2.18.3
2.18.4
2.18.5
&'ATERPROOFING
. . ......
..
377
37
7
(B) Asphalt ......................................................................................................... 377
(C) Pitch .............................................................................................................. 378
(D) Fabric ............................................................................................................ 378
(E) Tar for Absorptive Treatment. .................................................... 878
(F) Tai Seal Coat ......................................................................................... 378
(G) joint Fillers . .. . .
. . . . . . . .. . . . .
878
(H) Inspection ancl Delivery . . . . . . . . . .
..
79
Storage of Fabric ......................................................................................................... 379
Preparation of Surface ............................................................................................ 379
ApplicationGeneral .................................................................................................... 379
icationDetails ..................................................................................................... 380
Dp
p'age Pate ing . .. . . . .. . .. . ..
am
.. . .
. .
..
381
Protection Course ......................................................................................................... 381
Measurement and P:iyment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .........
?81
DAMPPROOFING
General
Materials
Preparation of Surface
8l
82
382
382
382
Application
382
2. 19.1
General Requirements
382
220.1
SECTION 20
2202
Materials
220.3
TIMBER STRUCTURES . . . . . . . . . . .
.
..
388
383
(A)
38?
. .
. .
.
.
383
L (B) Structural Shapes
(C)
Castings
....
.
.
..
.
.
.
..
.
38o
u
(D) Hardware .................................................................................................... 388
m
(E) Paint for Timber Structures. ...................................................... 384
l
(F) Timber Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
?8fi
CONTENTS
Article
( C)
220.0
2207
2.20.8
2.20.9
2.20.10
2.20.11
2.20.12
2.20.13
2.20.16
2.20.16
2.20.17
2.20.18
22019
2. .2
.2 .
2.
.2
2.2 .2
2.2 . 4
2.
.2
3P9
389
389
390
390
390
390
390
390
( D) Bolt Holes
(E) Temporary Attachment
Untreated Timbep
Treatment of Pile Heads .
(A) General
(B) Method AZinc Covering
( C ) Method BFabric Covering
Holes for Bolts, Dowels, Rods and Lag Screws .
Bolts and Washers
Countersinking
Framing
Pile Bents
Framed Bents
(A) Mud Sills
(B)
2.20.14
Page
Treated Timber
( A)
Handling
(B) Framing and Boring
Caps
(C)
( D)
( E)
39G
391
?.91
391
391
392
392
392
392
392
392
892
393
Concrete Pedestals
Sills
Posts
Design and Construction
393
Bracing
Stringers
Plank Floors
398
398
893
894
Laminated or
(A)
( B)
3114
Slab Spans .
T Beams
Trusses
Truss Housings
Erection o:I
and Railings .
Painting
Measurement and Payment .
394
?94
39o
395
?9o
395
39?
39?
396
General ............................................................................................................396
I\Materials
?96
Identification and Inspection
39f
2.22.1
897
Material
. . . . .. .
397
Timber
397
(A)
(B) Logs
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
397
897
(A) Timber
(B) Logs
Construction
(A) Foundation
(B) Mud Sil]s
397
897
398
398
398
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.. . ...
397
B98
CONTENT S
Article
2.22.4 cont.
(D)
( E)
Page
398
3?9
Ties
Fastening .
2.2B.1
2.23.2
2.28.8
2.23.4
2.23.6
2.23.6
2.23.7
2.23.8
2.23.9
2.23.10
2.23.11
2.23.12
2.23.13
General
Forming and Punching of Corrugated Structural Plates and
Sheets :for Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
....
. 4011
(A) Structural Plate Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .
. . 411f1
( B) Corrugated Metal Pipe . . . . . . . .
.
. . . .
400
( C) Elongation .................................................................................... 400
Assembly ......................................................................................................... 400
Bedding ............................................................................................................ 401
Pipe Foundation .......................................................................................... 401
silent
. . . . . .. . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.. ..
. .
404
404
in
Bracing . . . . . . . .
. ... ... . ..... .. . . . . . ..
. ..
402
Camber ........................................................................................................... 402
Arch Substructures and Headwalls ................................................................... 402
4114
Description
Orthotropic Deck Bridge,s
( A)
Material
( B)
( C)
Placement
Inspection
Mateiials
Manufacturing Requirements
Tolerances
Quality Assurance
2.2G.1
2.26.2
2.26.8
2.26.4
2.26.?
408
Scope
408
..
Descrpbon .
.
. . . .
.
409
Forming sndPunching of Liner Plates ..... ........ . 409
Installation ...................................................................................................... 409
Measurement
. . .......... . . . .. . ..
...............
41fJ
CONTENTS
INDEX TO FIGURES
Figures
1.1.7
1.1.9
1.1.17
1.2.SA
1.2.SR
1.2.SC
1.7.3A
1.7.3B
17.19
1.7.70
1.7.71A
1.7.71B
1.7.111A
1.7.111B
1.10.2
1.13.1
2.111.22B
2.10.23A
2. 10.28B
2.10.23C
2.10.23D
2.23
Page
Clearance Diagram for Biidges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
Railings . .
.
..
. .
.
.
. .... .
.
..
fi
Clearance Diagram for TunnelsTwo Lane Highway
Traffic .
II
'
1411
Flange Stress Reduction Factors, n== .72. ............................................. 172
Flange Stress Reduction Factoi-, o=:: .50. . . . . . . . . .
172
Spaced Column, Connector Joined.
. . ... ..
.
229
Diagram for Coefficient Ci for Tunnels in Soil. ................................... 241
Discontinuities ............................................................................................................. 827
Procedure Qualification Fillet Weld Test. ................................................ 834
Stud Shear Connector . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .. . .
388
Tensile Test Fixture .............................................................................................. 339
BenJ Test Fixture and Failures. ....................................................................339
Pipe Bedding, Foundation & Sideflll. . . . . . . .
.... . .. .
4t13
INDEX TO TABLES
1.3.IB
1.3.IC
1.?.27
1.?.27A
1.6.29
1.7.1
1.7.3A
1.7.8B
1.8.2
1.10.1
1.10.1A
1.10.TB
1.11.?
2.10.8A
2.10.8B
2.10.20A
2.10.20B
Distribution of Loads
Bending Moment in Floor Beams .
recommended
Minimum
Thickness
for
Constant
Depth
Members
Long-tme Deflettins
Standard Hooks in Tension
Allowable
Stresses
Str-ess Cycles
F'atigue Stresses
94
1. 12
118
242
218
Timber
.......................................................................................................................................... 222
Allov
able
Stresses
.. ....
. .
2?fi
Bolt and
Nut
Dimensio
ns . .
. ....... . . ..
3(J9
\Vasher
Dimensio
ns
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ?I19
Bolt
Tension ................................................................................................... 322
Nut
Rotation
from
Snug
Tight
Condition.
. . .
82i3
Discont
inuities
..
.. .
.. .
82fi
Identifica
tion
Color
Codes.
.
.
.
. .
848
Typical
Dimensi
ons of
Timber
Connect
ors............................................................................................................ 387
PR E FACE
Eleventh Edition
1. The Interim Specifications of 1970, 1971, arid 1972, have been adopted
and included, together. iv ith tv elve items x\hich x\ ere balloted and adopted in
November 1972.
2. The section on Railings (Article 1.1.9 ) has been expanded and modifieit
to provide :foi' irnpi oved safety performance.
?. Load Factor design concepts are now permitted for both structuia1 steel
and ieinfoicod concrete structu res as an alternate to existing design enter ia.
Th is load factor concept has also been included in the prestiessed concietc
design provi sion s Koi ultimate stienth.
4. Section 7 of Design contains piovisions for heat curving and for design
of oithotropic deckbiidges.
5. Section lHH has been extensively modified to provide nev design icquii e-
I N TRO DU CTIO N
Th o eompil ation of these specificati ons began with the organ nation, in
1921, of the Comm ittee on Riidges an cl Structuies of the Americ:in Association
of State H ighv ay Other at s. lJuiin g the peiiod from 1921, until p rinfed in 19 1,
the s(ioc l ficatlo ns v-ei'e g ra dually developed, and as the sever at clivi sion s were
a pp i oved f iona tune to time, they v ci e made :ivailabJ e in mimeogiaphed form
Koi use of the State Hi gh ay l3epaitments anet other' organ izat ions. A complete
spee ifiection v'as available i n 1fi26 an ct i I v as ievised in 1928. Thou g1i not in
jiii nted foim, th c s(iecification s v ei e valuable to the bridge engineer ing pi'ofes
si on cluiin y the Jiei iocl of clevelopment.
The fi i st edition of the Standaic1 Speer ficati ons i as published in 1931, an d
it v as follow-ed by the 19 5, 19 t1, 1944, 1949, 196 3, 1957, 19G1, 19t3 fi, :inr1 1969
i ex ise1 e1itions. The piesont and eleventh edition constitutes a i evisi on of tha e
11Iti9 5peer tic ation s, including those cliiinges adopted st nce the public:iti on of the
tenth caution an cl th ose th iou gh 1972. The constant iesearch and doveto pment
in steel, con crete, anal tim1er stiuctui es p tactically dictates th e necessl ty of
rcx i sin c he speci fixation s evei four years, and the 197? edition continues thi s
Am ong the 1 mpoitan I i evi sions in the 1978 edition is the ac1o(ition o1
I omit factor' criteria as an :ilternate design methocl. Other mod ifications aie
ou flined in the Pi'eface.
Interim 5peer fieati on s ai'o usu ally publ ished late in the calendar year, an d
a icvi se1 edition of thi s book is published eveiy four years. The Inter inn
Speci fixations have the same status as standaids of the Amcl iean Association
of State Highx ay Other als, lut aie tentative revi sions appi oved by at least twoth irds of the Comm ittee on Bridges and Structures. These rex ision s at o v
oted on by the Association Member Departments prior to the publication o1 each
nev ed it ion of this hook, and if :ippi'oved by at least two-th irds of the mem be
re, they ac inclutel in th e new ed ition as standaids of The Associ ation. Members of
the Association aie the fifty State HIgh\vay Departments, the IIi strict of
Columb ia, Puerto Rico and the Fede ial Highway Admin i stration. bach member
has one vote.
Annual Interim Specifications are gen erally u sed by the State Highv ay
Departmen I after their adoption by the Brid ge Committee. OIdei s for these
annunl Intciim 5peclficat ion s sh oulcl be sent to the Executive Director of the
.1ssoci ation at ?41 National Piess Bui1ding, \V ash ington, Lt.C. 20004.
The Specification s for Highv ay Bridges ie intended to serve as a standaitt
or gu lde for th o prepai'ation of State sp ecification s :iia ct for iefei'encc Iy bi idge
engin eers.
Primaiily, the spec ificati errs set forth minimum rcqu iremen ts \\ h ich aie
const stent with cuiient p i'iictico, and certain mod ificati ons may 1e necess:in to
su it foe:it cond it ion s. They aJipl y to orlinary h lghv ay bridges an d supplomen tal
s(iecific:itIons in:iy be required Koi unusual types and for bridges with sp:ins
longer th an 60II feet.
Specifi cations of the Amer ie:in Society for 'lesting and Mate rials, th e
Amoi'ican Welding Society, the Ameiican Wood Preserveds Association and the
National I.umbci' Manufactuicrs Association arc referrecl to or are rocognizeil.
Numerous research liulletin s arc noted Koi references.
IO expiess
its sincei e appreciati on to the above organi zati ons, as well as to thos Universities and repiesentatives of industry \\ hose research effoits and consultations
have been most helpful in continued impiovement of these specification s.
Extensive references have been made to the Standaid Specifications for
Highway Miiterials published by the American Association
of
State
High\\':ty
tion in 1921 : Messrs. E. F . Kelley, who pioneered the work of the Committee,
A thin L. Gemeny, R.B. McMinn, epo d Archiband, G.S. Paxson, and Mr.
E.M. Johnson. Tue late Mr. Wai'd Goodman xv ould have completed eight years
as Chairman of the Bridge Committee this year, but his untimely death in
March 1973, resulted in the appointment of Mr. Charles Matlock. Mi. Goodman vvas also serving as Vice Piesident o1 AASIIO. The Committee expiesses Its sincere
appicciation of the v oik of these men and of those active members of the
past, v hose names, because of retirement, :ire no longer or the io1l.
Suggostions for' the innpmovement of the speci fixations at'e v elcome d. They
should be sent to th e Chat rnian, Committee on Bridges and Sfructui es, AA SIIO,
41 National Press Bldg., Washington, D.C. 200114. Inquiiies as to the i nteii t
or' aJiplicati on of the speci fixations should be sent to the same address.
A B B RE V I AT IONS
A.4 SHOAmerican .1ssociation of State Highv ay Officials
Divi.sion I
D ESIG N
DESIGN ANALYSIS
In any case where the specificati on s provide for an empirical formula
as a design convenience, a rational analysis based on a theory accepted by
the Comm it tee on Bridges and Structures of the American Association of
State Highway Ollie ials, with stresses in accordance with the specifications, will be considered as compliance with the specifications.
if necessary, channel changes, river training works and other construction which would red uce erosion problems and prevent possible loss of
the structure should be considered. Foundations of bridges pl aced across
channel changes should be designed for possible deepening an d v iden i ng
of the relocated channel. On wide flood plains, the lowering of approach
fills to provide overflow sections designed to pass unusual floods over the
highway is a means of preventing loss of structures. Where relief bridges
are needed to maintain the natural flow distribution and reduce backwater,
caution must be exercised in proportioning the size and in locating such
s I.ructu res to avoid undue scour or changes in the course of the main river
channel.
J . J .2 BRIDGE WATERWAYS
The determination o:I adequate waterway openings tor stream crossings is essential to the des ign of safe and economical bridges. Hyd raul ic
stud ies of bridge s ites are a necessary part of the preliminary design o:I
a bridge and reports of such studies should include applicable parts of
the follow in g outline :
f AJ Site Doto
1. Maps, stream cross sections, aerial photographs.
2. Complete data on existing bridges, including dates of construction and performance d u ring past floods.
3. Avail able h ighwater marks with dates of occurrence.
4. Information on ice, debris and channel stabil ity.
5. Factors affect in g wate r stages such as h igh water from other
streams, reservoirs, ftood control projects and tides.
H I GH WAY B RIDGE S
f Bl
Hydrologic
1.1.2
Analysis
1. Compl le flood data app licable to esti mat in g Poods at s ite, in cl ud i ng both h is ter ical Poods and max i mum floods of record.
2. P lot flood -Ireq uency cu rve for site.
3. Determ me d istrib ution of Pow and veloci ties at st te for flood
d i scharges to be cons i dered i n desk gn of structu re.
4. Plot stape -d tech a rge c urve for site.
fCl Hydroul ic A no lysis
1. Compute backwater and mean velocities at bridge open ing for
various trial brid ge lengths and selected d i sch arges.
2. Esti mate scou r depth at piers and abutments of proposed
structu res.
Usually, bridge wate rways are sized to pan a des i gn
flood of a
magn i tu de and Freq uency const stent w ith the type or class of h i ghway.
In the selection of the wate rway open ing, consideration should be g iven to
the anion n t of upstream pond inp, the passage of ice and debris and
poss ible scour of the bridge You n dat ion s. Where floods exceed in g the
design flood have occurred, or where su perfloods would cause extensive
damage to ad join ing property or the loss of a costly structure, a larger
waterway open ing may be warranted. Due consideration should be given
to any Federal, State and local reQu i re ments.
Relief open i n gs, spu r-dikes, debri s deflecto rs and channel training
woi ks should be used where needed to min inn ize the effect of adverse flood
flow cond i tions. W here scou r is l ikely to occu r, protection against
damage I rom scour should be provided for in the design of bridge piers
and ab u tments. Embankment slopes ad jacent to structu res su bject to
erosion should be adequately protected by rip-rap, flexible mattresses,
retards, spur di kes or other appropriate construction. Clearing of brush
and trees at ong embankments in the vic in i ty of bridge open ings should be
avoided to prevent h i gh flow veloci ti es and possi ble scou r. Borrow p its
shou ld not be located i n areas which would increase veloci ties and the
poss ibili ty of scou r at bridges.
Adequate proc'i sion shou ld be made for drift and ice by i ncreasi n g span
lengths and vertical clea rances, by selecting proper pier types and by
using debris deflectors. Special precautions against scour are required
when large coffe rdams are placed in unstable etream beds.
1.1.4
DE SI GN
supported on spread footi rigs when the natural stream bed can serve as
If headwalls and endwalls are required, they should be des igned not to
protrude above the ground line. Culvert open ings shall be placed a minimum o:I 30 feet from the edge of the traffic lanes or protection provided
by guardrail or other means. Where feasible, culverts shall be continuous
across medians to avoid the traffic hazard presented by additional openings. Where needed, debris control devices should be constructed to pre
vent clogging. If backfill and embankment materials are subject to piping,
consideration should be given to the use of cutoff walls or impervious
material placed at the entrance.
right
angles to the longitudinal center line of the bridge between the bottoms
of curbs or if curbs are not used, the clear width shall be the minimum
measured between the nearest faces of the bridge railing.
The wid th of the sidewalk shall be the clear width, measured at
right angles to the longitudinal center line of the bridge, from the
extreme inside portion of the handrail to the bottom of the curb or
guard-timber, except that if there is a trust, girder, or parapet wall
adjacent to the roadway curb, the width shal! tie measured to its extreme
walk side portion.
1. .7 CLEARANCES
fAJ Novigotionol
for the
of
1.1.7
except those streams that have been placed in the advance approval
category by the Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, must be obtained from
the U.S. Coast Guard and other appropriate agencies. Requests for such
permits from the U.S. Coast Guard should be addressed to the appropriate
District Commander.
f Bl
Vehiculor
The horizontal clearance shall be the clear width an d the vertical
clearance the clear heigh I for the passage of veh icu l ar traffic as shown
in Figure 1.1.7.
CLEARANCE
DIAG RAM
FIGUR E
FOR
BR IDYES
1. I .7
( 1 ) The roadway width ahall gener ally equal the full shoulder veidth of the approach roadway
section. Where curbed roadway sections app roach a structure, the same section shall be carried
across the structure. The minimum horizon ta1 clearan ce for low traffic spe d, low tra ffit v 6iume
bridges a hall be 8 -0 arealer than the ap p roach trave11e1 was.
For recommendation a as to roadw'ay widths for various vol umes o:I traffic see AAS HO A
Policy on Deaign Standard alute ratate Szstem, Geometric Deeign Standards for Highw'aYa
Other Than Freewaya, A Polic;v on Geometric Des ign of Rural Hizhwars, and /or A Policy
on Arterial Highways in Urban A reaa.
( 2 ) Vertical cleara nce on State trunk high waye and in terstate systems in rural areas shall
be at least 16 feet over the enti re roadw'ay w idth , to which an allow a rice should be added for
reeurf acing. On State trun k h iah ways and in terstate routes th rough urban areas a 16-foot
clearance shall be p rovided except in highly dev eloped areas. A 16-foot clearan ce should be
p rovided in both rural an d urban areas where en ch clearance is not un rea son ab1x costly and
where needed for defense requirements. Vertical clearan ce on all other high ways shall be at
leaat 14 feet over the entire roadway width to which an aim wance s hould be added for resurf act rig.
D E SI GN
fCl Other
The chan nel open ings and cleara nce shall be cleared with other
agencies has'ing j urisd iction over such matters. Channel open ings and
c learanc es i n general shall conform i n width, her ght, and location to at I
Federal, State and local req u iremen ts.
J .1.9
RAILINGS
f Al TroRic R oiling
While the primary purpose of traffic rail ing is to contain the
average vehicle using the structure, consideration should also be given
to protection of other vehicles near the collision, to vehicles or pedestrians on roadways being overcrossed, and to appearance and :freedom
of view from passing vehicles.
Materials for traffic railing shall be concrete, metal, timber or a
combination. Metal materials with less than 10 percent tested elongation shall not be used.
Ti afliC ra i li ngs sh on Id provide i smooth, con ti nu on s facc of rail
on the traffic st de with the posts set back from thP f aC O I wit l. Sti iictur.il
in t he rail
of ends, is
TRAFFIC
COMBIN
RAIL\NG
ATION
RAI L I NG
PEDE STR I AN
R Al LI NG
ml or combine
""'
DESIGN
essent ial. ThC iii ling system sh all be able to ie.sist the applicCl load s
at all lociti on s.
Protru sions or impress i errs at i-.ii I .joints shall be acceptable pio
t .33
C ml + - ; 5ut shaH uot trlss thau l
way car ried down slope by open or closed chutes near the end of: the bridge
st ructure. Longitudinal drainage on long bridges is acco mplished by
means of scuppers or inlets which should be of sufficient size and number
to drain the gutters adequately. Downspou ts, where requ ired, shou Id be of
rigid corrosion -resistant material not less than 4 inches in least dimension
and should be provided with clean outs. The details of deck drains should
be such ae to prevent the discharge of d rainage water against any portion
of the structure an d to prevent erosion at the outlet of the down spout.
Overhanging portions of concrete deck should be provided with a drip
bead or notch.
\ .1 .1 J SUPERELEVATION
The su pe re levation of the floor surf ace of a bridge on a horizontal
curve shall be prov i ded in accordance with the standard practice of the
commi ssion for the highway construction, exceJt that the su perelevati on
1 .J . J 3 BLAST PROTECTION
On bridges over steam railroad tracks, metal likely to be injured by
locomotive gases, and concrete surfaces less than 20 feet above the tracks,
shall be protected by blast plates. The blast plate shall be centered on a
line normal to the pliine of the two rails at the center l ine of the track,
thus takin g into account th e direction of blast d ue to superelevation. The
plates shall be not less than 4 feet wide and shall consist of wrought-iron, castiron, a cor-rosion and blast res isti rig alloy or asbestos-board shields, so su
ppo rte d that they may be readily replaced. The th ickness of plates an d
othe r parts i n d i rect contact with locomotive blast shall be not less than i
inch for cast-i ron, 7s inch for wrou ghtiron or alloy, '/_ inch for
plain asbestos -board an d 7 , i nch for corru gated asbestos-board. Bolts
shall be not less than /s inch in diameter. Pockets wh ich may hold
locomotive gases shall be avoided as far as practicable. All hasten ings
shall be galvan i zed or of cor ros i ve rest stant material.
1.J .14
D E SI GN
1 . J . 14 UTILITIES
Where required, p rov i sion s shall be made for trolley wire supports
and poles, pillars for lights, electric cond u its, telephone condu its, water
pipes, gas pipes and san itary sewers.
1 .1 .15 ROADWAY WIDTH, CURBS AND CLEARANCES FOR TUNNELS
ISee Figu re
IA I
. . 5)
Roodwoy Width
The horizontal clearance shall be the clear width and the vertical
clearance the clear height for the passage of vehicular traffic as shown
in Figure 1.1.15.
The clearances and width of roadway :for 2-lane traffic shall be not
less than those shown in Figure 1.1.15. The roadway width shall be
wOT
tCSS
THAN
JO fI
Sl0E GA t. k"
R 0 A D MAY
AT L E AST 2 F 7 GR EATER 7 HAN
APPROACH TRAVE L L E D
uT x oT LE ss Tn n z+
I . I . 15
( 1 ) For heavv traffic roade, roadway widtha greater than the above minima are recom mended.
If traffic lane widths exceed 12 feet. the roadway width may be reduced 2-0 Irom that
ccl culated Irom ri. 1. 1. 16.
For recommendations its to roadway wid(hs for various volumes of trafhc see AAS HO A
Policy on Design StandardsInterstate System, Geometric Deeian Stan darda for IIighways
Other Than Freeway: , A Policy on Geometric Design of Rural Highways. and /or A Potter
on A rterial Highways in Urban Areas.
( 2 ) Vertical clearance on State trunk highways and interstate systems i n rural areas shall
be at leiist 16 feet over the entire roadway width, to which an allow an ce should be ailded for
resurfacing. On State trunk highways and interstate routes through urban areas a 16-foot
clearan ce shall be p rovided except in highly develo ped areas. A 16-foot clearan ce should be
p rovi ded in both rural and urban areas where such clearance is not un reasonabIi' costly and
where needed for defense requirements. Vertical clearance on all other hi ghways shal I be at
least 1 4 feet over the entire roadway width to which an a1low'ance should be added for resurfaci rig.
increased at least ten feet and preferably twelve :f eet for each additional traffic lane.
I BI
Curbs
The w idth of curbs shall be not less than 18 inches. The height of
Vertical
Cleornnce
The vertical clearance, between curbs, shall be not less than 14 feet.
Roodwoy Widf h
The clear width between curbs shall be not less than that specified
for tunnels.
IB J
IC J Curbs
The width of curbs shall be not less than 18 inches. The height of
en rbs shall be as specified for bridges.
f Al Widths
The pier columns or walls for grade separation structures shall
gen oral!y be located a minimum of 30 feet from the edges of the through
traffic lanes. Where the practical limits of structure costs, type of a
str u c tu re, volu me anl dest gn speed of th ro u gh traffic, span arrangement, skew and terrain make the 30 foot offset i mpractical, the pier or
1. 1.17
D E 5I GN
AT LEAST 6O'- 0" GREATER THAN APPROACH PAVEMENT
FACE OF WALL
FACE OF WA LL
OR PIER
OR
PIER
GENERAL CONDITION
FACE OF WALL
FACE
FACE OF
FACE OF
GUARD RAIL
OR PIER
0R
BARRIER
SHOULDER
ARTICLE
CONDITION
SEE
WALL
NOULDER
LIM I TED
CLEARANCE
OF
PIER
I.I. 17 \AJ
1. I. I7
FOR
GENERAL , REQUIREMENTS.
( 1 ) For recommen dations as (o roadway widths I:or various volumes of traffic see AAS HO
"A Policy on Design StandardsI rite rsta te System, "Geometric Design Standards for Highways
Other Than Freeways , A Policy on Geomet ri c Des ian of Rural Hieh ways, an d7'or A Pot ice
on Arterial Highw'ays in Urban Areas.
( 2 ) Vertical clearan ce on State trunk highways and interstate sYstema in rural greas shall
be at leaat 16 feet over the entire roadway wid th, to wh ich an at to wan ce should be added for
resurfacing. On State trunk h ighways and interstate routes through urban areas a 16-foot
clearan ce shall be p rovided except in highly developed areas. A 16-foot clea run ce should be
provided in both rurat and urban areas where such clearance is not un reasonably costly and
where needed for defense requirements. Verti cal clea ran cc o n all other highways shall be at
leaat 14 feet over the entire roadway width to which an altowan ce should be added for resurf acing.
wall may be placed closer than 30 feet and protected by (he use of guard
rail or other barrier devices. The guard rail shall be independently sup
ported with the roadway face at least 2'-0 from the face of pier or
abutment. The face of the guard rail or other device shall be at least 20 outs ide the normal shoulder line.
tBJ Vertical
Cleoronce
A vertical clearance of not less than 14 f'eet shall be provided between curbs, or if curbs are not used, over the entire width that is
available for traffic.
ICI Curbs
Curbs, if used, shall match those of the approach roadway section.
Section 2
LOADS
1.2.J LOADS
Structu res shall be proportioned for the follow ing loads and forces
when th ey ext st :
Dead load.
Live load.
Impact or dy nam ie effect of the live load.
Wind loads.
Other I orces, w hen they exist, as I ollows :
Lon gitu dinal forces, cen tr if ugal do rce, thermal forces, earth
press u re, bu oy ancy, shr i nkage stresses, ri b sh orteni ng, erection
s tresses, ice and cu rrent pressu re, and earthQll ake stre sses.
Mem be rs shall be proportioned using all owable stresses and design
l i in itati on s to r the approp nate material.
Upon the strew sheets a d iagram or notation of the assumed loads
shall be shown and the stresses due to the various loads shall be sh own
sepa rately.
W here req u i red by des tin cond it ions, concrete placing sequence shall
be i nd mated on the plan s or in the spec rat prov is ions.
The load ing comb i nations shall be in accord ance with Article 1.2.22.
J .2.2 DEAD LOAD
The dead load shall consist of the weight of the structure complete,
including the roadway, s idewalks, car tracks, pipes, condu its, cables and
other public utili ty services.
The snow an d i ce load is const dered to be offset by an accompanying
decrease in live load and impact and shal I not be incl uded except under
.spec i al con di ti ons.
1.2.2
If a se pa rate wean ng .s u rface i s to be placed when the br id ge is
5pec ial cont i de ration shall be given to the necess i ty for a separate
wearing surface for those regions where the use of chains on tires or
studded snow tires, is anticipated.
Where the ab ras ion of cone rete is not ant ie i p:i ted, the traffic may bear
d irectly on the concrete slab. If con s id e red desk ra blc, /i inch or more
may be act dcd to the s lab for a wearing su rf ace.
Th o I oll ow ing we i ghts are to be used i n comp uting the dead load :
\Ve ight per c ubic foot,
pounds
4?0
4?0
Al urni n um
17?
al I eye
'atl
200
170
9 lbs. pe r squa i e foot
the
weight
of the
BW
( IA)
( IB)
where P = the un it pressure in pounds per squ are foot due to earth
backfi 11.
B = width in feet of trench, or in case there is no trench, the
overall w idth of the culvert.
H == depth in feet of fill over culvert.
W
IBJ
which may
be
taken as 70 percent, or 83 pe rcent, of actual weight in accord ance with above stated pi-ovisions.
2.7182818 == base of natu rat logarithms, abstract n umber.
The maximum shear in the top slabs of culverts under embankments shall be assumed to occur at a distance, d, ou t from the wall or
abutment ; d' bung eQual to the depth from the top of the slab to the
centroid of the tension reinforcement.
The shear in bottom slabs shall be comp uted as spec i fied for footings in Article 1.4.6.
1 .2.4 OVERLOAD
The to!lowi rig
PROVISION
prov i sion
for
overload
shal I
apply to
all loadings
1.2.5 HIGHWAY
\AI
LOADINGS
Generol
DESIGN
1.2.5
The H load i nps an illu strated in Fig u res 1.2.SA and 1.2.SB. They
consist of a two axle truck or the co r respon d i n g lane loaJ i ng. The H
H 20-44
8,000 LBS.
52,000 LBS. +
H IS - 44
H 10 -44
6,000 LBS.
4,000 LBS.
24,000 LBS.
I 6,000 LBS.
I0-0" CLEARANCE
AND
LOAD LAN E WIDTH
CURB
STAN DARD
F I GU RE
TR UCKS
I . 2. 5 A
HS Loodings
The H S load ings are ill ustrated in Figures 1.2.SB and 1.2.EC.
ing lan e load ing. The H S load in gs are des i gnated by the letters HS
Vol towed by :t n um-be r ind wat in g the grow we igh I in tons of the
traeto Y tru ek. The va riable axle spacing has been i ntrodu ced i n order
that th e sJiacing of axJ es may approx i mate more closely the tractor
tra ilers now in u se. The variable spac ing also prov ides more sat isI actory loan i n g for conti n uou s spans, i n that heavy axle I oads may be
HS 20 and H S 15. Load i rips H 15 and H 10 are 75 per cent and 50 per
HIS94
L OAOING
HS 15-4 4 LOA DIN C
U N!F0RW
LOAD
ROOT 0F 0AD LA N E
H 10 - 44 LOAD I NG
H LANE
ANO
HS LANE
F lGU RE
LOAOINGS
I . 2. 5 B
17
DE SIGN
cen t, rospecti vely , of load in g H 20. Load ing H S 15 is 75 per
cent
of
HS 20 -44
HS 15 -44
8,000 LBS.
6,000 LBS.
32,000 LBS.
24,000 LBS.
52,000 LBS. *
24,000 LBS.
O4W
H TRUCK.
SPAO I NC - I4 BE E 7 70 TO BE ET I NCLU SI VE .
SPAO I N G
STAN DARD
FI GUR E
HS
TRUCKS
I . 2. 5 C
70
The affix remains u nchanged until such time as the loading specification is revised. The same policy for identification shall be applied,
for future reference, to loadings previously adopted by the American
Assoc i ation of State Highway Officials.
IF J
Minimum
Looding
bridge r:tiling.
Number of design traffic lanes as shovn in the follow ing table.
cx e i
ox c i
ov ei
ov oi
o ve r
ov c r
cv c i
o ve i'
N
2
iJ II to 4 2 inc.
?
. .. . .
4
12 to fi 4 inc. .
...
6 4 to C G inc.
fi
fiti to 78 in c.
6
7P to ii(J i nc.
.. 7
9tI to 102 i n c. ..........................................................................................8
1 fJ2 to 1 14 inc.
p
114 to 1 2ii i nc. ................................................................................................ 10
The lan e loaclin gs or stand a i-d trucks shall be issu med to occupy any
pos iti on wit h in the ir ind mid u ml des ign trafhc 1ene which w i 11 produce
the max imu in stress.
1.2.7
DE SIGN
19
J .2.8 APPLICATION
OF LOADINGS
Lone Loodings
Confinuous Spons
The lane load ings shown in Figure 1.2.SB shall be mod ified as
fol I owe for th e design of cont in u on s spans. The lane load ings shall
cons is I of the loads shown in Figure 1.2.SB and in addition thereto
another concentrated load of equal weight shall be placed in one other
span in the series in such position as to produce maximum negative
moment. For maximum positive moment, only ono concentrated load
shall be used per lane, combined with as many spans loaded uniformly
as req u ired to produce maximu in moment.
ID)
Stress
Three
lanes
.. .
.......... ,
90
J .2.1 J
IAI
Sidewalk Loading
Sidewal k floors, str i n gen and their immed rate s up ports, shall be
des igned for a l iv e load of PS pu rids per sq uare I oot of sidewalk area.
Girders, trusses, arc hes an d other mem bers shall be designed f or the
follow ing s id ewalk live loads per sq u are foot of s idev'alk area :
Spans 0 to 2fi ft. in length
. 8 lbs.
h
L
P
1.2.11
IBJ
21
DE SIGN
Curb Looding
Cu rbs shall be des i gned to resi st a lateral force of not less th an 500
pounds per linear foot f c u rb, appl red at the top of the curb, or at an
elevation 10 inches above the floor if the c u rb is h igher than 10 inChes.
accordingly.
Railing Looding *
( I ) Troffic rolling
pend ently Jplied roadiv:ird load equal to 'i the outward trans
verse load.
The transverse force on concrete parapet and barrier walls
shall be spread over a longitudinal length of: 5 :feet.
Railing loads shall be applied to the supporting slab in accordance with Article 1.3.2 (H) (2) . Railing and wheel loads are
not to be applied simultaneously.
(2)
Desig n
Signs.
J .2.12 I?4PACT
Lix'e load stresses produced by H or HS load ings shall be increased
for items in Group A by allowance as stated herein for dynamic, vibratory
and impact effects. Impact shall not be appl red to items in Group B.
I AJ
Group A
1 11 Super structure, including steel or concrete su pporting columns, steel towers, legs of ri gid frames and generally those portions
of the structure which extend down to the main fou ndation.
1 2 ) The portion above the ground line of concrete or steel piles
DE SIGN
23
(8 )
(4 )
S idewalk loads.
lmpoct Formula
The amount of th is allowance or increment is expressed as a fraction of live load stress, and shal l be determ in ed by the formula :
I ==
in which
L -| 2s
two adjacent
Prov is ion shall be made for the effect of a longitu d inal force of five
per cent of the l we l oad in all lanes carrying traffic headed in the same
d i rPcti on. All lanes sha 11 be cons id e red as loaded for bridges l ike ly to
become one d i recti on at in the future. The load used, witho ut impact,
shall be the lane load pl us the concentrated load for moment specified in
Article 1.2.8, w ith red uc t ion for mul tip Ie-loaded lanes as speci fled in
A rt icl e 1.2.S. The center of g rav i ty of the long i tu d inal force sh al l be
ass umed to be located 6 feet above the floor slab and tr nsm it ted to the
s u bst rue I u re th rou gh the s u pe rs ti u ct u re.
1.2.14
foot Of
exposed
area
shall be applied to all stru ctu re s ( see Article 1.2.22 for percentage of
basic unit stress to be used under val'io us comb in ations of loads and
forces) . The exposed area con sidercd shall be the sum of the areas of
all members, incl ud ing floor system and railing, as seen in elevation at
90 degrees to the longitudinal axis of the structure. The forces and loads
given herein are for a wind velocity of 100 miles per hour. For Group II
loading, but not for Group III loadin g, they may be reduced or increased
in the ratio of the square of the design w-ind velocity to the square of
100, provided the maximum probable wind velocity can be ascertained
with reason able accuracy, or there are permanent features of the terrain
which make such changes safe and advisable. If change in the design
wind velocity is made, the design wind velocity shall be shown on the
plans.
The total force shall not be less than 300 pounds per linear foot
in the plane of the loaded chord and 150 pounds per linear foot in
the plane of the unloaded chord on truss spans, and not less than
300 pounds per linear foot on girder spans.
The above forces shall be used for Group II loading. For Group
III loading there shall be added thereto a load of 100 pounds per linear
foot applied at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the structure
and 6 feet above the deck as a wind load on a rrioving live load. When a
rein forced concrete floor slab or a steel grid deck is keyed to or
attached to its 9upp or ting members, it may be assumed that the deck
resists, within its plane, the shear resulting from the wind load on the
moving live load.
IBJ Substructure Design
1.2.14
DE 5IGN
direction shall be as set forth in the fol low in g table. The skew
angle is measured :f rom the perpend icular to the longitud inal axis.
The ass umed wind direction shall be that which prod uces the maximum stress in the substructure being designed. The transverse
and longitudinal :forces shall be applied
the
70
L ate ra I Lad
Pe r Lin . Ft.
I Pen n de )
0
15
100
88
45
60
66
34
30
82
Lori g itu d in at
Load Per Li n. Ft.
I fin u n de )
0
12
24
32
38
length s of 125 feet, the followi ng wind load ing may be used in lieu
The trans ve rse and longitud inal forces to be appl ied d irectly
to the su bstructu re for a 100 mile per hou r wind shall be calcu lated
HIGHWAY BRIDGE S
2fi
1.2.14
grav ity o f the exposed areas and shal I be appl ied s imu ltan eou sly
with the wind loads f i'om the su pe rst ructu re. The above loads are
for Group I I loading and may be reduced 70 per cent for Group III
loading, as ind icated in Article 1.2.22.
( CJ
Overturning
Forces
The effect of forces tending to overturn sti uctures shall be calelated ii ncler Group II an d Gro up III of Article 1.2.22, and there shall
Cold climate
Tom pe ratu i c
iise
30 F.
35 F.
Temper atu i e
fal I
40 F.
45 F.
J .2. J 6 UPLIFT
27
DE SICN
designed
at
150 %
of
the
to the
J .2.J 8 BUOYANCY
B u oyancy sh all be considered as it affects the design of either substructu re, inc I u d ing pi ling, or the su perst ructure.
be made to acc cmm odate lateral forces from earthqu akes as follows :
where
HIGHWAY
28
19
C
BRIDGES
U. 011117 S LI
w he re
C
S
D
R
the
the
the
the
1.2.22 LOADING
COMBINATIONS
1222
DE SI CN
29
Percentage
of Unit
Stress
Group I
Group II
Group III
Group IV
Group V
Group VI
Group VI I
Group II +ICE
Dead Load
=Live Load
R
S
= R ib Sh orten in g
5' h i inkage
= Ea ithQu ake
Section 3
DISTRIBUTION OF LOADS
H I GH WAY B RIDGE S
loads shall
be
assu med.
The
/ 2)
Outside
(o)
Roodwo y Sfringers
o nd Beo ins
beams.
The live load bending moment for outside roadway stiingem or beams shall be determined by applying to the stringer
or beam the reach on of the wheel load obtained by assuming
the flooring to act as i simple span between stringers or
beams.
When the outside roadway beam or stringcr supports the
st dewalk livP load as well in traffic live load and impact, the
allo\vab le stress in the beam or stringer may be increased
25 " for the combination of dead load, sidewalk live load,
traffic live load, and impact, pi ovidi ng the beam is of no less
carry i ng capacity than would be required iI there were no
sidewalks.
In rio case shall an exterior str in ger have less carrying
capacity th:in an interior strin ger.
In the case of spin with conci'eIe floor supported by 4 or
DE SI GN
TAB LE 1.3.1
B)
Bridge designed
for one
Kind of Floor
traffic lane
Timber :
Plank
Bridge designed
S/3.TS
S/40
If S exceeds 5
S/4.26
If S exceeds 6.5
If S exceeds 10 use
If S exceeds 14
S/5.0
use footnote
Concrete :
use footnote
S/B.J
On Concrete T-Beams .
If S exceeds 6 use
footnote
On T'imber Stringers .
use footnote .
S/6.0
If S exceeds 10
use l'ootnote
S/60
S/S0
If 5 exceeds 6 use
footnote .
If S exceeds 10
use footnote .
If S exceeds 12
If S exceeds 16
If S exceeds 6.0'
use footnote .
If 5 exceeds 10.5'
use :footnote .
use footnote .
Steel grid :
(I ess th on 4 thick )
(4 or' in oie )
40
be W ,/7.
(3)
The combined design loacl capacity of all the beams and stringenn a nan shall not be less than rcqu ired to support the total I we
In cafe u latin 3 bend in g moments i n Poor beams no transve rse d istr i b u Ii on of th e whcel loads .shall be ass umeil.
ID ton gi tud i n at stri n get s are omitted an d the floor i s su pported directly on floor beamc , the beams shall be des i gned for loads determined
Spon Lengths
( See o I so Article
1 .5 . 3
DESIGN
load
K n
IIoor beam
Plank
it ri p 4 i nclies
iii
th ickncss,
wood
block
on
Cone i ete
Steel gri d ( less th an 4 inches thick ) .
Spline and doivcled flooring shall have the same di stri button as stri p floors
eg uivalent thickness.
The followi n g effect i x c span lengths shall be u sed i n eaten I at in g
distribution of !oads and bend ing moments :for slabs continuous over
more than two en ppoi ts :
Slabs mon ct ith ie w i th beams or walls
IB J
fn dcs igu i ng sJ ebs the center l me of wheel load (axle load /2 ) shall
be assu mcd to be one foot fi-cm the fice of th e cu rb. II cu rbs or s i de-
walks are not tised, the v'h el load sh ill be assu nied to be one foot from
the face of th e i'a i I . Crnib i n ed deid , I we and i in pact str esses sh all be
not g rea te r than th e al I ov i1le st i-esses.
barrier.
* ** If 5 cxceocl s I eno in mate r, tLie load o n the beam s hall be the reaction of th e wheel loads
an u in i n g the flo ri n z bet wee n bea me to ac I as a s i in pI - bea m.
34
H]GHWAY BRIDGES
The l i ve loal moment for st in plc straits shall be deter-in tried by the
tel low irig fen-anti tae ( im;act not i nc luded ) :
- 32
" . Moment i n foot-pounds per foot width of slab
In st:the ctiil i n non a ver th i-ee ir more stipliorts, a contiiiu ity
factor f 0.8 sh:ill be applil to the above f oi niul:is for both port tive
:inl negati x'e rudiment.
tud iiia fly i ct nfer-ci'il .slibs sh:i 11 be de5ignetl foi the appi opt-rate H5 liial i rig.
Foi- s i mple spans, t he in:tx i mum I we to:tit moment per- foot w itlth of
slab, v' ithout i mpact, i s closely approx imited by the follow i rig formulas :
11520 Load trip :
Sp.ins up to and ineluling 0 feet : I.LM =9005 foot-pounls
Sj ns ci0 feet to 100 feet :
LLM = 1G0t1 ! 1.30S 20.G ) fit-Joti nds
IIS15 Load in ii :
Use ii of the values obtained f i-ore the formu las for HS20
load ing.
Moments in continuous epans shall be determined by suitable analysis using the truck or appropriate lane loading.
The lateral distribution of wheel loads for multi-beam precast concrete bridges, conventional or prestressed, shall not exceed that specified
DESIGN
ID J Edge Beoms ILongifudinol I
Edge beams shall be provided for all slabs having main reinforcement parallel to traffic. The beam may consist of a slab section add itionally reinforced, a beam i ntegral with and deeper th an the slab, or
an integral reinforced section of slab and en rb.
Tt shall be designed to resist a live load moment of 0.10 PS, where
P Wheel load, in pounds (P, , or P,,)
S = Span length, in feet
This formula gives the simple span moment. Val ues for cont in uous
spans may be reduced 20 per cent u mess a greater red uction res ults
from a more exact a na lys i s.
IEI
Maximum 67o
Confilever
( I )
Truck
Slobs
Loods
HIGHWAY BRIDGE 5
penden I of edge support at on g the end of the canti leve r. The distribu tion g iven inclu des the effect of wheels on parallel elements.
Each wheel on th e element pe rpen d iCu l ar to traffic shall be d istributed according to the following formula :
E = 0.8X + 3.75
Moment per foot of slab
I t shall be assu med that the effective length of slab res i stirig
post I oad ings is eju al to E = 0.PX + 3.75 feet, where no parapet is
used and is eq u a I to E 0.8X < 5.0 feet where a p:i rapet is used,
where X is the d istance in feet from the center of the post to the
point u n der i n ve sti gation. Railing load ing shall be applied in
acco rdance vv ith Article 1.2.11 (C) .
III Slobs Supporf ed on Four Sides
In the case of slabs supported alori g four edges and reinforced in
both directions, the proportion of the load carried by the short span of
the slab shall be assumed as given by the follow ing eg uations :
For load u n iformly d istri buted
a' +b
b
For load concentrated at center,
'a I-b
where
p proportion of load carried by short span.
a length of short span of slab.
b length of long span of slab.
Where the len gth of the slab exceeds 1' times its width, the entire
load shall be assumed to be carried by the tra nsverse reinforcement.
The distribution width, E, :for the I oad taken by either span shall
be cietermi ned as provided for other slabs. Moments obtained shall be
used in designing the center half of the short and long slabs. The
reinforcement steel in the outer quarters of both short and long spans
may be reduced 50 per cent. In the design of the support ing beams,
consideration shall be given to the fact that the loads delivered to the
supporting beams are not uniformly distributed along the beams.
DE 5IGN
37
i JI Medion Slobs
Raised median slabs shall be designed in accordance w ith the provisions of this article with truck loadings so placed as to produce maxi mum stresses. Combined dead, live and impact stresses may be not
greater than 150 percent o:I the allowab Ie stresses. F lush median slabs
shall be designed without any overstress.
faces of end supports or abutmeiits. WhP11 the depth of fill is less than
2 feet the wheel load shall be d i StPlbu ted as in slabs v ith coiicen trated
loads. When the calcu lated live load and impact moment iii concrete
slabs, based on distribution of the wheel load through fills as herein
outlined, exceeds the live load and impact moment calculated according
to Article 1.3.2, then the latter moment shall be used.
Splined or doweled floor, not less than 5' _ inches th ick : 4 times
thickness.
For transverse flooring the span shall be taken as the clear distance
between stringers plus one-half the width of one stringer, but shall
not exceed the clear span plus the floor thickness.
IB J
Flooring
Longitudinol
In d irection of span :
Point load in g
Normal to d irection of span :
Plan k floor : vv id th of plank
5PAN
Wood Subdock
Pos.
l'feg.
Gomr'osite Slab
Pos.
Neg.
I n te rio r
7O
60
Uniform
Loed
Load
Neg.
Pos.
Neg.
bS
66
78
Gontin uous beam ct 2 equal s pans.
Design
The comb mation in a structural member of two elements having
different mech an ical properties requires the formulation of a design
premise. Such a formulation as follows is based on the elastic properties of the materi a Is :
1 for slab in which the net concrete thickness is less than half
the over-all depth of the coiiiposite section
DE SIGN
in which
E =modulus of elasticity of concrete
main bar shall be appl red to the bar u n iformIy Over a length equal to
the rear tire width (20 inches for H20, IS inches for H15) .
The strength of the section shall be determined by the moment of
inertia method. The a llowablc stresses shall be as set. forth in Article
1.7.1.
Ed ges of open grid steel floors shall be supported by su itable meane
as required. These supports may be longitudinal or transverse, or both,
as may be requ ired to properly support all edges.
When inves ti gti ng for fati gu e, ftse mi ri i mum cycles of niaximu in
stress.
for the standard truck or the lane loading appl red to a single l ane on the
bas is of freely supported spans. It is ind icated in the table whether the
standard truck or the lane load ing produces the maximum stress.
Section 4
Material
Max.
Alluvial soils
Hwy s ................................................................................. 1
Sand, confined
..
...
... 1
Gravel
..
. .
.....
..
4
4
10
Rock..........................................................................................5
Load ing tests have a li rutted depth inPuence and may not disclose
long-timc consol idation.
When the con sol i d at i on of
You nd ation
the
settlement
from below the water table, foundation soils may be loosened by the upward Pow of water. Such a cond iti on shoultl be guarded against.
Io r meth cd of es tim a tin g bea rim p ca;a cities o I I on n tation soils and com p ut ing settlementa
of p ie re a n d a bu true n ts, ref eren ce s hon) d be made to 'Soil Mecha n ics i n Engi neeri ng P ractice, bz
Te rzaa h i & P eck. E ditto n of 194 b, published by I oh n Wiley & Son, New Yo rk. N . Y .
DESIGN
1.4.2
30
25
30
16
35
to 45
to 35
to 46
to 30
to 40
Gravel . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cinders . . . . . . . . . . .. .
Coke . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30 to 40
25 to 40
30 to 45
25 to 36
General
The design loads for piles shall not be greater th an the minimum
value which shall be determined for Case A, Case B and Case C ; where
Case A is the capacity of the pile as a structural member, Case B is
the capacity of the pile to transfer its load to the ground and Case C
is the capacity of the ground to support the load del ivered to it by the
pile or piles. The val ues assignable to each of the three cases shall be
determined by makin g subs urf ace investigations or tests of sufficient
extent to justify the assumed design values used for the particu lar
cond ition of su pport under cons ideration.
In determining the bearing value of piles :for use in design ing,
consideration shall be given to all in i'ormation ava i]able relative to the
subs urface cond i ti one. Consideration shall also be given to :
(1) ) The difference between the supporting capacity of a single
pile and a group of piles.
(2) The capacity of the underlying strata to support the load of the
pile group.
(3) The effect of driving additional piles and the effect of their
loads on adjacent structure9.
(4) Possibil ity of scour and its effect.
IB J
Cose A.
( !)
Structuro I Colum ns
Round Tiiii 6 er Pi te s
Species
1200
Ash, wh ite
Beech
1300
1300
900
1200
1200
1200
Birch
Chestnut
Cypress, Southei n
1100
1300
Elm, soft
Gum, black and red .
Hemlock, Eastern
860
850
800
1000
16?0
1200
1300
Larch
Maple, hard
Oak, red and w'hite .
1100
Pecan
Pine,
P me, Ncivay
1650
800
860
Pine, Southern
Pine, Southe rn, dense .
1200
1400
800
1100
Poplar, yellow
Redwood
850
860
th ickn ass is not le:ss th.tn 'li inch. The area of the shell sh all be
i ncl u detl in deterred n mg the value of p, ( pe rce ntage of reinforcement j . Where corros i on may be expected 'li; inch shall be deducted
from the shell th i ckn ess to allow for red u ct i on i n section by corrost on. The at lowab Ie stresses of A rti cles 1.5. 1, 1.7.1 and 1.10. 1 may
be used in all cases where all of the stresses to which the piles may
be s u b]ected hive been i nclu ded. These st resses may be inc reased
in accordance w ith Article 1.2.22. For trest le piles or other piles
xvi thou I lateral ski pport d en gned for de:id load anil live load only
and where tempe ratu re, triction, water pressure and other forces
are not cont i dere d, the al l ow ab le uni t stresses spec ifi ed in Articles
DESIGN
1.4.4
43
point
with reasonable
The allowable load at the tip of the pile shall not exceed the
following :
(a) For round timber piles,
use
values
tabulated
in
" (d
(2)
Fricfion
driven.
44
the material which is capable of developing pointbearing, and the log of borings shall show the nature
of the overlying strata in order that the extent of
lateral support may be determined. If the pointbearing stratum is of doubtful thickness and quality,
the borings shall be made to such sufficient depth below this stratum that the capacity of a :friction pile
may be determined.
Friction piles. Borings shall be made to an elevation
well below the expected elevation of the pile tips and
accurate logs of these borings shall be made. In those
cases where the piles are to be designed on the basis
of soil tests, un disturbed samples shall be taken on
all strata which will I:ave appreciable influence on the
Friction
Piles
Borings shall be carried well below the tips of the piles in order
to determine
the characteristics
of
the
underlying
material. In
1.4.4
Timber
Tons
Concrete
T'ons
12
24
24
10
20
14
28
16
20
24
32
Steel
(Friction) Tons
Steel
Point-Bearing
16
24
20
20
28
28
32
40
ii0
tip reinforcement
pile.
+ (in 1) n
E -1.(n 1) in90mn
Where
E =the efficiency or the decimal fraction of the single pile
value to be used for each pile in the group.
n == the n u mber of piles in each row.
in =the number of rows in each group.
Tan'i= d/s
J .4.5 PILES
\ Al
General
In general, pi lin g shall be used when footin gs cannot, at a reason-
able expense, be fou ndel on rock or other solid fou ndation material.
At loeati one whet-e unus u at erosion may occu r and the set l cond iti on s
perm i t the drivi n g of p iles, thr y, pre ferably, shall be u sed as a pro
tection agar n st scou r, even though the safe bearing res i stance of the
natu rat soi I is su ffici ent to su pport the stru ctu re wi th out pili ng.
In general, the penetrati on for any pile shall be not less than 10
feet in h ard material and not less thin ?i the length of the pile nor
less than 20 feet i n soft water i at.
For ton ndation work, no p i link shall be used to penetrate a very
soft u;per stratum overly i n g a hard stratum un less the pi Ie.s penetrate
the hard material a suffic ten t d istance to rigidly fix the ends.
I BJ
Limifotion of Use
Un treated timber piles may be used for temporary con struction,
constru ction
(1) For fou ndation piling when the cutoff is below pe rmanent
ground water level.
The hint tation s of use of treated tim ber p iles are g iven i n D wis ion
II, Section 21.
ICI
Design Loods
The design loads for piles shall be accord i ng to Article 1.4.4.
Piles shal l be des i gned to cai ry the entire superim posed
load,
no
be
allowance be ing made for the su ppo rt i n g value of the material between
the piles.
The supporti rig power of piles shall be determined by the application of test loads or by the use of formulas as specified in Article
2.3.6 (B) .
ID I Spocing, Cleoronces ond Embedment
Footi ng areas shall be so propo r Ii oned that
n ot less than 2 feet 6 i nches center to cen(er. When the tops of fou nda
tion p i let are incorporated i n a concrete footing, the distance Irom the
side of any pile to the nearest edge of the footing shall be not less than
9 inches.
The tops of pit ing in general shall iroject not less than 12 inches
into the concrete after all damaged pile material has been removed, but
in special cases it may be reduced to 6 inches.
Where a reinforced concrete beam is cast-inplace and used as a
bent cap su pported by pil ing, concrete cover at the sides of piles shall
DE 5I GN
47
be a min imu in of six inches. The piles shall project at least six inches,
and preferably n me inches, into the cap ; provided, however, concrete
piles may project a lesser d istance into the cap if the proj ection of
the pile reinforcement is sufficient to provide for adequate bond.
I EJ Botfer Piles
When the lateral resistance to the soil surrounding the piles is
inadequate to con nteract the horizontal forces transmitted to the
fou ndation or when increased rigidi ty of the entire structure is requ ired, batter piles shall be used in the to undat ion.
I FJ
Buoyancy
The effeCt of hyd rostatic pressure shall be considered in the design
as provid ed in Article 1.2.18.
IGJ
48
salt water or alkali soils this c lear distance shall be not less than 3
inches.
In computing stresses due to handlin g, the computed static loads
shall be increa sed by 50 per cent as an at losvance for impact and shock.
IHJ
Concref e Piles
I Cost-in-Ploce J
Cast-in -place concrete pi les shall be, in general, cast in metal shells
wh ich shall remain pe rmane ntly in place. H owever, other types of castin -place concrete pi1e5, plai n or re into reed, case d or u ncased, may be
used if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the soil cond ition9 permit their
use and if the i r des i g n and the method of placing are set isf actory to
him.
Cast- in-place concrete piles may be of either uniform section or
tapered, or a comb in ation thereof. The minim um size, incas ured at the
butt, or above the taper, and em bed men I of re inf o rce ment shall be as
spec ified for precast piles, except that You ndation pi les may have a
min inn um butt cross-sect ion area of 100 square inches. The minimum
diameter at tip o f pi ilc shall be 8 inches.
Steel
H-piles
Steel pile shall have a min imu in th redness of web of .400 inch.
Splice plates shall be not less than ! inch thick.
1 2 I Spl ices
Piles shall be spliced to develop the net section of p ile. The
Panpes ind wcb shall be either spliced by butt 'weld ing or with
used on projects where a swab I nu mber of pit ing are required and
whe re hae i litre s for riveting or wPld ing are not available.
Spl ices shall be detailed on the contract plans.
P
In general, caps are not requ ired for steel piles embedded in
1.4.5
DESIGN
49
Scou r
column.
(5)
Piles shall have minimum wall th ickness not less than indicated in the to flow in g table :
Outside Diameter
Less than
14 i nches
14 inches
and over
.25 inch
.375 inch
( 2 ) Spl ices
Piles shall be spliced to develop the full section of the pile.
The piles shall be spliced either by butt welding or by the use of
welded sleeves. Spl ices shall be detailed on the contract plans.
( fl )
Driv ing
1.4.6 FOOTINGS
I Al
Depth
an
elevation sufficient to
Anchorage
Footings on inclined smooth solid rock surfaces which are not restrained by an overburden of resistant material, shall be effectively
anchored by means of anchor bolts, dowels, keys or other suitable
means.
I C J Distribution of Pressure
All footings shall be designed to keep the max imum soil pressu res
prevent
unequ al
settlement,
Spreod Foofings
Sp read footi n gs wh i ch act as c antil eve rs may be dear ea sed i n thick-
ness Irom the ju nction of the Iooting slab ix'ith col umn or wa 11 toward
the edge of the foot i n g, provi ded sulfur ent section is ma i nta tried at all
points to provide the necessary resrat a nce to diagonal ten s ion and bending stresses. Th is decrease in section may be accompl ished by sloping
the upper su rface of the footi ng or by means of verti cal steps. Stepped
foot in gs shall be cast monoli th i call y.
IE J lnternol Sfresses in Spreod Footings
Spread footings shall be coned dered as u nder the action of down-
1.4.6
DESIGN
of the down wa rd foi ces. Where p iles arc used u nder foot i ngs, the
upward react ion iif the fou nd at ion sh:il I be cons idered as :t series of
concen Irated load s a ppl red at the pile centers, each p i Ie being ass umed
to carry its computed proport ion of the total footing load.
When a st ngl e spread footi n g su pports a cod umn, pier or wall, thi s
footing shall b issu med to act as a cent i lev er. When two or more
piers or col u run s are place cl u pon a common tooI i n g , the foot ing slab
shall be des igned for the actual cond it ions of cont in u ity tnd restra int.
Footings shall be designed fo r the bend ing stress, d iagonal ton sion
stress an d bond at the crit ical section designated herein.
The critical section for bend inp shall be taken at the face of the
col umn, pedestal or wall. In the case of col u runs other than s q uare or
rectangu far, the critics I section shall be taken at the s ide of the concentric square of eQU ivalent area. FOr footings under masonry walls,
where bon d between the wall and foot ing i s redu ced to f nation val ue,
the critical section shal I be taken as in id way between the middle and
the face o:I the wal 1. For footings under metall ie colu run bases, the
crit ical section shall be taken as in idway between the face of the col umn
and the edge of the metallic base. The load shall be cons idered as
u niform ly d i stri buted over the colu run, pedestal or wal I, or metallic
column base.
The c ritical section for bond shal l be taken at the same plane as for
bend ing, and the shear u sed for compu ting bond shall be based on the
same loading and section as for bendi ng. Bond shou ld also be invest i gated at plan es where changes of secti on oi- of rei n force ment occu r.
The cri tical section for d iagonal tension in foot ings on so i I or rock
shall be cons idered as the concentric vertical section throu gh the footing
at a distance d from each face of' the column, pedestal, or wall ; d
being equal to the depth from the top of the section to the centroid o:I
the long it nd inal tension reinforcement.
The critical section for diagonal tension in footings supported on
piles shall be considered as the concentric vertical 9ection th rough the
footing at a distance, d/2, from each face of the col umn, pedestal or
wal I, and any piles whose centers are at or outside this section shall be
considered in com puting the diagonal tension.
In sloped or stepped foot in gs, stresses short Id be investigated at
sections where the depth changes outside the critical section as defined
above.
Bending need not be considered unless the projection of the footing
is more than two-thirds of the depth.
In plain concrete footings, the stresses shall be computed on the
basis of a monolithic section having a depth measured from the top of
the footing to a plane 2 inches above the bottom of the footing. The
maximum fibre stress due to bend ing shall not exceed that specified
in Article 1.5.1 and the average shearing stress on a concentric vertical
section through the footing at a distance (d minus 2 inches) from each
face of the column, pedestal or wall, shall not exceed the shearing
stresses specified in Article 1.5.1 for beams without web rein forcement
and with l ong itudinal bars not anchored.
52
\ FJ
Reinforcement
Footing slabs shall be reinforced for bending stresses and, where
necessary, for diagonal tension. The computed stress in the bar shall
be developed in bond.
The reinforcement for square footings shall consist of two or more
bands of bars. The reinforcement necessary to resist the bending
moment in each direction in the footing shall be determined as for a
reinforced concrete beam ; the effective depth of the footing shall be the
depth Irom the top to the plane of the reinforcement. The required
reinforcement shall be spaced uniformly across the footing, unless the
footing width is greater than the side of the column or pedestal plus
twice the effective depth of the footing, in which ca9e the width over
which the reinforcement is spread may equal the width of the column
or pedestal plus twice the effective depth of the footing plus one-half
the remaining widt,h of the footing. In order that no considerable area
of the footing shall remain unrein forced, additional bars shall be placed
outside of the width specified, but such bars shall not be considered as
effective in resisting the calculated bending moment.. For the extra
bars a spacing doe ble that used for the reinforcement wi thin the effective belt may be used.
I GJ Transfer of Stress from Vertical Reinforcement
The stresses in the vertical reinforcement of columns or walls shall
be transferred to the footings by extending the reinforcement into
them a sufficient distance to develop the strength of the bars in bond,
or by means of dowels anchored in the footings and overlapping or
fastened to the vertical bars in such manner as to develop their stren gth.
If the dimentions of the footings are not sufficient to permit the use
of straight bars, the bars may be hooked or otherwise mechanically
anchored in the footings.
J .4.7 ABUTMENTS
IA I
General
Abu tments shall be designed to wi thstand earth pressure as specified in Article 1.2.19, the weight of abutment and supe rstructure, live
load over any portion of the superstructure or approach fill, wind forces,
longitud rna I force when the bearings are fixed, and longitu dinal forces
due to friction or shear res istance of bearings. The design shall be in-
vestigated for any combination of these forces which may produce the
most severe condition of loading.
Abu true nts shall be des i gncil to be safe against overturn ing about
the toe of the f ootin g, against sliding on the footing base and against
crushing of foundation material or overloading of pi les at the point of
maximum pressure.
In comp uting stresses in abutments, the weight of filling material
directly over an inclined or stepped rear face, or over a reinforced
concrete spread footing extending back from the face wall, may be
conside red as part of the effective weight of the abutment. In the
case of a spread footing, the rear projection shall be designed as a
1.4.7
DE 5I GN
stem and
loaded
with
the in 11
Wing Wolfs
Drninope
The filI ing material beh ind abut men ts shall be effectively drained
by weep holes with French drains, placed at suitable i n te rvals.
J .4.8 RETAINING
IA I
IBI
WALLS
Generol
The base slabs of con rite r f orted and buttressed walls shall be
designed as fixed or conti n u ou s beams of spans equal to the d istance
between cou nte rf orts or bu Stresses.
ICJ
Verticol
Wolfs
The vertical stems of ca nt i lever walls sh all be dest gned as canti levers suppo rted at the base.
The vertical or face wall s of cou ntcrf orted and bu Stressed wall s
shall be designed as fixed or continuou s beams. The hace walls sha!1 be
securely anchored to the supporting cou nterf orts or buttresse s by
means of a deg u ate rei n f orcement.
DI
Counterforf s ond
Buttresses
vertical bars or str rrups to eff ecti vely anchor the face walls and base
slab. These .st i rru ps shall be anchored as near the outside faces of the
face walls, and as near the bottom of the base slab as practicab ie.
I EJ
re i nforeement per foot of height shall be provided near exposed surfaces not otherw i se rei nforced, to resi st the formation of tempe ratu re
and sh ri nkage cracks.
IFJ
feet and expan sion j oints at interva 1s not exceed in g 90 feet, for gravity
or rei nforeed concrete walls.
I GI
Droinoge
J .4.9 PIERS
IA I General
Piers shall be designed to withstand the dead and I we loads en perimposed thereon ; wind pressu res acting on the pier and su perstructu re ;
the forces d uc to stream cu rrent, floating ice and drift ; and longitud inal
forces at the fixed on ds of spans.
Where necessary, p ters shall be protected against abrasion by facing them wi th granite, vitri fied brick, timber or other suitable material
DESIGN
Depth
Th eneral reQu irements gove rni rig the depths of You nd at ions as
above set forth sha 11 govern in the case of tubu lar s teel piers except
that steel tu bes resting upon gravel to undation without pil in g shall in
no case be carried to a depth less than 8 feet below the permanent bed of
the stream and to such addr tional depth as may be necessary to eliminate all danger of u nd ermin ing.
Piles u sed in connection with tub u far piers shal I extend into the
concrete fil ling a suffic rent d istance to thoroughly brace the tubes. In
general, these p iles shall extend not less than 6 to 8 feet above the bottom of the cone rete.
I DJ
Dimensions of Shell
The min imu in th ick ness of the metal in the shells of tubu far piers
shall be /ic inch. Th is th icknoss shall be i ncreased whe re necessary to
secu re strength and ri gid i ty for placi ng the shell. In at I cases the pier
sh aI l be des igned for safe pit e or soi l bearing val ues as speci fied here in,
but when the d I tmeter fQU i Peel by these va I ues i s greater than that
requ ired for the superstructure bearing, the diameter may be reduced
at any spl ice point. The min imum d iameter of steel cyl inders used for
piers shall be 42 inches.
I EI
IFI Brocing
Ad eq u ate braci ng connecting the tubes of cyl inder pi e rs
shall be
Section 5
CONCRETE DESIGN'
IB J
Sfrength of
Concrete
The p roport ions for concrete mixes specified in Article 2.4.6 were
selected on the basis of meeting the following minimum req u irements
for stren gth for 2P day cyli ntlei s for the variou s classes of concrete
here recog n i ze d.
Class of Cone i ete
A or A ( AE )
B or B ( AE )
2,200
X or X ( AE)
1,500
3,000
G oi
Y
G ( AE)
or. Y ( A E )
3,000
N etc : The ratios tin I vaI uea in th is sectio n a p ;1y to con c rete in ale w ith cc n ven tion at h a rd
rck ugp red a to. V aI ues app licable to 1 ih twei g h I ap g reate con crcte s hould be es tablis hcd by
deq u ute in v es tiatin .
DESIGN
The basic va I u e used in dos ign under- these spec ificat ions is 3,000
pou rids per sq. in. at 28 days and if another x'aI ue is u sed it shall be
subs tant i a ted by test d ata an d s tipu lated on the plans, along with the
resu ltant at lovable stresses. In no cace shall the u It innate strength
u pon wh ich al Iowa ble strewed are based exceed 4,500 pou rids po r sQ. in .,
I CI
Allowoble
( I I
Sfresses Concrete
Flex u re
None
1 2 I Sh eci r
B cams wi th out web re in fo rcement :
Longi tud inal
bars
not
an-
Bon d o n Piles
( i n Si eo I s )
Timber, steel or concrete piles, 10 I bs. per square inch. (Providing the pile has the res istance to the pu!l thereby induced.)
( 4 ) Be o ring on B rid ge Seo ts
Reinforcement
I.rade 40
Grade 0
40,000 psi
60,000 psi
Steel Reinforcement
Grade 40
Grade 60
20,000 psi
24,000 psi
Tension in flexu i i1
members
HI GHWAY B RIDGE S
Tension in web
ieinf orcement
20,000 psi
24,000 psi
16,000 psi
20,000 psi
20,0011 psi
24,000 psi
Compiession in
Compression in Eeams
See Article 1.5.7
G. 5 I '
(2) A plane section before bending remains plane after bendi ng.
stant withi n the limits of working strewed ; the distr ibution of compressive stress in Pexure is, therefore, linear.
14) The ratio n shall be ass u med as follows :
Values of n
Fo r com p station s
of strength
of deflection
2,000 to 2,400. . . . . . . . . . . . .
lIi
2,b00 to 2,900.. .. . .
.
3,000 to 3,900. . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
10
4,000 to 4,900.
5,000 or more. . . .
........
. ..
DESIGN
1.5.2
The bond
between
is as-
60
I rom
depth
of
the
.slab and fillet is at teas I one :ind n e-half times the th redness of slab.
Maxi in u in negitive moments are to be cont idered as fix is ting at the
ends of the span, as above de fine1. N o portion of the fillet shall be
conn tler ed s add in g to the effect i ve clcpth of the slab.
1.5.4 EXPANSION
In gene rel, p rovision for tomperatu re change.s shall be made in all
simple spans having a clear length in excess of 40 feet.
In continuous bridges, provision shall be made in the design to
resist thermal stresses induced or means shall be provided Ior movement
caused by temperature changes.
Expansion not otherwise provided for shall be provided by means
of hinged columns, rockers, sliding plates or other devices.
1.5.5 T-BEAMS
I Al
Sheor
DESIGN
IDJ
Diophrogms
Construction Joints
When a cons trueti on joint is requ ired between the slab and the
fA J
Spacing
IBJ Covering
IC J
Splicing
max imu ni stress. The spliced bar sh:ill develop the compri ted stress at
62
the splice point v ithout exceed in g " of the permissible bond values
given in Ai ticle 1.5. 1 I D) . However, the length of lap for deformed
bai s shall not be less than 24 and 36 bar diameters for Grade 40 and
Gi ade 60, respectively, nor less thin 12.
(3) Where lapped sJilices are used in reinforcement in which the
ci itical design stress is compressive, the minimum amount of lap
sh all be : with concrete having a strength of 3,000 Jisi or more, the
length of lap lor deformed bars shall be 20 biir and 24 bar diametei s
for Gi ade 40 and Grade G0, respectively, but not less than 12. When
the specified concrete strengths ai e tess than 3,000 psi, the amount of
In shall be /, greatei- than the value s- given above.
\\'elded splices or other pos it we connections may be used instead
of lapped splices. Where the bai- size exceeds @ 11, weldel splices or
other positive connections shall be used. In bars requ ired for compression only, the compressive stress may be transmitted by bearing of
sr;uareclit ends held in concentr ie contict by a su itably welded sleev e
oi- mechani cal device.
bar diameters but not less than 2/_ at the free end of the
bar, or
Hooks shall not be const dei ed effective in adding to the com- piessive resistance of bars. Any mechanical de ice capable of develop-
DESIGN
fi3
ing the strength of the bar without damage to the concrete may be
tised in li e u of hooks or extension s.
IEl Extension of Reinforcemenf
(1) To provide for
lHJ
R einforcemenf
for
Temperoture
ond
Shrinkage
Not less than /8 square inch of rei nforcement per foot shall be
placed in each d irection of all concrete su rfaces to resist the format ion
64
Bundled Reinforcement
Croups of parallel i einf orcing bat bundled in contact to act as ii
unit shall be limited to fotii @ 9 or smaller, three @ 11, two 14 or
two @ IP in any onP trundle. Stirrups or ties shall enclose the bundle.
Bars in bundles shall prefer-ably be the same size.
Where spacing limitations are based on b:ir size, a unit of bundled
bai s shall be trP:ited as :i single b:ir of equ ivalent area. Ears in a
bundle sh all terminate at different points with at least 40 bar diameters
stagger u nless all of the bars encl in a suppoi t.
WhPn making bond stress c:ilcu litions the external pei-imeter of
the bundle is eqn at to the 1ol]owiny
the limits given in 1.5.1 t D) , except that flexu in bond stress neel not
be consiclorol in comJu-ossion, nor in those cises of tension whore
:inchorage bond is less than 0.8 of the permissible.
J .5.7
COMPRESSION
REINFORCEMENT
IN BEAMS
1.5.7
DE SIGN
and spaced not moi-e than 16 bar d iameters apart. Where compress ion
reinforcement is used, its effectiveness in res is ting bending may be taken
s twice the val tie indicated from the calcu lotions as sri min g a straight-line
relation between stress and strain and the modular i-eIati on of stress in
steel to str ess in concrete given in Article 1.5.2 (4) . However, in no case
should a strew in compress i on reinforcement be gt-eater than that
allowed in Article 1.5.1(D ) .
General
When the al lowabl e unit shearing stress for concrete is exceeded,
web reinforcement shall be provided by one of the followi n g methods :
(1) Longitudinal bars bent up in series or in a single plane.
(2) Vertical stirrups.
(3) Combination of bent-up bars and vertical stirrups.
When any of the above methods of reinforcement are used, the
concrete may be assumed to carry external vertical shear not to exceed .03 f, (max imum, 90 pounds per square inch) the remainder of
shear being carried by the web reinforcement.
The webs of T-beams and box girders shal I be reinforced with
Colculofion
of
Sheor
'b.)d
Stress in vertical web ieinforcement :
A=
I CJ
Benf-up Bors
Bent- u p bars used as web rei nforcement may be bent at any anple
between 20 and 45 degrees with the longitudinal re inf orcemcn t. The
radius of bend shall not be less than 4 d iameters of the bar.
IEJ Anchorage
(1) The stress in a stii rup or other web reinforcement shall not
exceed the capacity of its anchorage in the upper or lower onehal:I of
the effective depth of the beam.
(2) Web i einforcemenf which is provided by bending into an inclined position one or more bars of the main tensile reinforcement
where not requ ired I'or resistance to positive or negative bending, may
be cons iclerefl completely :inchored by continuity with the main tensile
reinforcement, or by embedment of the requ isite length in the upper
or lower half of the beam, provided at least of such embedment is as
close to the upper or lower surface of the beam as the requirements of
fire and rust protection allow. A hook placed close to the upper or
lower surface of the be:inn may be substituted for a portion of such
embedment.
(3) Stirrups shall be anchored at both ends by one of the following methods, or by a combination thereof :
(a) Rigid attachment, as by welding, to the in:tin longitud inal
reinforcement. All welding shall conform to AWS D12. 1.
Bending around and closely in contact with a bar of the
longitudinal reinfoi-cement, in the form of a U-stirrup or
hook.
A hook placed as close to the upper or lower surface of the
beam as the requi resents of fire and rush protection will
allow. In estimating the capacity of this anchorage the
stress developed by bond between the mi dhei ght of the beam
and the center of bending of the hook may be added to the
capacity of the hook.
An adequate length of embedment in the upper or lov er /_
of the effective depth of the beam, whether straight or bent.
DESIGN
67
J .5.9 COLUMNS *
IAl General
The prov is ions of Section 5, Concrete Design, shal I apply in the
0225
for spiral col umns and 0.8 that amo nut for
1 + (n 1 ) p tied columns.
28 days, psi.
f ,-maximu in allowable compress i ve stress in members subjected to combined axial and bending 9tress, psi.
This articl e, covert rig the desig n of rein forced cone rete colum us, follows in ge neral the
recom men dations of the I cm I Comm ittee on Stan da rd S peer fixations I or Cone rete a ii d Rei rife reed
Concrete an d of the 1951 A CI Build ing Cod e R equi remen ts for Reinforced Cone rete.
7?8
HI GH WAY BRID GE 5
+.
(1)
Spirolly Reinforced Columns
( J )
Longitudino I Reinforcement
DE SI GN
69
between indi vid ual turns of the spiral shall not exceed 3 inches or
f'.
The yield strength for d eside ass u mption, I,, shall not be
taken h igher than 60,000 p.s. i .
( 3 I Allowoble Lood Short Colum ns
The provisi one of th i s suba rticl e shall apply only to col u run s
havin p rat ios of u n s u pported height to least lateral d i mans ion of
not more than 10. The total ax ial load on a col u in n shall not exceed
Lon g Co Iuin n s
height to least lat era I d ime n sin greater than l tl, but not greater
tha n 2 0, shall be not greater than gi v'en by the follow ing form u la :
If the L/d ratio of colu runs exceeds 20, the colu run shal I be
investi gated for elastic sta bil ity.
Tied Columns
(
Hoops shall ,su rrou nd the ton gi tud i nal rei n forcenien t. They
i n d iitmeter and
shall be
spaced not more than 12 inches apart except that th is spaci n may
tie i n creased in the caw of pi er shafts o r columns hav i n g a larger
cross sec tion thH it reQu i reel by condi tions of load i rig. Adequate
auxil iary ties shall be provi ded to su ppo rt in termed i ate longitud inal bars whose distance from any tied bar exceeds 2 feet.
70
1 3 J Allowoble Lood Shorf Colum ns
The prov isions of this subarticle shall apply only to columns
having ratios of unsupported height to least lateral dimension of
not more than 10. The total axial load on a column shall be not
greater than 0.8 of that given by equation (3) , which results in
(4)
long Columns
Longitudino I Reinforcement
Ag ( 1 + (n 1 ) p |
DE 5IGN
whei e f. q 0.2
"
1
tied columns.
In the cise of eqn are or recta ng ula r columns subject to bending
in both planes of symmeti y, the colu in n shall be designed on the basis
of u ncracked sections onlJ' when the su in of the e/t ratios about both
axes does not exceed 0.5. In this case formulas (7) , ( 8) , and (S ) may
be used by s u bstitti ting for Ke /I thc sum of the Ke/I ratios in both
planes of ben d ing.
( 3 ) R o tio e/f g reofer fh o n 0.5
that
the
72
HI GHWAY BR ID GE S
for full dead plus onehalf live load over the Iu 11 span, whichever produces the smallest bend ing stresses under combined loads.
I BI
Spondrel Wolfs
I Cl Expansion Joints
Vertical expansion joints shall be placed in the spandrel walls of
archee to provide for movement due to temperature change and arch
detection. These joints ehall be placed at the ends o1 spans and at
intermediate poin ts, generally not more than 50 feet apart.
I DI Reinforcement
Arch ribs in reinforced concrete construction shall be reinforced
with a complete double line of longitudinal reinforcement consisting of
an intradosal system and an extradosal system connected by a series
of stirrups or tie-rods.
For barrel arches, a system of transverse reinforcement, thoroughly anchored to the longitudinal rein:forcement, shall be used in both
inti-ados and extrados. The transverse reinf orcement shall be propor-
tioned to resist the bending stresses due to any overturn ing action of
the spandrel wall.
For rib arches, hoO]39 OF tie bare shall be used in connection with
the longitudinal rib reinforcement, as in the case of reinforced concrete
columns.
I El
Waterproofing
Preferably, the top of the arch ring and the interior faces of the
spandrel walls of all filled 9pandrel arches shall be waterproofed with a
membrane waterproofin g constructed in accordance with the r9quirements specified in Division II, Section 17.
by
system of tile drains or French drains laid along the intersection of the
spandrel walls and arch rings and discharging through suitable outlets
in the p iers and abutments. The location and details of the drainiige
outlets shall be such as to eliminate, as far as possible, the discoloration
by drainage water of the exposed masonry faces.
73
verse struts. For height greater than 40 feet, both longitud i na] and
transverse cross or diagonal bracing, preferably, shall bl U9ed and the
footings for the columns forming a single bent shall be thoroughly tied
together.
For girders having flanges on one side only, the effective overhanging flange width shall not exceed the f oil ow in g :
(1
Boftom FI o nge
The thickness of the bottom flange shall be such that the maxi-
IC J Flexure
( I ) Porollel to Girder
The compreeeive unit stress in the extreme fiber of concrete in
both girder stem and flange shall not exceed that given in Article
1.5.1 (C) .
( 2 ) Jform o I fo Girder
74
I D I Sheor
The flange shall not be considered as effective in computing the
shear and diagonal tension resistance of girder stems, except in the
determination of the value of j .
The horizontal shearing u nit stress at the junction of the flange
and the monol ith ie fillet jot ning it to the girder stem shall not exceed
that given in Article 1.5. 1 I C I , Shear, Beams with web rein force ment.
Changes in girder stem thickness shall be tapered for a min imum
distance of 12 times the difference in stem thickness.
I El Reinforcement
The unit stress i n steel for both girder stem and flange shall not
exceed that given in Article 1.5.1 (D) .
Bottom
Flonge
Reinforcement
Porollel
to
Girders
Bottom
Flonge
Reinforcement
Normol to Girder
placed in the slab, distributed over both surfaces. Bar spacing ehall
not exceed 18 inche9.
Reinforcement provided as above :for the minimum flange
thickness at other points may be used in areas thickened at support9
in accordance with Art. 1.5.12 IB) (2) & (G) .
All transverse reinforcement in the bottom flange shall be extended to the exterior face of the outside girders in each group and
anchored with standard 90 degree bends.
( 3 I Top Flonge Reinforcement
forcement in the top flange shall be extended to the exterior face o:I
the outside girder in each group and shall be anchored with Standard 90 degree bends or, if the Pange extends beyond the last
girder, extended beyond the girder I:ace at least a bond length.
DE SIGN
Flanges supporting only dead load of structure and pipes or cond u its shall be designed in the direction normal to the girder using unit
stresses not exceeding 75 per cent of those set forth in Article 1.5.1.
I .5. J 3
BEARINGS
J .5.J 4GENERAL
fAl
Application
These spec ificati ons are intended for use in the desi gn of simple
and continuous structures of moderate (to 200) span length. Liirge
or unusual structures may require special study and detailed consideration of effects that can otherwise be neglected or assigned
arbitrary values in the design of structures to which these specifica
tions are intended to apply.
I BI
Other Specificofions
J .5.J 5NOTATION
IAJ Loods ond Forces
B = Buoyancy
CF = Centrifugal force
D = Dead load
EQ Earthquake
F
Longitu dinal force
I Live load impact
ICE Ice pressure
L Live load
LF Longitudi nat force from live load
M = Moment to be used for design of compression member
M,
Column moment capacity under lialanced conditions
M,
Moment requ ired to crack a concrete section
My,, = Maximum dead load moment for section under consideration
M,, = Moment capacity of the section fi applied design load moment
:it a secti on
o1 the
M Value of smaller end moment on compression member calculated from a conventional elastic frame analysis, positive if
membei- is bent in single curvature, negative if bent in double
curvature
I B I Dimensions end Constcints
A , Loaned area
A,,' Maximum area of the portion of the supporting surface that
is geo meti ical ly similar I o and concentric with the loaded are:i
A Gross area of column section
A s = Area of tension reinforcement
A,
Area of compression reinforcement
A,, := A rem of reinforcement to develop compressive strength of
overhanging flanges in I- and T-sections
A,, = Totaf area of longi tudinal reinforcement = A , + A ' total
vertical reinforcement in columns
A, A i ea of shear reinforcement within a distance s
a llepth of eJu ivalent rectangular stress block k;c
a, Area of an individual bar, sq. in.
b Width of compression face of flexural member, or member
subject to flexure
b= Width of v eb in I and T-sections. In tapered webs, the
average width or 1.2 times the minimum width, whichever is
smaller
b, Per iphery of critical section for slabs and footings
c = Distance from extreme compression fiber to neutral axis
c,, Distance from extreme compression fiber to neutral axis for
balanced conditions
Gp a factor relating the actual moment diagram to an equivalent
uniform moment diagram
D = Nominal diameter of bars ; also, overall diameter of circular
section
DE SI GN
77
h = Unsupported length o:I compression memberI,, = Moment of inertia of the trans:formed cracked section
I,, = Effective moment of inertia for computation of deflection
I, = Moment of inertia of gross concrete section about the centroid'l
axis, neglecting the reinforcement
K
Constint for standard hook
k = Effective len gth factor in design of slender columns
k; := 0.85 for strengths, I,., up to 4000 psi, and shall be reduced at
a i-ate of 0.05 for each 1000 psi of strength in excess of
4000 psi
L, = Additional embed ment length at support or at point o:I inflection, in.
L,; = Development length, in.
L, E q ti ivalenl embed mont length, in.
n E /E,
p = A /bd
p= A ,bd
p;, = Re in f orcemcn I ratio prod ucing balanced conditions
Pf
A,,/b'd
pq = A /bd
R
section
s = Shear reinforcement spacing in i direction parallel to the
longitudinal reinforcement
I
F'lange thickness in I- and Tsections ; also overall depth of
section
tq,,,
Recommen d ed minimum thickness for constant depth members
y, = Distance from centroid:it :ixis of gross section, neglecting the
reinforcement, to extreme fiber in tension
c, = Maximum usable strain at the extreme concrete compression
fiber, assumed equal to 0.003
c, = Yield strain of reinforcement corresponding to the yield
strength, I,.
d = Capacity mod ification factor
1.5.J 6
fA J
MATERIALS PROPERTIES
Concrete
78
of concrete shall be represented by a sufficient number of tests.' For
structures designed in accordance with these specifications, the average
of any three consecutive strength tests of the laboratory-cured specimens representing each class of concrete (at least two specimens shall
be made for each test) shall be equal to or greater than the specified
strength, I', and not more than 10 percent of the strength tests shall
have values less than the specified design strength, but no test shall
show an average strength less than 85 percent of the specified com
pressive strength I,
(2) The modulus of elasticity, E,, for concrete may be taken as
(iv' x 33 1: ) in psi, for values of w between 90 and 155 lb. per
cu it. For normal weight concrete, E, may be considered as 57,000
I BJ
Reinforcemenf
( 1) Reinf oi cing bars shall conform to one of the follow ing specifications, except that yield strength shall correspond to that determined
by tests on full sized bars and that reinforcing bars with a specified
yield strength, I,., exceeding 60,000 psi are not permitted under these
specifications.
(a) Specifications for Deformed Billet- Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement (AASHO M31, AST I\I A 615) . If @ 14 or
@ 18 bars meeting these specifications are to be bent, they
shall also be capable of being bent 90 deg. at a minimum
temperature of 60 F. around a ten-bar-diameter pin without
criicking ti-ansverse to the axis of the bar.
(b) Specifications for Rail-Steel llef ormed Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement (AASHO M42) . ID bars meeting these
specifications are to be bent, they shall also meet the bending requirements of AASHO M31, ASTM A615 for Grade
60.
Specifications for AxleSteel Deformed Bars for Concrete
Re Enforcement (AASHO M53, ASTM A 617) .
(2) The modulu s of elastici ty of steel reinforcement, E,, may be
taken as 29,000,0 00 psi.
speci fied, the ea rlicr ago at vv-hi ch the con c retc is to rece we its Iml loaI o r in iiximum stress.
Strength Control Proced ures shall be J ref erabl y in accordance with ACI 2 14 -G Ii , liecom men tel
Practi cc for Ev at uaf in n of Comp session Tests Results o I FioI1 Con c rete. Refer :ilso the Iollowing
specifi c:itions : Methol of Sampling FresL Concr etc ( A AS HO T 141, AS TM C 1 7 2 ) ; Mcttiot of
Making and Curing Con c rete Comp ress we and Flex u rat Test Sr ecimen s in th e Fielcl' ( AA SHO
T2? , ASTM C31 ) ; Comp restive Strength of Molded Concrete CyL n ie r-s ( AA SHO T2 2, A STM
C30 ) .
1.5.17
J .5.1 7
fA J
DESIGN
79
Lood
Foctor Equofions
J .5.J 8
fA J
STRENGTH PROVISIONS
Assum pfions
(1) The strengt.h design o:I members for flex ti i e and :ixial loads
8hall be based on the issu mptions given in th is section, and on siitisfaction o1 the appl icable conditions of eqti ilibrium and compatibility o:I
sti ains.
(2) Str:tin in the reinforcing steel and concrete shall be assumed
d irectly proportional to the distance from the neuti-al axis.
(3) The maximum it s:iblc Qtr:tin at the extreme concrete compi es
sion fibei shall be ass It med equal to 0.003.
(4) Stress in reinforcement below the specified yield strength,
I,., for the giade of steel used shall be taken as E, times the steel
stiain. For str-i ins pieater than that co rrespond ing to f,., the stress
in the reinforcement shall be consi dered independent of strain and
equal to I
( ?) T'ensile strength of the concrete shall be neglected in Pexural
calc ulttions of reinf oi ced concrete.
6) The relationship between the conciete compress we stress
d ist ribution and the conci ete strain may be assumed to be a rectangle,
trapezo 1 d, parabola, or any other shape which results in prediction of
st i ength in substantial agreement with the results of comprehensive
tests.
(7I The requ i cements of Article 1.5.18 (A) 16) may be considered
satisfied by on equ ivalent reetang ular concrete stress distribution
which is defined as follows : A concrete stress of 0.85 I', shall be
as sumed u n if ormly distr ibuted oser an equivalent compression zone
bounded by the edges of the cross section :ind a straight line located
parallel to the neutral axis at a distance a k;c from the fiber of
maximum compressive str-ain. The distance c from the tiber of maxi
mu in strain to the neutral axis is measured in a disection perpend icular
to that axis. The fraction k; shall be taken as 0.85 for strengths, I',
up to 400 0 psi and shall be reduced continuously at a rate of 0.05 for
each 1000 psi of strength in excess of 4000 psi.
(8) E'alanced conditions exist at a cross section when the tension
reinforcement reaches its specified yield strength, f,, just as the concrete in conip session reaches its assumed ultimate strain of 0.003.
1 .5.J 9CAPACITY
MODIFICATION
FACTORS
d 0.50
For shear
&= 0.85
For spirally re i nforced compression members
Q 0.75
For tied compression members
d 0.70
For bearing on concrete
.
d= 0.70
Development lengths specified in Article 1.5.29 do not require a
factor.
J .5.20FLEXURE
I AJ Rectongulor sections with tension reinforcement only
Foi- rect an gul a r or flanged sections in which the neutral axis lies
with in the flan ge, the moment capacity shall be assumed :is :
(5-1)
(5 2)
where
DES IGN
a=
The reinforcement ratio, p, shall not exceed 0.50 of the ratio, p ,,
0.85 k,f,.
"' 'f,
87,000
8T000 + f,.
I B I I- ond T-sections
( 1) When the flange thickness equals or exceeds the depth to
the neutral axis, a/k , the section may be designed by Equation (5-1) ,
with, a, commuted as for a rectangular beam with a width equal to
the overall flange width given by Article 1.5.5 (A) .
(2) When the flange thickness is less than a/k, the design moment
M shall not exceed that given by the moment capacity of the section
assumed as
I,, (d 0.51) ]
(5-6)
where
0.85 f b
The rein:forcement ratio, p,,. shall noI exceed 0.50 of the quantity
(p,, + p ) , where p,, is given by equation (55) .
IC J
where
I,.d
87,000
' I,.d 87,000 f,
(5-9)
82
is less thiin the vil u e given by Eqti:it ion (5-11) , so that the compres
sion steel stress is less than the yield strength, I,., or when effects of
compression steel are neglected, the calculated moment capacity shall
not excced th tit given by Equ:itions ( 61) and
when a
given in
genei a1 analysis is macle on the basis of' the
Article 1.5.18 A) . The quantity
1 .5.2J
IA J
SHEAR
Sheor stress
( 1) The nominal design shear stress in reinforced concrete memLerS shall be computed by :
1.5.21
DE SIGN
reinforcement ratio p is less than 1.2 percent then the shear stress
capacity of the concrete shall be governed by
The design shear stress at sections between the face of the support
cal.
IBJ
Sheor
reinforcement
(1) Wherever the value of the design shear stress, v,,, computed
by Equation (5-12) plus effects o:I torsion, exceeds the shear stress
capacity, v,,,., per mitted by Article 1.5.21 (A)
shear i-einforcemenf
shall be pi ovided to carry the excess. Such
reinforce ment shall
also be provided for a distance equal to the depth, d, of the member
beyond the point theoi etically requii-ed. Shear reinforcement between
the lace of the s upport and the section at a distance, d, therefrom shall
be the s.t me as rcquired at the section.
(5-13)
ICJ
Stress resfricfions
10d
I', in
84
be less than 0. 15 percent of the area computed as the p roduct of the
width of the web and the spacing of the shear reinforcement at on g
the longitu dinl axis of the member. (i.e., A,. ? 0.0015b's) .
IE J
or
footing
in which V,, and b,, are taken at the critical section specified in Article
1.5.21 ( E) (1) t b) . The periphery shear stress, v,,, shall not exceeil the
shear stress capacity o1 the concrete v,, 45\/f ',. unless shear rein
forcement is pi ovi ded in accordance with Article 1.6.21(E ) (3) , in
which case, v,,, shall not exceed 68 f', .
3) When v,, exceeds v,,,.= 4d f', shear reinforcement shall be
provided in accordance with Articles 1.5.21 ( B) to 1.5.21 (D) , except
that the design yield strength, I,., for the shear reinforcement shall
be 50 percent of that prescribed in Article 1.5.16 (B) . Sheir reinforcement const sting of bars, rods or wires shall not be considered effective
i n members having an effective depth of less than 10 inches.
1.5.22
I AJ
COLUMNS
General
DE SIGN
85
(2) The area of lon gitud in at rei nforcement preferably shall not
be less th an 1 percent, nor more than 8 percent of the gross concrete
:trea of the colu run section. In a col umn which, for any reason, has a
larger crow-section than required by the loads and moments determined
in accordance ivi th the prov isi ons of Article 1.5.17, the minimum
amou nt of longitti iiinal steel specified above may be red need provided
that in no case shall less longilu d incl steel be u sed than that req u i red
by the minimum sized column neccssa ry to support the I oads and
moments defined above, designed with one percent o:I longitu dinal
steel.
IBJ
11)
Concentric f oo ding
T'he axial load capacity of a col umn section sub.jected to pui c
co repress to n, P,,, is :
The capacity mod ification factor, /, shall be the :ippropriate
value for tied or spii i l colu runs gi ven in Article 1.5.19. C oncentric
loading is a h ypothetical loading cond i I i on since columns shall be
designed for eccentricities at lent :is large as those given in
Article 1.5.22 I A) ( 1) .
( 2)
Pure
Flexure
0.101,A, to zero.
(4)
B o I o need
Condifions
8
for compression members using the assumptions
1.5.18 (A) :ind assuming the neu tral axis located at :
of
At-ticle
d
( 5)
1 when
CJ
pliino considered.
(2) The radius of gyration, r, may be taken equal to 0.30 ti1T19
the overall dimension in the direction in which stability is being
considered for rect nguliir compression members and 0.25 times the
I i ameter for circular compress ion members. For other shapes, r wiry
be computed for the gross concrete section.
(3) For compression memliers braced against sidesway, the effec
tive length factor, k, shall be taken as 1.0, unless an analysis shows
that a lower value may be used. For compression member-s not braced
against sidesiv ay, the effective length factor, k, shall be determined
with due coR51drtion of cracking and reinforcement on relative stiffness, and shall be greater than 1.0.
14) For compression members braced against siilesway, the effects
of slenderness may be neglected when kh/r is less than 34 12 M, /M .
For compressi on members not braced against sidesway, the effects of
Slenderness may- be neglected when kh/r is less than 22. For all compress ion members with kh/i- greater than 100, a more exact analysis
EJwnrJ 0. Ffrang, Journal uf tte American Goncre[c Institute, January 1970, ;p. 6-2B fur
comp rehen s we lis cues ion of these p rev isto n s No r clesigni rig efanele r columns. Th is a rti cl e includes
n cm oa rat h s to r fete ran i n i n j the e ffccliv o leng th I actor, k.
87
DE SIGN
than that prescri bed herein shall be made. M, = value of smaller end
moment on compress i on member calcu l ated from a conventional elastic
frame analysis, positive if member is bent in single curvature, negative
if bent in double curvature. M,. value of larger end moment on
compression member calcti l ated from a conventi onml elastic frame
analys is, always positive.
(5) Compression members shall be des igned using the design axial
load from a conventional f i ame analys is and a magnified moment
defined by
where
( 5-20)
(5-21)
In lieu of more precise calculation, EI may be taken either as
EI
(5-22)
or consers'atively
EI =
where R,,, is the i-a tio of maximum design dead load moment to
maximum design to tal load moment.
For members braced ag:iinst sidesway and without
loads between su pports, C,,, may be taken as
transverse
COllecti vPly resu t the sidesway of the structu re, the value of F shall
be computed for the column group. P , and P,., then shall be taken as
the summation of Pp and P,. for all the columns in the group. In
des igning each column in the group, F shall be taken as the larger
of ( a) the value compri ted for the group as a whole, or (b) the valrie
computed f oi- the ind ivi d tial colti run ass ri ming its ends to be braced
against si desway.
(7) When compress ion members are sub.ject to bending about both
princi pal :ixes, the moment about each :ixis sh:ill be amplified by F,
compu ted from the co rr espond ing con di ti one of restrai nt about that
bb
(a) When the actual computcd eccentricities are less than the
specified min imum, the compu ted end moments may be
u sed to evaluate the con d i tions of curvature.
I b) If cmptitations show that ther e is no eccentricity at
both ends o1 the member, conditions of curvature shall
be based on a ratio of M , /M.. equil to one.
1.5.23
BEARING
1.5.24
I AJ
(2) In doubly rein Ior ced beams and slabs, on effective modular
ratio of 2E / E,. shall be u sed to transform the compre ssion reinforce
ment for- stress compu lation s.
1.. .25
89
DE SIGN
J .5.25 FATIGUE
IA I Concrete
The range of compressive stress in the concrete caused by a sinbl e
passage o1 live load plus impact and centr if ugal force, at service load
level, shall be limited to 0.15f, at points
of
contraftexure, and
at
sec-
Reinforcemenf
General
( 1) The steel stress range shall comply with the :fatigue provisions
of Article 1.5.2 (B) .
(2) The maximum steel stress shall be 36,000 psi'
IB J
withouf
o woterproof
J .5.27 DEFLECTIONS
fAl Superstrucfure depth recommendations
in Table 1.5.27. Depths less than these may be used when specific
consideration is given to limiting longtime deflections by use of
compression re inf orcement or some other method.
Concrete Roadway Slabs excluded.
A putt cable p r trna ril x to bridge deck slabs anl short s pan slab b t-idges where the iIe1 load
to total load moment ratio is I oss than ap p rox imately 0.25.
This stress I imitation is intended for G0, 00 0 jis i yielI point rei rife rcem cnt. For b riclg:es
des igned using 40,0 00 ps i and 5 0.0 00 ps i yield ioi nt rei nto rcement, the maximum stresses Io r vet
long span structures where the live I cad stres ses become in sign ifi cant wouIc1 be li in itol by th o load
tractor equations in Section 1.5. 17 ( D ) to about 27, 7 00 psi to r 40, 00 0 jisi vie1l pot nt rei nfoicement
and to about 34, 6 00 ps i for 60,0 00 psi vield point reinfo rccment.
Appl icable to 6ridges using 6 0, 0 00 psi yield point reinforcement w ith spans o:I 1 50 feet of
mo re where the dead load to total load moment ratio is eoual to or g reater than 0.776.
This provis ion does not applr to rcinforceme nI of brid ge deck sI abs.
Tee-Beams
S actual span in feet
S
'
20
* Recommcn dcd values for continuous sp ans; simple sp an s sh ould have bout 10 ieicent
g reater thickness.
* * When variable dep th memlc re are used, table v alucs may be adjusted to a:con n( Ior chan be
i n relative sti IDness of nositive an cl negative moment sections.
I BJ
where
M,,,,, Maximum
for
91
DE SIGN
average
humidity
.8
2.
J .5.28 OVERLOAD
Structures proportioned by this specification will sustain without
damage the following overload :
IBJ
Positive momenf
reinforcement
IC J
(1) Tenslon reinforcement in a continuous, restrained, or cantilever member, or in any member of a rigid frame, s-hall be anchored
in or through the supporting member by embedment length, hooks,
or mechanical anchorage.
(2) Negative moment reinforcement shall has'e an Pmbedmenl
length into the span as required by Articles 1.5.29 (A) (1) and 1.5.29
(A) (4)
(3) At least one-third the total reinforcement provided for negative moment at the support shall have an embedment length beyond
the point of inflection not less than the effective depth of the member,
12D, or one-sixteenth of the clear span, whichever is gi eater.
DE SIGN
ID J Special members
Adequate end anchorage shall
mPnt in flexural mcmbers where
p roportional to moment, such as :
brackets ; deep beams ; or members
93
(2) T'or
be mu lti plied
(3) The
requ irement
factors for
IG J
:f,=:60 ksi
Top Bars
Bar Size
360
360
360
360
860
540
460
330
220
330
220
Bottom Bars
L,Ior L,,.
Mechonicol onchoroge
Any mechanical device capable of developing the strength of the
reinforcement without damage to the concrete may be used as anchorage.
IKJ Anchorage of sheor reinforcement
( 1) Shear reinforcement shall be carried as close to the compression and tension surfaces of the member as cover requirements
and the proximity of other steel will permit, and in any case the end
of single leg, simple U-, or multiple
U-stirrup, shall
be anchored
by
95
Bend in g around the ton gitud inal rei nforcement thro ugh
at least 180 deg. Hooking or bendi ng stii-rups around
the longi tudina1 rei nforcemen I shall be con sidered effective anchorage only when the stirrups re.ike an angle of
at least 45 cleg. with cleformed ton g itud i nat bar-s.
Between the anchored ends, each bend in the con tinuou s
portion of a transverse st mple U or multiple U-stirr tip
shall enclose a lori gitud i not bar.
Pairs
of U-stirrups or ties so Jlaced as to form a closed
(e)
un it shall be cons idered properly spliced when the laps
are 1.7L, . In members at teas-I 18 in. deep, such splices
havin g a,f ,. not more than 9000 lb per leg may be considered adequate if the legs extend the lull available
depth of the member.
E xcepti on all y lon p span or untis ual structu res req u ii e detailed con
sideration o1 effects which under this Section may have been assigned
J .6.2 NOTATION
A, n ei of non-prestiessed tension ieinforcement.
ber.
J .6.3
DESIGN THEORY
Members shall meet the ultimate strength and allowable stress reQtr irements as specified.
Design shall be based on ultimate strength and behavior at service
DESIGN
1.6.3
97
conditions for all load stages that may be critical during the life of the
structure from the time of prestressin g.
I .G.4
BASI C ASSU6IPTION 5
J .6.5
LOAD FACTORS
Load factors are multiples of the design load applied to the struc-
ture to ensure its safety. The computed ultimate capacity shall not be
less than the largest val ue obtained from foi mulas 6.1, 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4.
Members subject to comb inat ions of loads and forces shall be designed
for the combined effect.
Group I
For all loadings less than H2O, prov isi on shall be made for an infrequent heavy load by applying Group IA loading, with the live load
assumed to occupy a single lane without concurrent load ing in any other
lane.
Group II
When earthquake loading is taken into account, Group II loading
shall be used substitut ing EQ for W. When ice pressure is taken into
(6-4)
Except for the d factors listed below, the symbols in the above
J ..6
ALLOWABLE STRESSES
l.b.b
HI GH WAY B RI D GE 5
Prestressing
steel
. . .
. . . 0.70f ',
. 0.80f ',
(Ovei stressing to 0.80f', for short periods of time may be permitted provided the stress, after transfer to concrete in pretensioning or seating of anchorage in post-tensioning, does not exceed
0.70f',) .
IBJ Concrete
IJ J
Compression
Pretensioned members Posttensioned members
Tension
12 I
99
DE SIGN
1.6.6
Friction
Losses
Friction losses in post-tensioned steel shall be based on experimentally determined wobble and curvature coefficients, and shall be
verified d uring stressing operations. The val ues of coefficients :issu med
for design, and the acceptable ranges of jacking foi ces and steel
may be used :
Type of Duct
Pright Metal Sheath ing
Galvanized Metal
Sheathing
High-strength bars
0.0020
0.30
0.0015
0.25
0.0020
0.30
0.0003
0.20
00002
015
0.0002
0.25
+.
HIGHWAY BRIDGE S
Prefe n stoned
SH
(psi)
(percent)
100-'75
75-25
2ii- 0
( b I ElostiC Ehorte ni ng
EA 7 I,,.= elastic shortening loss, where f,, = average concrete stress at the center of gravity of the
stressing steel at time of release. E 5 may be
mated using the following average values :
Sections with
Sections without
I , (psi)
ES (psi)
I ,. (psi)
7,000
10,000
13,000
600
800
1,000
1,000
1,400
1,800
preesti-
ES (psi)
4,000
5,500
7,000
* Should more cxiict prestress losses be reou ired, data repres enti n g the material to be usel,
the metho de o:I curing, the ambient service cond it ion an d any portin ent structural letail should be
dete rmin cd for use in the methol r resented in Deflectio us of Prestre sseel Concrete Mem bers
reports d by Subcomm ittee 6, ACI Ccmm ittec 435 , Journal o( tic III, Vol. G 0, No. 12, Docean ber
1.6.7
DE SIGN
(c)
Creep of Concrete
8,000
800
13,000
1,200
(d)
ReIo x o fion of
19,000
Post- fensioned
J .6.8
FLEXURE
J .6.9
fA J
Recfongulor
Sections
For rectangular or flanged secti ons in which the neutral axis 1 ies
within the flange, the ultimate flexural strength shall be assumed as
where
A,,
section.
A, = 0.85 I,, (b b) t/f ",,, = steel area required to develop the ultimate compressive strength of the overhanging portions of the flange.
I CI
Steel Stress
known
from
Bonded members .
Unbonded members
pi-ovided that :
(1) The stress-strain properties of the prestressing steel approximate those specified in Article 2.4.33 (I )
(2) The effective prestress after losses is not less than 0.5 I',
1 .6. J 0
I AJ Moximum Steel
P restressed concrete members shall be designed so that the steel
is yielding as ultimate capacity is approached. In general the reinforcement index shall be such that
1'or rectangular sections
and
for flanged sections
does not exceed 0.30. For steel with reinforcement indices greater than
this, the ultimate flexur:it strength shall be assumed not greater than :
1 .6.J 1
NONPRESTRESSED
REINFORCEMENT
DE SIGN
J .d.12 CONTINUITY
IAJ Generol
Continu ous beams and other statieilly indeterminate struct It res
shall be designed for adequate strPn gth and satisfactory behavior.
Pehavior shall be determ in ed by clastic analysis, hiking into account
the reactio ns, moments, shcr and axi:il foi ces produced by prestiessing, the effects of temperature, creep, shrinkage, axial deform at ion,
ros trint of attached structuial elements, and Iourid ution settlement.
IBI Cost-in-ploce Posf-Tensioned Bridges
Genero I
When structurttl Continu ity is vssii med in calcu lating live loads
plus iinpact and composite dead load moments, the effects of creep
and shrinkage shall be considered in the design of bridges incor
porating simple span precast, prest ressocl girders and deck slams
cont in uous over two or more spans.
( 2)
Provis ion shall be made in the design for the positive moments
that may develop in the negative moment region due to the combined effects of creep and sh ri nkige in the girders and deck slab,
and due to the effects of live load plus impact in remote spans.
Sh rinkage .tnd elastic shorten ing of the pier shall be considered
when significant.
Non-prostressod positive moment conn ection reinforcement at
Jiers may be designed at working stress o:I II.G times the yield
strength but not to exceed 36 ksi.
( 3)
Negofive lv\omenfs
104
1 .. J 3
SHEAR *
moment.
For the design of web re inforcement in simply supported mem
bers carrying moving to:ids, it is recommended that shear be in
ves tig alecl only in the middle
length.
The
web
reinl orcement reqti ired at the quarter points should be used throi gh
oit the outer quarters of the span.
* The metho1 Jor les ign of web remit or cemeat: j resen tecl in ACI .3 18-7 1 is :in aece ptablo :iltc rnate but web rcinf or cemc nt shall not be less th:in Av
100 6./f s .
DESIGN
For continuous bridges whose individual spans consist of pre
cast prestressed girders, web reinforcement shall be designed for
the lull length of interi or spans and for the interior three-fourths
of the exterior span.
1 .. J 4 COMPOSITE STRUCTURES
IA J
General
with the beam shall be interconnected in accordance with (B) (C) and
(D) of this
1.6. 15
ANCHORAGE ZONES
The following minimum concrete cover shall be provided for prestressing and conventionil steel :
( 1) P restressing steel and main reinforcement
(2) Slab Reinforcement
(a) Top of slab
(1) When de-icers are used
(b) Bottom o:I slab
1t_ in.
. 2 in.
1
in.
DEBIGN
107
are exposed to salt water, salt spray or chemical vapor, add itional cover
should be provided.
IBI Minimum Spacing
The minimum clear spacing of prestressin g steel at the ends of
ICN Bundling
When post-tensioning steel is draped or deflected, post-tensioning
ducts may be bundled in groups o:I three maximum, provided that the
spacing specified in (B) is maintained in the end three ft. o:I the mem-
J .6. J 8
where
D is the nominal diameter in inches, I ,,, and :f,,, are kips per sq. in.
and the parenthetical expression is considered to be without units.
J .6.19
J .6.20
BEARINGS
J .6.2 J
SPAN LENGTHS
be
considered
as
I .6.23 T-BEAMS
In beam and slab composite construction, the junction between flange
slab and web beam shall meet the requirements of Article 1.6.14, if the
slab is to be considered an integral part with the beam. In cast-in-place
DE SI GN
girder spacing, the effectis e flange width is the distance center-tocenter of beams. For very short spans, or where girder spacing is
excessive, an alytical investigations shall be made to determine the
anticipated width of flange acting with the beam.
IBJ Consfruction Joints
For
composite
construction,
flange width shall not exceed 4 times the web width. For monolithic piestressed construction, flange width shall not exceed 15 times the web
width and shall be a deg nate for all design loads.
'The live load bend ing moment for each interior beam in a
to the beam the fraction (D.F.) of the wheel load (both front and
rear') determined by the following equation :
D.F.=
where N,
S= beimspacnginfeot (675
L= spun|ength, infeet
(of length S) between beams, bit I shill not be less than 2N; / N p.
IBJ
Elective Compression
Flonge Widfh
DESIGN
IC J
Flonge
Thickness
Section 7
Fahrenheit.
5t ructural
Carbon
5I eel
T ab I c 1 . 7. I
fi ma Jes (h)
Goups (6)
1 ve r 4
To 4 "
T o 8 I n ct.
Appficable
Aa
.
7t1 . 000
46 , G00
40.000
27,000
2J OOO
36
23 00 0-
2 5 , 000-
27 , 000-
L'
18 , 000
L'
= 16, 000-
L'
20 , 000
22 , 000-
14.000
17.000
54,000
40.000
tation (10)
not subject0.80F
37.000
32.000
31,000
14 000
16,000
17.000
48,000
See i'age II 4 for Iootn otes.
37 . 0 TO
1 8 , 000
28.000
0.4OF,
34 . 000
1 7 . 0011
66.000
40.000
1.7.1
(A SI4/A517(9)
Up to TQ I net.
Up to
4 Incl.
Not applicable
60 , 000
42,000
70,00
75.000
30 , 000
33 . 000
36 , 000
48 , 090
TO, 000
33, 000
36, 0()()
49, 000
45,000
27,000
23 , 000
27, 0110
3. 000
25, 000
27, 000
28
34
2 7 , 00014.4
19,000-
20,000-
b
b
22,000-
30 , 000-
23
8 6 , 000-
49 , 000-
US , 000-
29,000-
40,000-
44,000-
24,000-
28,00U-
44,000
48,000
44, 000
46 , 0 00
24 , 000
1 7, 00 0
J4, 000
3 7 , 00 0
34.000
87,000
17.000
48.000
34,010
37 , 000
17,000
40 , 000
40,000
.55, 000
44.000
72 , 000
52 , 00o
72,000
26 , 000
72.000
114
FOOTNOTESFOR TABLE >7.1
( I ) Continuous or c a nIilcver beams or gi rders mav be p report ion ed for negative women I at
i uterine en p po r ts Io r an allow a bIe u n it stress 20 po rcent hig her than permitted by th is :to rmula
but i n no case ex needing aim w able u n it s tress Io r comp ress ion flange sup po rted its Iml lenpth.
If cove r plates a re used, the alto w a blc s tati c stress at the pot n I of theoretical cutoff shall be as
determ tried by the Io rmul a.
( 2 ) 1 ton gth , i n in ches , of unsu p ported fl ange between la te raI connecti ons, kn ee b races or
othe r pot nts of en p per t. For conti nun us beams an d g i rde rs , 1 may be taken as the
d istance f rom trite rio r s upp o rt to poin I o:I dead load ccn Iraflex u re if this d is tance is
less th an des ig n ated above.
For can ti1ev'er beam an d gi rders , I may be taken as tw ice the distan ce I rom the s up p ort to the
end of the ca n tileve r, if this rue ta n ce is let s than desig n ated above.
r
b
radius of 8yration , in inches, of the comp reset on flange nbout the axie i n the plane
of the web.
flan ge w idth, in i n ches.
L
Ie ngth of member, in i nches.
r = least radius of gYration of member, in inches.
For comp reseion members with values of greater than those s frown or of kn own ec cent ri city.
see Ap pe ndix C.
( 4 ) See also Article 1.7.4
( 5 ) Linn ited to 4 th iclc ness for structural members other than bearing assembly components.
(Z) M222 ( A 588 ) is upplicabl e for we lde I st ructures. with Su p pleme nta ry Requirement 51,
Impact Properties , I See AASHO M222 I .
( 8) A ppli cable Ior weI dcd structures in Grades 42, 4 5 and 50 in pI ate th ick nesses th roug h
19j an d i n shape groups 1, 2 an d 3. w'ith Sup pleinenta ry Requirement SZ, Ian p act Properties,
( 9) Quen ched a nd tempered alloy steel structural shapes a n d seamless mech an ical tubi rig
meeti rig all mechan ical and chemical requ memento of A STM At 1 4/A5 17 s teel, etePt that the
speci fled maximum tensile stren gth may be 14 0,000 ni to r stru ctural s hapes and I46,000 par
to r aeamlese mech an ical tubi na , shall be confide bed as ASTM ASI 4 / A6t7 steel.
( 1 0) This shall apply to pins used p nana rily in axiiiug loa4ed members, such us truss members
an d c:i1le adju stint; links. It shall not ap j1y to j in s used in mem be re hav ing rot:ition caused bv
exp:in sion or deflection.
1.72
DE SIGN
Butt Welds
The same as the base metal joined, except in the case of joining metals of d ifferent yields when the lower yield material
shall govern.
Fillet welds
F,. = 12,400 psi on base metal with minimum specified yield
point or strength of 36,000 psi.
inclusive.
F,=25,000 psi on base metal with a minimum specified yield
strength between 50,000 ps i and 100,000 psi incl us we.
AWS AS.1, E 70 electrodes, or eqn ivalent weld metal,
may be used for fillet welds on AS 14/A 517 steel ; for
sucii welds F,. = 14,700 psi.
Plug welds
F,. 12,400 psi for resistance to shear stresses only,
where F,=allowab le basic shear stress.
design shall be selected from Table 1.7.3A unless traffic and load ometer
surveys or other considerations mid icate otherwise.
Case
II
Type
OI
Road
1. Freeways
2. Exp ressivays
3. Major
Highways &
Streets
H Loadin g
H5 Load ing
Lane Lo:iding
2,000004
500000
1O0 O04
600, 1100
1t1f1, fIt)0
100,000
Other Hi glivvays
& Streets not
included in
Case 1
* \Yhore HS 8: H I oa1i rips give the s:true in ax imum stress, use th c n nan be r ct cycles tin if or H
loadings.
1 k,R
A)
'
or torque.
,
8,
(B)
F,= allowable fatigue stresssee Figures 1.7.3 (A) and 1.7.3 (B)
117
Cixvos {]) tirx+ @ ore plotted
fw M l 83 (A 36) 8 feel. For of her afclc
multiply
from
thv
formula
Fot i que
CATEGORY
curve
( B)
v olucs
by the
Arf. I .7. 5
stress , Fy , 8 h0Il
CYCLES
F,
nof
FORMULA
cxc+e d
cuev
NO
F i gure
1.? 3A
Fatigue
Sfresses
This restriction shall not apply to a compression flange at locati ons where
stiffoners, studs, or fillet v elded shear connectors only are weldetl.
For members with stud shear connectors attached to tension flanges
the allowable stress shall not exceed F,. for " Flanges v ith stud shear
connectors.
FATICUE STRESSES
7ob/ 1 .7.3B
Type of
Tvpe & Location of Stateriot
100.000 Cctes
Base Metal
( 4 ) Tension or
Reversal
60,000
( 4 ) Tension
( I ) G omp res sion
20,300
13,000
1.06
1.06
( 4 ) Tens in n or
Comp ress ion
( 4 ) Tension
( I ) Comp reset on
( 5 ) Tene ion or
Comp ress ion
20,500
13,300
0.65
0.65
20,500
1.06
21,000
steel
'
0.55
20,500
13,300
0.55
1?,200
10,600
0.78
0.78
0.65
0.23
0.23
0.54
0.54
0.65
15,000
0.67
0.67
11,500
1.00
0.36
8 ,0
I.oo
9,000 ,
0.62
11,200
0. 50
18,000
LOO
F,
Shear
1 3,500
Tension or
Gompr cssion
20,500
13,300
0.62
16,500
10,80tJ
2.000.000 Cxctes
17,200
(4)Shear
500,0 00 Cycles
Stress
45,000
20,509
11,400
0.65
0.65
1.00
,6
( continued on page 119 )
( 2 ) The us ual cont in uous fillet we1dot flung c-web con neutrons and sim ila r con nectio ns shall be gove rne1 by Catego r J, Base
Met at ad Ia cent to cont inuous flange-web fi llet welds.
( 3 ) Dase Metal adjacent to Inng itud inaI butt wells anl the weld metal i n long itud inal bu It welds shall be governe d by Category I,
Base Metal adJ a cent to Continuous fla nge- web fillet welds.
( 4 ) See graihs on figure 1.7.3A.
( 5 ) See grants on figure 1. 7.3B .
( C ) The Cat ego re G , Weld Metal in Table 1.7.3B d oes not ap ply to th is case. Wh ere the shea r st ress in the welds exceeds 15 ks i ,
Fr Fi -|- 3F in which Ft, and F aie the max inn nan bend ing an d she a r st resses i n the weI 1 and Fr is the altoiv a 6Ie fatigue stiess Ior
Catego ry J, Base Metal A ljacent to continuous flange-web fillet wet ds. lnterm ittent fillet welds shall not be per-rii i tteil.
( 7 ) See Catego nes I an1 K for excey tions.
Figure 1.7. 3 B
FATIGUE STRESSES
CATEGOR'Y
F
CYCLES
BASE METAL
IOQOOO
cnr v c J ed by
500.000
od|ocsni to or
FORMULA
NUMBER
TYPE
OF
TRESS
!f s O O
!- R
Bearing per linear inch on expansion rockers and rollers shall not
exceed the values obtained by the Iollowing formulas :
F 13,000
600d
Diameters up to 25 inches p
20,000
DESIGN
1.7.4
121
F, 13,000
20,000
3,000
where :
AASHO Designation
with size limitations
ASTM Designation
\\ ith Ciradc or Class
A-108
A-23?
A-235
A-26
A-287
Grades 11116
to 11180 inc.
Class
Cl
Class
E
Class
G
Class
A
36000'
33,000
B\600
J OOOO
50000
Minimum Yield
Point, psi
F.
Stress in Extreme
Fiber, psi
0.80 ',.
29,000 "
26,000
80,000
40,000
40,000
Shear', psi
0.40 F,
14,400 *
18,000
15,000
20,0110
20,0011
0.40 F,.
14,000 "
13,000
16,000
20,tt0ft
20,000
subject to rotation,
psi '' *
( Such as used in
iockoi's and hinges)
* For losi jn jurp os e only. Not a ; art of the A 108 sjecifi cations . 5u p p lean on ta ry mate ri.i I
i'equi cements sh ouJ d p rovi dc gua ra n tee that mater iaI will meet these values.
** M:iv s u b sI i I u te rollout material of the same n robic rties.
* * * 1h i.s sh all a; p I y to ji ins use1 j nana riI y in x tall y loaded in embers , s u ch as t runs mem bets
:in d cubic al i us tin I inks. It shall not a n;ly to jins useI in membe re h avi n;;; rotation causecl bv
expansion or ilefleetion.
The effective bearing area of a fastener 9hall be its diameter run lti-
plied by the thickness of the metal on which it bears. In metal less than
8
' inch th ick, cou ntersunk rivets, turned bolts or ribbed bolts shall not be
assumed to carry etress. In metal is inch thick and over, one-half the
depth of countersin k shall be omitted in calculating the bearing area.
Allowable unit stresses in pounds per square inch for fasteners shall
be as listed in the table below :
Shear
'Type of Fastener
Tension
Bearing
Friction
Type
Connec-
tion
Bearing
Type
Connec-
tion
40,000
40,009
3G,00I1
40,000 ( ?)
20,000
18,5011
20,000 (4)
1.7.5
123
DES IGN
c ulated as two thread lengths greater than the specified thread length as
an allowance for th read run out.
In bearing type connections, pull-out shear in a plate should be invest igated between the end ef the plate and the end row of fasteners.
High strength bolts preferably shall be used for Iastene rs s ubject
For combined shear and tension in friction type joints, where applied
:forcee reduce the total clamping force on the friction plane, the allowable
unit shearing stress, f,., for AAS HO M164 (ASTM A325) high strength
bolts shall not exceed the values obtained from the following equation :
:f, 13,500 .22f ,
where f,=tensile stress due to applied loade
s + (kt) = S
where s= the computed rivet or bolt unit stress in shear
be used with high strength bolts proportioned to meet the allowable unit
stresses given a1ove except as herein alter restricted :
1. Holes '?ii; inch larger than bolts /s inch and less in diameter,
? inch larger than bolts 1 inch in diitmeter, anil ?c inch larger
than bolts 1?s inch and greater in diameter may be used in
uncoated friction type shear con neutron s provided a hardened
washer is inserted under both the head and nut.
2. Slotted holes ',ic inch wider than the bolt diameter and of a
of friction-type shear
provided than needed
one o:I the Enclosed
surface may contain
124
shall not lie less than that permitted with conventional size
holes under Art. 1.7.36.
J .7.6
IA
Highway Bridges, AASHO M 192 (ASTM A 486) Mild-to MediumStrength Carbon-Steel Castings for General Appl ication AASHO M 103,
(ASTM A 27) and Corrosion-Resistant Iron-Chromium-Nickel Alloy
Hastings for General Application, AASHO M 163 (ASTM A 296) and
f oi Ductile fron Castings, ASTM A 536 the following allowable stresses
in pounds per square inch shall be used :
AASBO Designation
ASTM Designation
Class or Grade
none $ M192
M 192
A27 A486
70-36
70
36,000
M 163
A486
None
A 296
Aii36
90
120
CA-15
60-40-18
60,000
95,000
65,000
40,000
Axial Tension
14,500
22,500
34,000
24,000
16,000
14,500
23,500
34,000
24,000
16,000
Axial Compression,
short columns
Compression in extreme fibers
20,000
20,000
30,000
30,000
45,000
45,000
32,000
32,000
22,000
22,000
Shear
Bearing, steel parte in contact
Bearing on pins not subject to
rotation
Bearing on pins subject to
rotation (such as used in
rockers and hinges)
9,000
13,500
21,000
14,000
10,000
30,000
4fi,000
68,000
48,000
33,000
26000
40000
60000
43000
28000
13000
20000
30,000
21800
14,000
the allowable unit bearing stress of the material with the lower yield point
shall vovern. For riveted or bolted connections, Art. 1.7.5 shall govern.
. .
18,000
18,000
25,000,000
DESIGN
1.7.6
125
For cast iron castings conform in g to spec ifications for Gray Iron
Castings, AASHO M 105, Class 30, the Vol lowing al lowable stresses in
pou nds per square inch, shall be used :
Bending in extreme fiber
Shear
Direct
compression,
short
3,000
columns
3,000
. 12,000
BEARING ON MASONRY
The allowable unit bearing stress in pounds per square inch, on the
following typee of masonry, shall be :
Granite '
Sandstone and Limestone
Concrete :
Bridge eeate, under hinged rockers and
bolsters Inot subjected to high edge loading
by deflecting beam, girder, or trust)
1,000
Bridge seats, under bearing plates or nonhinged shoes (subjec ted to high edge loading by the direct beat ing, upon the plate or
shoe,
of
deflecting
beam
or
girder) ,
average
.
700
The above bridge seat un it stresses will apply only where the edge
of the bridge seat projects at least 3 inches (average) beyond edge of shoe
or plate. Otherwise, the unit stresses permitted will be 75 percent of the
above amounts.
DETAILS OF DESIGN
J .7.9
For the ca lcu lation of stresses, span lengths shall be assumed as the
distance between centers of bearings or other points of support.
crete slab, plus steel girder) to the length of span preferably shal I not be
126
less than 3_- , and the ratio of depth of steel girder alone to length of span
For trusses the ratio of: depth to length of span shall not be less
than'/i.
For continuous span depth ratios, the epan length shall be considered
ae the distance between the dead load points of contraflexure.
J .7.J I
using the area thus neglected and the strength of the member as computed
:for the entire section with the
exceed the computed total stress that the member must sustain.
The rad ius of gy ration and the effective area for carrying stress of a
member contain ing perforated cover plates shall be computed for a
transverse section through the maximum width o:I perforation. When
perforations are staggered in opposite cover plates the cross-sectional
area of the member shall be considered the same as for a section having
perforations in the same transverse plane.
Unsupported length shall be assumed as follows :
For the top chords of half-through trusses, the length between
panel points laterally supported as indicated under At ticle 1.7.85 ; for
other main members, the len gth between panel point intersection s or
centers of braced points or centers of end connections ; for secondary
members, the length between the centers of the en d connections of
such members or centers of braced points.
For tension members, except rods, eyebars, cables and plates, the
rati o of u nsu pported length to radius of gyration sha 11 no I exceed 200 for
main members, shall not exceed 240 for bracing members, and shall not
exceed 140 for main members subject to a reversal of stress.
J .7.12 DEFLECTION
The term de Section as used herein shall be the deflect ion computed
in accordance with the ass u mption made for loading when comput in g the
stress in the member.
Members havin g simple or contin uous spans shall be designed so that
the deflection due to l we load pl us impact shall not exceed 'ie of the span,
except on bridges in u rban areas used in part by pedestrians whereon the
rati o preferably shall be /iuac.
1.7. 12
DE SIGN
orthotropic decks, fillers and in railings, shall be not less than 'ie in
thickness. I'he web thickness of rolled beams or channels shall not be
less than 0.23. The thickness of closed ribs in orthotropic decks shall not
be less than '?i,.
Where the metal wiI l be exposed to marked corrosive influences, it
shall be increased in thickness or specially protected against corros ion.
It should be noted that there are other provisions in this section
pertain i rig to th ickness for fillers, segments of compression members,
gusset plates, etc. As stated above fillers need not be '? in in.
For stiffeners and ou tstand i rig legs ot angles, etc., refer to Article
1.7.15.
For str ffen ers and other plates refer to Plate Girders.
For compress ion members refer to Trusses.
128
J .7. J 5
(except
I .7.J 6
J .7.17
COMBINED STRESSES
loads actin g perpend icular to the axis of the member, shal I be assumed
equal to +1.
I .7.I 8
ECCENTRIC CONNECTIONS
ther r gravity axes wit I inte rsect i n a point. Eccent ric connections shall
be avo ided, if pract icabl e, but if unavoidable the members shall be so
proport ioned that the combined fibe r stresses w i 11 not exceed the allowed
axial strew.
1.7.19
DESIGN
129
Web plates shal I be spliced symmetrica fly by plates on each side. The
spI ice plates for shear shall extend the full depth of the girder between
flanges. In the splice there shall be not less than 2 rows of rivets or bolts
on each side of the joint.
Compression members, such as columns and chords, shall have ends
in close contact at riveted and bolted splices. Splices of such members,
wh ich will be fabricated and erected with close inspection and detailed
with milled ends in full contact bearing at the spl ices, may be held in place
by means of spl ice plates and rivets or high strength bolts proportioned
for not less than 50 percent of the lower allowable stress of the sections
spliced.
Tension and compress ion members may be spliced by means of full
penetration butt welds preferably wi th out the use of splice plates.
Spl ices in truss chords and columns shall be located as near to the
panel points as practicable and usually on that side where the smaller
etress occu rs. The arran gement of plates, angles and other splice elements
shall be such as to make proper prov is ion for the stresses, both axial and
bend in g, in the component parts of the members s pl iced.
For riveted an d bolted flexural members, splices in flan ge parts .shall
not be used between field spI ices except by special permission of the Engineer. In any one flange not more than one part shall be spl iced at the
same cross-section. If practicable, splices shall be located at points where
there is an excess of section. Riveted and bol ted flange angle splices shall
include two angles, one on each side of the flexural member.
In continuous spans, splices preferably shall be made at or near points
of contraflexure.
Welded field spl ices p refc rably should be arranged to minimize overhead weld ing.
If spl ice plates are not in direct contact wi th the parts which they
connect, the n umber of fasteners on each side of the joint shal I be in excess
of the number requ ired for a d i rect contact splice to the extent of at least
two extra transverse lines of fasteners for each intervening plate, except
as provided below.
If fasteners carrying stress pass through fillers, the fillers preferably
ehall be extended beyond the gusset or splice material, and the extension
secured by enough additional fasteners to carry the stress in the filler,
wh ich stress is to be calculated as the total stress in the member divided
by the comb ined area of the member plus the fillers. As an alternate, the
II I GH WAY B RI DCE S
130
stressing the filler along the toe of the weld. Any filler less than '/i in.
thick shall have its edges made flush with the edges of the splice plate.
The weld size necessary to carry the splice plate stress shall be increased
by the th ickness of the filler plate.
Fillers in high strength bolted friction type connections need not be
extended and developed, but eccentricity of forces at short thick fillers
must be considered.
Material of different widths spliced by butt welds shall have transitions conf or min g to Figure 1.7.19 except that for A514 and A517 steels
o nly the transiti on illustrated in Fig. 1.7.19a is permitted. At butt weld
splices joining writer ml of diffei-ent thicknesses there shall be a uniform
slope between the offset surfaces of not more than 1 in 2_ with respect
to the surface of either part.
1.7.20
STRENGTH OF CONNECTIONS
1.7.21
DESIGN
arches
J .7.22
Where beams, girders or trusses are used for through spans, the
spans preferably shal I have only two main members. Such members shall
be spaced a sufhc rent d istance apart (center to center) to be secure
against overturn ing by the assumed lateral forces.
132
fications for Welded Highway and Railvay Bridges of the American Weld-
ing Society and Art. 2.10.23 except that welding of steels not covered by
those steels.
The minimum fillet weld size shall be :is shown in the followin g
table. Weld size is determined by the thicker of the two parts joined
unless a larger size is required by calculated stress. The weld size need
not exceed the thickness of the thinner part joined.
(Inches)
To jinclusive
DE SICN
J .7.27
The maxim um s ize of a fillet weJd that may- be assu med in the des ign
J .7.28
IA I Butt Welds
The effective area shal I be the effective weld length mu ltipl red by
thinner piece of base metal joined. ( No increase is permitted for weld reinforcement.)
J .7.29
The min imum effective length of a fillet weld shal I be four times its
size and in no case less than 1'3:inches.
J .7.3J
LAP JOINTS
The mini mum width of laps on lap joints shall be 5 times the thickness of the th inner part joined and not less than 1 inch. Lap joints joining
plates or bars subjected to axial stress shall be fillet welded along the edge
of both lapped parts except where the deflection of the lapped parts is
sufficiently restrained to prevent opening of the joint under maximum
loading.
J .7.32
SEAL WELDS
J .7.33
When joining material in skewed tee joints, fillet welds shall not be
used for joints that have an incl uded angle of less than 60 degrees.
J .7.34
to the provisions of Article 1.7.28. Fillet welds in holes or slots are not to
be considered plug or slot welds.
J .7.35
Fasteners shall be of the size shoix'n on the draw ings, but generally
shall be 'li inch or ? inch in diameter. Fasteners ?s inch in diameter shal I
not be used in members carry in g calculated stress except in 2'?_ i rich legs
of angles and in flanges of sections requi ring ?s inch fasteners.
The diameter of fasteners in angles carrying calculated stress shall
not exceed one-fourth the w idth of the leg in wh ich they are placed.
In angles whose size is not determined by calculated stress, s inch
fasteners may be used in 2 inch legs, '?i inch Iasteners in 2'?_ inch legs,
/s inch fasteners in 3 inch legs, and 1 inch Iastene re in 3,_ inch legs.
Structu rat shapes which do not admit the use of /s inch d iameter
fasteners shall not be used except in handrails.
minimum.
1.7.36
DE SIGN
1.7.37
IA I Sealing Fasteners
For sealing, the pitch on a single line adjacent to a I ree edge of an
outside plate or shape shall not exceed 4 inches + 4t or 7 inches. If
there is a second line of fasteners uniformly staggered with those in the
line adjacent to the free edge, at a gage g less than 1'/_ inches + 4t
therefrom, the staggered pitch in two such lines, considered together,
shal l not exceed 4 inches + 4t "fig or 7 inches 'fi g but need not be less
than one-half the req u meanest for a single l ine. t= the th redness in
inches of the thinner outside plate or shape.
IB J
Stitch Fasteners
J .7.38
IA J
The min imum distance f rom the center of any fastener to a sheared
or flame cut edge shal I be :
For 1 inch fasteners, 1/i inches.
For 7s inch fasteners, 1'/a inches.
For " /i inch fasteners, 1'/i i nches.
For 7s inch fasteners, 1'7e i nches.
The mini run in distance from the center of any fastener to a rol led
or planed edge, except in flanges of beams and channels, shall be :
For
For
For
For
thickness of the thinnest outside plate, but shall not exceed 5 inches.
I BI Special
In connections des igned by bearing on the plates and
more than two lines of Iasteners parallel to the direction of
the distance between the center of the nearest fastener and
the connected member toward which the pressure from the
having no
the stress,
that end of
fastener is
di rected, shall not be less than the nominal shearing area of the fastener
1.7.39
LONG RIVETS
1.7.40
the body of the member. The ratio of the net width through the pi n
hole transverse to the axis of the member) to the th ickness of the segment
D E SIGN
shall not be more than 8. Flanges not bearing on the pin shall not be
cons idered in the net section across the pin.
the
1.7.46 EYEBARS
Eyebars shall be of a uniform thickness without reinforcement at the
pin holes. The th ickness of eyebars sha'l be not less than 'pa of the width,
nor less than /_ inch, and not greater than 2 inches. The section o:I the
head through the center of the pin hole shall exceed the required section of
the body of the bar by at least 35 percent. The net section back of the pin
hole shall not be less than 75 percent of the requ ired net section of the body
of the member. The rad i us of transition between the head and body of the
eyebar shall be equal to or greater than the width of the head through the
centerline of the p in hole. The diameter of the pin shall be not less than
eld point of steel
BEARINGS
\ .T.49
FIXED
BEARINGS
Fixed ends shall be firmly anchored. Bear in gs for spans less than
50 feet need have no provision for dePecti on. Spans of ii0 feet or greater
shall be prov ided wi th a type of bearing employing a h inge, curved bearing plates, elastomer ie pads, or pin arrangement for deflection purposes.
1.7.50
EXPANSION BEARINGS
Spans of less than 50 feet may be arran ged to slide u pon metal
plates with smooth su rfaces and no prov isions for de Section of the spans
need be made. Spans of 50 feet and greater shall be provided with rollers,
rockers or slid in g plates for expansion purposes and shall also be provided
I .7.5 I
BRONZE OR
COPPER-ALLOY
SLIDING
EXPANSION
BEARINGS
Bronze or copper-alloy st iding plates shall be cha mfe red at the ends.
They shall be held securely in position, usually by being inset into the
1.7.51
DESIGN
metal of the pedestals or sole plates. Prov is ions shall be made against any
J .7.52
ROLLERS
Expansion rollers shall be connected by substan tial s ide bars and sha II
be gu ided by gearing or other effectual means to prevent lateral movement, skewing and creeping. The rollers and bee ring plates shall be protected from di rt and water as far as practicable, and the des ign shall be
such that water will not be retained and that the roller nests may be
inspected and cleaned easily.
J .7.53
Sole plates and masonry plates shal l have a min imu in th ickne.ss of
inch.
For spans on i ncli ned grades greater than 1 * without hinged bearings the sole plates shall be beveled so that the bottom of the sole plate is
level, u nless the bottom of the sole plate is rad ial ly en rved.
I .7.54
MASONRY BEARINGS
J .7.55
ANCHOR BOLTS
anchored to the substr uctu re. Anchor bolts shall be swedged or threaded
to secure a satisfactory grip upon the material used to embed them in
the holes.
The following are the minimum requirements for each bearing :
For rolled beam spans the outer beams shall be anchored at
each end with 2 bolts, 1 in diameter, set 10 in the masonry.
For trusses and git-ders :
Spans 50 feet in length or less ; 2 bolts, 1 in diameter, set
10 in the masonry.
masonry.
FLOOR SYSTEM
1.7.57 STRINGERS
Strin gers preferably shall be framed into floorbeams. Stringers sup-
1.7.58 FLOORBEAMS
Floorbeams preferably shall be at right angles to the trusses or main
girders and shall be rigidly connected thereto. F loorbeam connections
preferably shall be located so the lateral bracing system will engage both
the floorbeam and the main supporting member. In pin-connected trusses,
if the floorbeams are located below the bottom chord pins, the vertical
posts shall be extended sufficiently below the pins to make a rigid connection to the floorbeam.
J .7.59
CROSS FRAMES
1.7.60
EXPANSION JOINTS
Apron plates, when used, shall be designed to bridge the joint and to
prevent, so far as practicable, the accumulation of roadway debris upon
DESIGN
1.7.60
the bridge seats. Preferably, they shall be connected rigidly to the end
floorbeam.
Where timber str in gers frame into steel floorbeams, shelf angles with
st iffeners shall be provided to carry the whole reaction. Shelf angles shall
be not less than 7 s inch thick.
J .7.62
END FLOORBEAMS
There shall be end floorbea ins in all square-ended trusses and girder
spans and preferably in skew spans. End floorbeams for truss spans
preferably shall be des igned to perm it the use of jacks for l ifting the
su perstruc tu re. For th i s case the allowable stresses may be increased
50 percent.
End floorbea ins shall be arranged to permit painting of the side of
the beam ad jace nt to the abutment backwa 11.
1.7.63
J .7.64
SIDEWALK BRACKETS
142
ROLLED BEAMS
J .7.65 ROLLED BEAMS, GENERAL
Rolled beams, including those with welded cover plates, shall be
designed by the moment of inertia method. Rolled beams with riveted
cover plates shall be designed on the same basis as riveted plate girders.
The compression flanges of rolled beams supporting timber floors
shall not be considered to be laterally supported by- the flooring unless the
floor and fastenings are specially designed to provide adeQuate support.
not be greater than 2/_ times the Pange thickness. The thickness and
I'he Iheoreticnl end of the cover plate is the section at which the stress in
the flange without that cover plate equals the allowable stEt3S9 exclusive of
fatigue considerations. The term/nnl distotice is 2 times the nominal cover
plate width for cover plates not welded across their ends, and ID time9 IOP
cover plates welded across their ends. The width at ends of tapered cover
plates shall be not less than 3 inches. The weld connecting the cover plate
cover plate at its theoretical end. All welds connecting cover plates to
beam flanges shall be continuous and shall not be smaller than the mini-
DESIGN
1.7.68
PLATE GIRDERS
J .7.68 PLATE GIRDERS, GENERAL
Girders shall be proportioned by the moment of inertia method. In
calculating the net moment of inertia of riveted plate girders, the gravity
axis of the gross section shal l be used and the moment of inertia of all
holes each s ide of the axis shall be deducted. The tensile stress shall be
computed from the moment of inertia of the entire net section and the
compressive s tress from the moment of inertia of the entire gross section.
The compression flanges of plate girders supporting timber floors
shal I not be considered to be late rally supported by the flooring u nless the
floor and fasten ings are specially designed to provide support.
J .7.69 FLANGES
fA J Welded Cirders
Each flange may compri9e a series of plates joined end to end by full
penetration butt welds. Changes in flange areas may be accompl ished by
varying the thicknes9 or width of the flange plate, or by adding cover
plates. Where plates of varying thicknesses or widths are connected, the
splice shall be made in accordance with Article 1.7.19 and welds ground
emooth before attaching to the web.
When cover plates are used, they shall be designed in accordance with
Article 1.7.67.
The ratio of compression flange plate width to thickneee shall not
exceed the value determined by the formula :
b/t
b/t ratios :for the various grade9 Of steel shall not exceed the following :
36,000 Q9i, Y.P. Min.
42,000 to
46,000 psi, Y.P. Min.
50,000 psi, Y.P. Min.
55,000 psi, Y.P. Min.
b/t =23
b/t= 21
b/t= 20
b/t = 19
b/t= 18
Hybrid Girders) .
b/t=
b'/I= 10
b'/t= 9
b/I= 7.5
b/t7
In the above b' is the width of a flange angle, t is the thickness, and
is the calculated maximum compressive stress.
The gross area of the compression flange, except for composite
design, shall be not less than the gross area of the tension flange.
Flange plates shall be of equal thickness, or shall decrease in
thickness from the flan ge angles outward. No plate shall have a thickness greater than that of the flange angles.
At least one cover plate of the top flange shall extend the full length
of the girder except when the flange is covered with concrete. Any
cover plate which is not full length shall extend beyond the theoretical
cut off point far enough to develop the capacity of the plate or shall
extend to a section where the stress in the remainder of the g irder
flange is equal to the allowable fatigue stress, whichever is greater.
The theoretical cut off point of the cover plate is the section at which
the stress in the flange without that cover plate equals the allowable
stress, exclusive of fatigue considerations.
plate shall be sufficient to develop the increment of flange stress transmitted to the flange anglee, combined with any load that is applied
directly to the flange.
shall have two lines of :f asteners. Cover plates over 14 inches wide shall
have four lines o:I fasteners.
23,000
but in no case shall the thickness be less than D/170.
1.7.70
DE SIGN
h
\ I
| | | | | | | || |
I I I 1 1 1 J I l .l
hI I I I I I I I I
|
|
| | )
| |
| | ||
| |t
||| |
&
Figure I.7 70
D/16$
D/140
D/105
D/150
D/145
D/133
D/127
D/121
ri / i rin
D
46,
but in no case shall the thickness be less than D/340.
Where the calculated bending stress in the flange equals the allow-
able bending stress, the thickness of: the web plate stiffened with transverse stiffeners in combination with one longitudinal stiffener, shall not
be less than (where the Y.P. is for the flange material) :
36,000 psi. Y.P. Min.
42,000 psi. Y.P. Min.
D/330
D/300
D/280
D/266
D/253
D/290
D/242
11,0001
but n.ot greater than the clear unsupported depth of the web plate between
flanges, in which :
d=the requ ired distance between str ffeners, in inches
t==the thickness of the web plate, in inches
f, the average calculated unit shearing stress in the gross
The first two stiffener spaces at the simply supported ends of girders
shall be one-half the val ue specified above.
Transverse intermediate stiffeners may be omitted if the web plate
thickness is not less than the thickness determined by the formula :
Figure 1.7.71B)
7500
but in no case shall t be less than D/ 150.
Where the calculated shear stress equals the allowable shear streS9,
1.7.71
147
DE SIGN
Min.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Min.
D/68
D/64
D/60
D/58
D/56
D/53
D/51
D/43
D/41
where I 25
fn these expressions,
48
FIGURE 1.7.71 A
( See page 149 for Figure 1.7.7 IB)
I Dt( 2.4
where
do
where
b= width of stiffeners
f calculated compressive bending stress in the flange
The stress in the stiffener shall not be greater than the basic allowable bending streS9 IOT the material used in the stiffener.
Longitud inal stiffeners are usually placed on one side only of the web
plate. They need not be continuous and may be cut at their intersections
with the transverse stiffeners.
DE 5I GN
WE6
PL AT E
W I TH OUT
149
STI FFEN E RS
4O
S0
6O
7O
8O
90
!0O
D (inchesi
FI G U R E
J .7.73
IA I
1. 7.71 B
BEARING STIFFENERS
Welded Girders
Over the end bearings of welded plate pi rders and over the inter-
med rate bearings of conti n uous welded plate g i rders there shall be
str ffeners. They sha 11 extend as nearly as pract icable to the outer edges
the entire end reaction to the b ea r in gs. For stiffeners consisti rig o:I two
plates, the column section shal l be ass umed to comprise the two plates
and a centrally located strip of the web plate whose width is equal to
not more than 18 times its thickness. For stiffeners consisting of four
or more plates, the column section shall be assumed to comprise the four
or more plates and a centrally located strip of the web plate whose width
is equal to that enclosed bj' the four or more plates plus a width of not
more than 18 times the web plate thickness. (See Art. 1.7.113 for Hybrid
through the center line of the web plate. The stiffeners shall be ground
to fit against the flange through which they receive their reaction, or
attached to the flange by full penetration groove welds. Only the portions of the stiffeners outside the flange-to-web plate welds shall be
considered effective in bearing. The thickness of the bearing stiffener
plates shall not be less than
b
F,
12
33,000
J .7.74
CAMBER
TRUSSES
J .7.75
TRUSSES, GENERAL
cover plates and at the bottom with perforated plates or stay plates
tinu ous.
In chords composed of an gles in chan nel shaped members, the vertical
legs of the angles p referably shall extend downward.
If web members are su bject to reversal of stress, their end connections shall not be pinned. Counters preferably s hall be rigid. Adj us table
counters, if used, shall have open turnb uckles, and in the desig n of these
members an allowance of 10,000 pou nds shall be made for initia I stress.
On l y one set of d iagona 1s in a ny panel shall be adjus table. Sleeve nu ts
and loop bals shall n ot be used.
stress.
1.7.78 DIAPHRAGMS
There shall be diaphragms in the trusses at the end connections of
floor beams.
The queset plates en:aging the pedestal ;iin at the end of the truss
shall be connected by a diaphragm. 5inn ila rly, the webs of the pedestal
shall, if practicable, be connected by a diaphragm.
There shall be a diaphragm between gusset plates engaging main
members if the end tie plate is 4 feet or more from the point of intersection of the members.
1.7.79 CAMBER
The length of the truss members shall be sue.h that the camber will
b eQual to or greater than the deflection produced by the dead load.
1.7.8 J
Through truss spans shall have portal bracing, preferabl y, of the 2plane or box type, rigidly connected to the end post and the top chord flanges,
and as deep as the clearance will all ow. If a single plane portal is used, it
shall be located, preferably, in the central transverse plane of the end posts,
wi th diaph ragms between the webs of the posts to provide for a d
istribution of the portal stresses. The portal bracing shall be designed to
take the full end reaction of the top chord lateral system and the end posts
shall be designed to transfer this reaction to the truss bearings.
Through truss spans shall have sway bracing 5 feet or more deep at
each intermediate panel point. Top lateral struts shall be at least as deep
as the top chord.
Deck truss spans shall have sway bracing in the plane of the end
posts and at all intermediate panel points. This bracing shall extend the
full depth of the trusses below the floor system. The end sway bracing
shall be proportioned to carry the entire upper lateral stress to the sup
ports through the end posts of the truss.
J .7.82
1.7.83
1.7.83
DE SIGN
l
3,300,000
F,.
In the above expression :
V normal shearing stress in pou nds.
P=allowable compressi ve axial load on members, in pounds.
1=: length of member in inches.
Locing Bors
When lac in g bars are u sed, the followi ng prov ision s shal I govern
their design :
( 1) Lacing bars of compres.sion members shal I be so spaced
that the stenderness ratio of the portion of the flange in-
clu ded between the lacing bar connections will be not more
than 40 nor more than of the slenderness ratio of the
member.
(2) The section of the lacing bars shall be determined by the
psi.,
psi.,
psi.,
psi.,
psi.,
p9i.,
psi.,
Y.P.
Y.P.
Y.P.
Y.P.
Y.P.
Y.P.
Y.P.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Min.
51
49
47
45
45
37
35
DE 5I GN
J .7.85
The vertical truss members and the floorbea ins and th em con nections
in half-through truss spans shall be proportioned to resist a lateral force
of not less than 300 pounds per I in ear foot, applied at the top chord panel
points of each truss.
The top chord shall be considered as a col u run with elastic lateral
supports at the panel points. The critical buckling force of the col u run,
so determ incd, shal I exceed the maximu in force from dead load, I we load
and impact in any panel of th e top chord by not less than 50 percent.
J .7.86
width of the member. Beyond this point, the pitch shall be increased
grad uaI ly for a length equal to I'm times the maximu in width of the
member u nti I the maxi mum pi tch is reached.
J .7.87
MEMBERS
The net section of a riveted or h igh strength bolted tension member
is the su in of the net sections of its com ponen t parts. The net section of a
part is the Jirod uct of the th ickn ess of the part multiplied by i ts least net
wid th.
The net wid th for any ch am of holes extend ing prop ress i ve l y across
the part sh all be obtained by dcd uctin g from the gross width the en in of
the d iameters of all the holes i n the cha in and adding, for each gage space
in the chain, the q u a nti ty :
s
4g
where S = pitch of any tw'o successive hot es in the chain
g= ;,a9o of the same holes
The net sec I ion of the part is obta i ned from the chain wh ich gives
the J eas I net wid th.
For angles, the gross w idth sh all be the s u rn of the wi dth s of th e
legs less th e th ickn ess. Th e gage for ho les i n oppos i te legs sh at I be the
eu in of gages from back of angle less the th i ckness.
At a splice, the total stress in the member being spliced is transferred
by :f asteners to the spI ice ma terial.
When determ in ing the un it stress on any least net wid th of e it her
spl ice materi a I or member being spl iced, the amou nt of the stress previ ou 9l y tr.i n starred by fasten en adjacent to the secti on being i n ves tigated
shall be cont idered in determ in ing the u n it stress on the net sect ion .
The d iameter of the hole shal I be taken as 'Zs inch greater than the
nominal diameter of the rivet or high strength bolt, unless larger holes
are permitted in accordance with Art. 1.7.5.
'
1.7.88
COMPRESSION MEMBERS
THICKNESS OF METAL
roted plotes. For outstanding plates, the outstanding legs of angles, and
perforated plates at the perforations, the b/t ratio of the plates or angle
segments, when used in compress ion, shall not be greater than the value
obtained by use of the formula :
b/t
1625
but in no case shall b/t be greater than 12 for main
, the
b/t ratio of the segments indicated above shall not be greater than the
ratios shown for the following grades of steel :
4000
(Notch is the distance between points of support for the plate and
between roots of flanges for the webs of rolled segments.)
W. hen the compressive stresses equal the limiting
',
the F
.
factor
b/t ratio of the plates and segments indicated above shall not be greater
than the ratios shown for the following grades of steel :
42,000 psi.,
45,000 & 46,000 psi.,
50,000 psi.,
55,000 psi.,
60,000 psi.,
65,000 psi.,
90,000 psi.,
100,000 psi.,
Y.P.
Y.P.
Y.P.
Y.P.
Y.P.
Y.P.
Y.P.
Y.P.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Min.
b/t= 32
b/t= 29
b/t= 28
b/t= 27
b/t= 26
b/t= 25
b/t= 23
b/t= 20
b/t= 19
1.7.88
1ii7
DE SI GN
b/t ratio of the cover plate and webs indicated above shal l not be greater
than the ratios shown for the following grades of steel :
36,000 psi., Y.P. Min. b/t =40
psi.,
psi.,
psi.,
psi.,
psi.,
psi.,
psi.,
Y.P. Min.
Y.P. Min.
Y.P. Min.
Y.P. Min.
Y.P. Min.
Y.P. Min.
Y.P. Min.
b/t =37
b/t =35
b/t =34
b/t =32
b/t =31
b/t =29
b/t =25
b/t 24
6000
the
b/t ratio of the perforated cover plates shall not be greater than the rat ios
shown for the follow ing grades of steel :
36,000 psi., Y.P. Min.
42,000 psi., Y.P. Min.
p9i., Y.P.
psi., Y.P.
psi., Y.P.
psi., Y.P.
psi., Yg.P.
b/t =48
b/t =44
b/t =42
158
J .7.89
STAY PLATES
RIBBED ARCHES
J .7.90 THICKNESS OF WEB PLATES, SOLID RIB ARCHES
The th ick ness ratio D/t of each web plate in sol id rib arches having
DE 5I GN
1.7.90
D/ t =
7200
The th redness ratio D/t of web plates in soft d rib arches eg u i pped
with longitud inal stiffeners, that is when the web is rein forced along its
axis with a longitud inal stiffener of am plc cross-sectional area and
rigid ity, sha II not be greater than twice the vaI u e obtai tied by use of the
above formula.
When the compress we stresses equal the lim i ting factor $' the
D/t ratio of the web plates shall not be greater than the ratios shown for
the follow in g grades of steel :
W ithout
Longit.
42,000
45,000 & 46,000
50,000
5fi,000
60,000
65,000
90,000
100,000
psi.,
psi .,
psi.,
psi.,
psi.,
psi.,
psi.,
psi.,
Y.P.
Y.P.
Y.P.
Y.P.
Y.P.
Y.P.
Y.P.
Y.P.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Min.
\\'ith
Lori git.
Stiffeners
Stiffeners
D/t= 57
D/t= 114
D/t=53
D/t= 51
D/t= 48
D/t 46
D/t =45
D/t= 42
D/t =36
D/t= 34
D/t i06
D/t 102
D/t= 96
D/t 92
D/t 90
D/t= 84
D/t 72
D/t= 68
J .7.93
to
BATTER
Bents, preferably, shall have a su the i ent spread at the base to prevent
uplift under the assumed lateral load ings. In general, the width of a bent
at its base shall be not less than one-third of its height.
J .7.94 BRACING
Towers shall be
both
an it
stiff members having either welded, high strength bolted or riveted connections. The sections of members of longitudinal braci rig in each panel
shall not be less than those of the members in correspond ing panels of the
transverse bracing.
The bracing of long col umns shall be designed to hx the column about
both axes at or near the same point.
Column splices shal I be at or close above the panel points of the
bracing.
able shoes with the structure un loaded, the coefficient of Inction being
assu med at 0.25. Provision for expansion of the tower bracing shal I be
made in the column bearings.
COMPOSITE GIRDERS
structu res sha 11 apply to structu re s utili zi rig composi te gi rders where such
specifications are applicable. Compos ite girders :ind slabs shall be designed
and the stresses computed by the composite moment of inertia method
and shall be consistent with the predetermined properties of the various
materials used.
The ratio of the modu li of elasticity of steel (29,000,000 psi) to those
of concrete of various design strengths shall be as follows :
I, un it ultimate compressive strength of concrete as determ ined by cylinder tests at the age of 28 days, psi.
n ratio of modulus of elasticity of steel to that of concrete. The val ue of n, as a function of the ultimate cylinder strength of concrete, shall be assumed as follows :
I, 2000-2400
n -15
-2500-2900
== 12
== 3000-3900
=10
4000-4900
=8
5000 or more
6
The effect of creep shall be considered in the design of composite
girders which have dead loads acting on the composite section. In such
structures, stresses and horizontal shears produced by dead loads acting
on the compost te section shall be computed for n as given above or for
this value multiplied by 3, whichever gives the higher stresses and shears.
D E SI GN
should be used with caution and provision must be made in the design to
accommodate the expansion.
neutral axis lies below the top surface of the steel beam. If concrete ie
on the tension s ide of the neutral axis, it shall not be cons idered in
computi ng women ts of i nertia or resisti rig moments except for deflection
calcu lations. Meehan ical anchorages shall be provided to tie the sections
together and to develop stresses on the plane join ing the concrete and the
steel.
The steel beams, especially if not supported by intermediate falsework shall be investigated for stab iI ity during the time the concrete is in
place and before it has hardened.
width shall not exceed one twe lfth of the span length of the girder, nor
cix times the th ickness of the slab, nor one-half the d istance center to
center of the next girder.
I .Z.99 STRESSES
Maximu in compressive and tensile strlSse9 in girders which are not
provided with temporary supports d uring the placing of the permanent
dead load, shall be the su in of the stresses produced by the dead loade acting on the steel girders alone and the stresses prod uced by the superimposed loads acting or the composite girder. When girders are provided
,'
with effective intermediate supports which are kept in place until the concrete ha9 attained 75 percent of its required 28-day strength, the dead and
live load stresses shall be computed on the basis of the composite section.
In continuous span9, the positive moment portion may be designed
with composite sections as in simple spana. Shear connectors shall be provided in the negative moment portion in which the reinforcement steel
embedded in the concrete is considered a part of the composite section. In
case the reinforcement steel embedded in the concrete is not used in com-
puting section properties for negative moments, ehear connectors need not
be provided in these portions of the spans, but add itional connectors
9hall be placed in the region of the point of dead load contraflexure in
accor ilance with Art. 1.7.100 (A) 3) . Shear connectors shall be provided
in accoi dance with At-ticle 1.7.100.
1.7.J 00 SHEAR
lAJ Horizontal Sheor
The maximum pitch of shear connectors shall not exceed 24 inches,
except over the interior supports of continuous beams where wider
spacing may be used to avoid placing connectors at locations of high
mate strength.
( 1)
Fotigue
* Reference ia made to the paper titled Fatigue Strength of Shear Connectors by Roger G.
5! 'ter an d Joh n W. Fisher in HI GHWAY RESEARCH RECORD, No. 147. nublished by the
Hi$h $y Rsearch Board. Washington , D .C.. 1966.
DE SIGN
1.7. 100
163
inertia provided by the steel beam including or excluding the area of reinforcement embedded in the concrete in negative moment regions.
Z,=Bw
the pitch may be mod ified to avoid placing the connectors at locations of h igh str esses in the tension flange provided that the total
number of connectors remains unchanged.
(2) Ulfim ote Strength
negative moment and the dead load points of cori traflexure shall
equal or exceed the number given by the formula :
HI GHWAY B RI DGE S
where
P,=A, F
Or
P =0.85 I, be
where A,= total area of the steel section including coverplates.
F, specified minimum yield point of the steel being used.
I,= compressive strength of concrete at age of 28 days.
b effective flange width given in Art. 1.7.99.
c thickness o:I the concrete slab.
is taken ae :
where A( = total area of longitudinal reinforcing steel at the interior support within the effective flange width.
F) specified minimum yield point of the reinf orcing steel.
The ultimate strength of the shear connecter is given as follows :
Channels :
5,, = 550 (h +t/2) w
:I',
where
DE SIGN
1.7.100
13 J
effective slab width, i.e., placed either side of this point or centered
about it.
J .7. J OJ DEFLECTION
The provisions of Article 1.7.12, in regard to deflections from live
Road plus impact also shall be applicable to composite girders.
When the girders are not provided with falsework or other effective
intermediate su pport durin g the placing of the concrete slab, the detection
due to the weight o:I the slab and other permanent dead loads added before
the concrete has attained 75 per cent of its reQuired 28-day strength shall
be computed on the basis of non-composite action.
applicable to box girders of single cell, having width center to center of top
steel flanges approximately equal to the distance center to center of adjacent top steel flanges of adjacent box girders. The cantilever overh arig of
the deck slab (including curbs and parapets) beyond the exterior web,
lfiG
adjacent top steel flanges of adjacent box girders, but in no case greater
than 6 :feet.
The provisions of Division I, Design, shall govern where applicable,
except as specifically modified by Articles 1.7.102 through 1.7.109.
by applying to the girder, the fraction W L f a wheel load (both :front and
0.1 + 1.7R +
0.85
N
N
where R=
Number o:I Box Girders
Ng = W,/12, reduced to the nearest whole number
are not used. R shall not be less than 0.5 nor greater than 1.5.
The provision of Article 1.2.9, Reduction in Load Intensity, shall not
apply in the design of box girders when using the design load Wp given
by the above equation.
The design shear Vp for a web shall be calculated using the follow-
ing equation :
167
DESIGN
In cases of simply supported epans, the bottom flange shall be considered completely effective in resisting bending if its width does not
exceed one-fif th ('s) the span length. If the flange plate width exceeds
one-fifth ( s) of the span, an amount equal to one-fifth ( k ) of the span
only shall be considered effective.
For continuous spans, the criteria above shall be applied to the
lengths between-points of contraflexure.
fBl Compression Flanges Unsti9ened
Unstiffened compression flanges designed for the basic allowable
FOt' greater b/t ratios, but not exceeding 60, the stress in an unstiffened bottom Pange shal I not exceed the value determined by the use
of the formula :
1 sin (/2)
13,300
7160
For val ues of b/t exceed ing 13,300/9 F,, the stress in the Pange
shall not exceed the value given by the formula :
The b/t ratio preferably should not exceed 60 except in areas of
low stress near points of dead load contraflexure.
sidered.
where
1H8
, ,.,
allowable stress of 0.55 F,, the ratio w/t shall not exceed the value given
by the :formula :
For greater values of w/t but not exceeding 6650 k/ QF, or 60,
whichever is less, the stress in the flange, including stiffeners, shall not
exceed the value determined by the formula:
For values of w/t exceeding 6650 \/lc/ F, but not exceeding 60,
the stress in the Pange, incl uding stiffeners, shall not exceed the value
given by the formula :
'b'14.4 k (t/w) 10
When longitudinal stiffeners are used, it is preferable to have at
least one transverse stiffener placed near the point of dead load contraflexure. The stiffener should have a size equal to that o:I a longitudi-
nal stiffener.
to be designed l'or the basic allowable design stresses of 0.55 F,. and the
I,=8 tw
The transverse stiffeners shall be proportioned so that the moment
of inertia o:I each stiffener about an axis through the centroid of the
I,=0.10 (n + 1) w
where A,= area of bottom flange including longi tud inal stiffeners
a spacing of transverse stiffeners
I,= maximum longitudinal bending stress in the flange o:I the
panels on either side of the transverse stiffened
E modulu.s of elasticity o:I steel
For the flange, including stiffeners, to be designed :for the basic
DESICN
1.7.105
169
allowable stress of 0.55 F,., the ratio w/t for the longitudinal stiffeners
shall not exceed the value given by the formula :
where k, =
For greater values of w/t, but not exceeding 6650
whichever is the less, the stress in the flange, including stiffeners, shall
not exceed the value determined by the formula :
6650
I = 14.4 k, I t/w 10
The maximu in val ue of the buckl ing coefficient k,, shall be 4. When
k , has its maximum v'alue, the transverse stiffeners shall have a spacing,
2b
where S, = section modulus of the transverse stiffener
The connection to each longitudinal s tiff ener shall be designed
resist the vertical force determined by the formula :
,
to
HIGHWAY
17O
BRIDGE S
17106
stresses due to the specified horizontal force and dead load of steel and
deck exceed 150 percent of the allowable design stress.
deck slab or in the steel box for form removal, inspection, maintenance,
drainage,
etc.
HYBRID GIRDERS
1.7.J J J 0 HYBRID GIRDERS, GENERAL
This section pertains to the design of (1 ) noncomposite girders that
have both flanges of the same minimum specified yield strength and a web
with a lower minimum specified yield strength, (2) composite girders
that have a tension flange with a higher minimum specified yield strength
than the web and a compression flange with a minimum specified yield
strength not less than that o:I the web and (3) girders that utilize an
orthotropic deck as the top flange and have a web with a lower minimum
specified yield strength than the bottom flange. It is applicable to both
simple and continuous span girders. In noncomposite girders and in the
negative moment portion of continuous span composite girders, the compression flange area shall be equal to the tension flange area or larger
than the tension flange area by an amount not exceeding 15 percent. In
composite girders, excluding the negatlve moment portion in continuous
span girders, the compression flange area shall be equal to or smaller
than the tension flange area. Steel girders that support the dead weight
of the slab without composite action, but act compositely with the slab in
171
DES IGN
1.7.110
girders.
In
J .7.1 J J
ALLOWABLE STRESSES
f AJ
Bending
The bending stress in the web may exceed the allowable stre9s for
the web steel provided that the stress in each flange does not exceed the
allowable sts-ess from Art. 1.7.1 or 1.7.3 for the steel in that flange
R= 1
(See Figures 1.7.111A and 1.7.111B)
where
n
the min imum specified yield strength of the web divided by the
minimum specified yield strength of the tension flange.
the area of the web divided by the area of the tension flange.
the distance from the outer edge of the tension flange " to the
I BJ
Sheor
The shear stress in the web (the shear force divided by the web
area) shall not exceed the allowable shear stress for the web steel.
Hybrid girders shall be designed for fatigue as i:I they were homo-
geneous girders of the flange steel. The allowable fatigue stresses :for
web sp1ic.s and for attachments to the web shall be based on the web
steel, except that stiff ener to web and flangeweb hllet weld connections
shall be based on the flange steel.
Bottom flange of orthotroii ie deck briclges.
172
7
.
75
70
I.5
Z.0
.5
5.0
3.5
FIGURE 1. 7. Ill A
75
I.5
Z.O
2.5
3.O
3.5
FIGURE I.7.III B
* Dottom flange of orthotrop ic deck: bri1ges.
1.7.112
DES IGN
1.7.1 J 2
SCOPE
J .7. J J 5
For heat-curved beams and girders, the horizontal radius of curvatui e measured to the centerline of the girder web shall not be less than
150 feet, and shall not be less than the larger of the values calcu lated
(at any and all cross sections th roughout the length of the girder)
7500 b
1.7.J 16
CAMBER
174
HI CiHWAY BRIDGE S
1.7.116
where a,,; is the camber in inches at any point along the span calculated
by us url procedures to compensate for ileflection due to dead loads or
any other specified loads, s,, is the maximum value of A D, in inches within
the span, E is the modulus of elasticity in ksi, F,. is the specified minimum
yield point in ksi of the girder flange, Y, is the distance from the neutral
axis to the extieme outer fiber in inches maximum distance for non
and L is the span length or distance between
points of dead-load contraflexu re in inches."
NOTATION
A = urea of cross section (1n.)
D = dead load
DES IGN
1.7.118
impact
moment of inertia (in.")
length of a compression member (in.)
L= live load
J .7.119
LOADS
highway
For design purposes, the service loads are taken as the dead, live
and impact loadings described in Section 1.2 (except Art. 1.2.4) .
Overloads are the live loads that can be allowed on a structure on
i nf requ ent occasions without c:iusing permanent damage. For design
1.7.120
DESIGN THEORY
through 1.7.138.
17ti
1.7.1?1
1.7.J 21
ASSUMPTIONS
(2) Stress in steel below the yield strength, F,., of the grade of
steel used shall be taken as 29,000,000 psi times the steel strain. For
strain greater than that corresponding to the yield strength, F ,,, the
stress shall be considered independent of strain and equal to the yield
strength, F,.. This assumption shall apply also to the longitudinal
reinforcement in the concrete floor slab in the rep=ion of negative
1.7.122
The design strength for steel shall be the specified minimum yield
point or yield strength, F,., of the steel used as set forth in Article 1.7.1.
1 .7.J 23
The maximum moments, shears or forces to be sustained by a stresscarrying steel member shall be computed from formulas listed below.
Members subject to combinations of loads and forces shall be designed for
the combined effects.
For all loadings less than //20, provision shall be made for an
in frequent heavy load by applying Group IA loading, with the live load
assumed to occupy a single lane without concurrent loading in any other
shall be used sit bsti tu ting E :for 11'. \\'hen ice pressure is taken into
account, the Group II loading shall be used substituting ICE for SF.
The symbols in the above formu las represent the moments, shears or
forces caused by the toads and effects described in Article 1.2.22.
1.7.124
J .7.1 24
lA J
177
DE SIGN
Sections
resist
lateral
sections
at-e
Koi-in plastic
as
hin ges
b/t
1600
sion flange,
12.124
8.4
70
37
68
7.8
65
34
69
7.5
62
33
56
7.2
59
31
54
6.8
67
30
51
Broced Non-Compocf
Sections
ing requirements :
DESIGN
1.7.124
When
M < M,,, b/t may be i nci eased by the ratio 9M,,/M
(b) Web thickness
D/t,,. 150
where II is the clear unsupported distance between flange com
ponents.
(ct
(e)
36,000
42,000
46,000
50,000
5b,0t00
9fl,00f1
100,000
b/t
Li,d
A,
11.6
10.7
10.3
9.8
9.4
7.?
7.0
556
476
4B5
400
B64
222
200
ICJ
Tronsition
Unbroced Sections
(1) For members not meeting the lateral bracing requirement of
Article 1.7.124 (B) (1 ) (c) the maximum strength shall be computed
as :
M,, F, S 1
When the ratio of stresses at the two ends of the braced length,
L ,, is less than 0.7, the maximum strength, M,, as computed by the
above formula may be increased 20 j but not to exceed F,.S.
Tronsversely
Sti9ened
Girders
( 1) For gii ders not meeting the shear requ moments of Articles
1.7.124 (A) (1) Ie ) and 1.7. 124 (B) 11) (e) transverse stiffeners are
requ ired for the web. For girders with transverse stiffeners but
without longitudinal stiffeners the thickness of the web shall meet
the requi rement :
92
8
6
6
122
1
36,000
42,000
46,000
50,000
55,000
50,000
100,000
where :
1.7,124
DESIGN
of the girders where the maximum shear force is less than the value
given by Article 1.7.124 ( B) 11) (e) .
The first stiffener space at the ends of girders with simple suyi-
d = 14,500 Dt,,./V
that
web
and
the
and
182
386
356
340
326
B11
36,000
42,000
46,000
50,000
55,000
248
231
100,000
90,000
(2) The maximum bending strength of longitudinally stiffened girdeis meeting the i equ i rements of Ai ticle 1.7. 124 ( F) ( 1) shall be computed
by Articles 1.'7.124 ( B ) or Ai ticle 1.7.124 (D) (1) as appli- cable, subject
to the requirement of Article 1.7.124 (E) (4) .
13) The shear capacity of girders with one longitud inal stiffener
shall be computed by Article 1.7. 124 (E) (3) .
The dimensi one of the longitudinal stiffener shall be such that :
( a) the width-tothickness ratio is not greater than that given
by At-ticle 1.7.124 (E) (5) .
(b) the rigidity of the stiffener is not less than :
where D is the total panel depth (clear distance between flange components) and S, is the section modulus of the longitudinal stiffener at
D/5.
J .7.125
fAl Generol
For be:inns and gi rde rs symmetrical about the vertical axis of the
cross section but unsymmetrical with respect to the horizontal centroidal ax is, the provisions of Articles 1.7.124 (A) through 1.7.124 (D)
shall be applicable except that in computing the maximum strength by
ArtiCl 1.7.124 (D) ( 1) the term b is replaced by 0.9b'.
1.7.125
DESIGN
(b) When D, exceeds D/2, the web thickness, I,., shall meet the
requirement :
are satisfied :
(a) The maximum strength of any section shall not be less than the
sum of the computed moments at that section multiplied by the
appropriate load factors.
(b) The web of the steel section shall be designed to carry the total
external shear and must satisfy the applicable provisions of
Articles 1.7.124 and 1.7.125. In such application the value of
D, shall be taken as the clear distance between the neutral axis
of the composite section for live loads and the compression
flange.
Compact Sections
where (A F,.) ;, is the product of area and yield point for bottom flange
of steel section (including cover plate if any) ,
(A F,. j ,, is the product of area and yield point for top flange of
steel section,
(A F,.) ,,. is the product of area and yield point :for web of steel
of
zero
com
'0.85f b
(c) when the compressive force in the slab is less than the value
given by Equation (2) abos'e the top portion of the steel
section will be subjected to the following compressive :force :
(d) The location of the neutral axis within the steel section
measured from the top of the steel section may be determined as follows :
DESIGN
1.7.127
moment of all :forces about the neutral axis, taking all forces
and moment arms as positive quantities.
(2) Composite beams quality as compact when their steel section
meets the requ irements of Articles 1.7.124 ( A) ( 1) (b) and 1.7.124
(A ( 1) ( e) , and the stress-strain d iagram of the steel exhibits a yield
pl:it eau followed by a strain hardening
range .
General
J .7.J 28
center-to -center
of
adjacent top steel flanges of adjacent box girders. The cantilever overhang of the deck slab, inclu ding curbs and parapet, shall be limited to
60 percent of the distance between the centers of adjacent top steel
flanges of adjacent box girders, but in no case greater than 6 feet.
IA J
Moximum
Strength
M,,= F ,S
1.7.12il
18B
Loterol
Distribution
The live load bending moment for each box girder shall be deter
mined in accordance with Article 1.7.103.
where V = one hal:I of the total vertical shear :force on one box girder,
0 = the angle of inclination of the web plate to the vertical.
The i ncli nation of the web plates to the vertical shall not exceed 1 to 4.
ID ) Tension Flonges
Compression
Flanges
2
in which c shall be taken as
1.7.129
DESIGN
187
(4) ID longitud inal stiffeners are used, they shat l be equally spaced
across the flange v idth and shall be proportioned so that the moment
I,=Qtw
where d 0.07k n' when n equals 2, 3, 4 or 5.
#= 0.125k when n =1.
w =width of Pange between longitudinal stiffeners or distance
ft-ore a web to the nearest longitudinal stiffener.
n = number of longitudinal sf iffeners.
k= buckling coefficient which shall not exceed 4.
For a longitu dinally stiffened flange designed for the yield stress
F ., the ratio w/t shall not exceed the value given by the :formula
For greater values of w/t, but not exceeding 6650 k/QF,., the
buckling stress of the Pange, including stiffeners is given by Article
1.7.129 (E ) (2) in which c shall be taken as :
For values o:I w/t exceeding 6650y'k/ F . the buckl ing stress o:I
the Pange, including sliffeners, is given by the formula :
\\'hen longitudinal stiffeners are used, it is preferable to have at
least one transverse stiffener placed near the point of dead load contraflexure. The stiffener should have a size equal to that of a longitudinal
stiffener.
J .7.J 30
IA I
SHEAR CONNECTORS
General
Design of
Connectors
The maximum pitch shall not exceed 24 inches except over the
interior supports of continuous beams where wider spacing may be
used to avoid placing connectors at locations of high stresses in the
tension flange.
DESIGN
1.7.132
Compact Sections
12 2Q
where
whlPt3 3 lS the distance :from the outer fiber of the tension flange to the
neutral axis divided by the depth o:I the steel section.
I CJ Unbroced Noncompoct Sections
The equation of Article 1.7.124 (D) (1) for the maximum strength
of unbraced noncompact sections shall be replaced by the expression
R
where the appropriate R is determined from (B) above.
IDJ Tronsversely Sti9ened Girders
The equation of Article 1.7.124 (E) (3) for the shear capacity of'
The maximum stren gth of the compos ite section shall be the moment
first yielding of the flanges times R (for unsymmeti-ical sections)
ft ore Article 1.7.132 ( B) , in which ji is the distance from the outer fibei
of the tension flange to the neutral axis of the transformed section divided
by the depth of the steel section.
Axiol Loading
( I ) /V\ci xi in u in Copcicif y
for
KL
where
K
L,
E9ecf we Le n9th
(b) For
members
having
ends
not
fully
supported
DESIGN
1.7.134
The combined maximum axial force P and the maximum bending moment M acting on a beam-column subjected to eccentric
loading shall satisfy the following equations :
M
where
F ,. is buckling stress as determined by the equations of Article
1.7.134 (A) ( 1)
M, is the maximum strength as determined by Articles 1.7.124
(A) (B) or ( D)
the Euler buckling stress in
the plane of bending,
G is the eq u ivalent moment factor, as defined below.
M,, F,.Z the :full plastic moment of the section,
Km
(2)
Eq u i vo I e n f /r\ore e n I FoCfor C
moment. The ratio a is positive when the two end moments act
in an opposing sense (i.e., one acts clockwise and the other acts
countei clockwise ) and negative when they act in the same sense.
In all cases, factor C may be taken conservatively as unify.
* B . G. Ioh nston , Guido to Design Crite ri a Ior Metal Com p session Members , John Wiley and
Sons, In '., New York , ltlfifi.
Connectors
General
1 2 I Wet ds
The ultimate strength oJ weld metal in groove welds
equal to or greater than that of the base metal. The
shall be
ultimate
strength of the weld metal in fillet welds need not match the
strength of the base metal. However, the welding procedure and
weld metal shall be selected to insure sound welds. The effective
weld area shall be taken as dehned in Article 1.7.28.
(3)
Bo I ts o n d Rivefs
High-strength bolts preferably shall be used for fasteners subj ect to tension or combined shear and tension.
Strength ( gF )
1.00 F,
0.45 :f.
Type of Fastener
Groove Weld '
27 ksi
2 ksi
Shear
Power-Driven Rivets
ASTM A502
Shear Grade 1
Shear Grade 2
26 ksi
30 ksi
High-Strength Bolts
ASTM A 325
Tension "
Shear ( Bearing-Type) " "
76 ksi
54 ksi
( 1 ) F
yield point of con necteil inaterial.
( 2 ) F minimum strength pf the wet ding rod metal but not greater than the
tensile strength of: the connected p:irts.
( 3 ) When a shear j1ane i ntersects the bolt threads, th roll urea shall be used.
( 4 ) Bearing
stresses
in
bearing-tyne
connections
shall
not
exceeil
the
tensile
D E S I GN
(4)
Friction
Joints
the
l B J Connections
( I )
Sp I ices
o:I the
splice
Bolts Sub|ecfed
to
Prying Action
by Con nected
by
Porfs
means
o:I direct
tension shall be proportioned :for the sum of the external load and
tension resulting :f rom prying action produced by deformiition of
the connected parts. The total tension should not exceed the values
given in Table 3 of Article 1.7.135.
The tension due to prying actions shall be computed as :
Bb
8a
20
where
Q = the prying :force per bolt (taken as zero when negative) ,
T the direct tension per bolt due to external load,
a distance :f rom center o:I bolt to edge of plate,
H HH\VAY BPIDGE 5
1.7.13
When the thickness o:I the connection web is less than that
given by the above formula, the web shall be strengthened by
d iagonal stiffeners or by a reinforcing plate in contact vv'ith the
1.7.136 OVERLOAD
iA J Noncomposite Beoms
For noncomposite beams the moment caused by D
(L -l- I)
shall not exceed 0.8 F,.S. For such beams designed :for Group IA
loading, the moment caused by D +2.2 (L + I) shall not exceed 0.8
F,S. In the
DESICN
1.7.16
(L + I) shall
(L + I) in friction-type
high-strength bolted joints shall not exceed 21,000 psi for ASTM
325 bolts.
For combined shear and tension in frictiontype joints where
applied forces reduce the total clamping force on the friction plane, the
maximum shear stress shall not exceed the values obt:iined from the
following equations :
For A325 bolts
1,.= 21,000 [1 f,/0.53F,)
where F,, is the tensile strength of the bolt,
I, is the applied tensile stress.
J .7. J 37 FATIGUE
IA) General
The analysis of the pr obability of fatigue of steel members or
connections under working loads and the allowable fatigue stresses,
F,., shall conform to Article 1.7.3, except that Ihe limitati on imposed
by the ba9ic design criteria given in Articles 1.7. 1 :iiid 1.7.2, shall not
apply.
IBJ
Composite
Construction
Sh eo r Con necfors
The shear connectors shall be designed for fatigue in accordance with .4rticle 1.7.100 (A) .
1.7.137
IC J
DEFLECTION
ORTHOTROPIC-DECK BRIDGES
J .7.J 39
This section perta ins to the design of steel bridges that utilize a
stiffened steel plate as a deck. Usually the deck plate is stiffened by
longitu din:il ribs an d transverse beams ; effective widths of deck plate
act as the top flan ges of these ribs and beims. Usually the deck, including
ton gitudin al ribs, acts as the top flange of the main box or plate girders.
As used in Articles 1.7.139 through 1.7.148, the terms, rib and beam,
refer to sections that include an effective width of deck plate.
The provisions of Division I, Design, shall govern where applicable,
except as spec ifical ly modified by Articles 1.7.139 through 1.7.148.
An appropi-iate method of elastic analys is, such as the
equivalent
J .7. J 40
The wheel loads specified in Article 1.2.5 shall be un if ormly distributed to the deck plate over the rectangular area defined bclow :
Wheel Load,
kip
Width
Perpendicular
to Traffic, inch
Length
in D irection
of Traffic, inch
inches.
1.7.141
i'he effective wid th of deck plate acting as the top flange o:I a
longitudinal rib or a transvei-se beam may be calculated by accepted
approximate methods.*
IBJ
Cirders
The full width of deck plate may be cons idered effective in acting
as the top flange of the girders if the effective span of the girders is
not less than : ( 1) 5 times the maximum distance between girder wCbS
:ind (2) 10 times the maximum distance from edge of the deck to the
nearest girder web. The effective span shall be taken as the actual
span for simple spans and the distance between points of contraflexure
for continuous spans. Alternatively, the effective width
may be
determined by accepted analytical method s-.
The effective width of the bottom flange of a box girder shall be
Ribs
The total bending stres-ses in longitudinal ribs due to a combination of ( 1) bending of the rib and, (2) bending o:I the girders may
exceed the allowab le bending stresses in At-ticles 1.7.1 and 1.7.3 by
25 percent. The bending stress due to each of the two individual modes
shall not exceed the allowable bending stresses in Articles 1.7.1 and
1.7.3.
Desipn Mann:it for O rthotrop ie Steel Plate Deck B ricIg:es, AIS C, 196 3 o r O rth ct nip ie
B riclges , Theory and D osign, by M.S. T re its ky, Lincoln Arc Well ing Fo un da I ie n , 196 i.
-1000
where
L= distance between transverse beams
r= rad ius of gyration about the horizontal centroi dat axls Of the rib
including an effective width of deck plate
F = maximum compressive stress (in psi) in the deck plate as a result
of the deck acting as the top flange of the girders ; this stress
shall be taken as positive
F,. yield strength of rib material in psi
J .7. J 45 DIAPHRAGMS
D iaphragms, cross f r:trees, or other means shall be provided at each
support to transmit lateral forces to the bear in gs and to resist transverse
DESIGN
1.7.14?
J .7.J 46
STIFFNESS REQUIREMENTS
IAJ Deflections
The deflections of ribs, beams, and girders due to live load plus
impact may exceed the limit:it ions in At-ticle 1.7.12, but preferably shall
not exceed i of their span. The calculation of the deflections shall be
consistent with the analysis used to calculate the stresses.
To prevent excessive deterioration of the wearing surface, the
deflection of the deck plate due to the specified wheel load plus 30 percent impact preferably shall be less than Tiu of the distance between
webs of ribs. The stiffening effect of the wearing surface shall not be
included in calculating the deflection of the deck plate.
I Bl
Vibretiens
1.8.1
design in accordance with Art. 1.8,2, except that such thickness shall be
increased i n accordance with Art. 1.8.4 to provide for corros ion or abrasion
unless there i9 evidence that corros ion or abrasion is not likely to occur.
Corrugated metal pipe composed o:I a smooth liner and corrugated
sheI I attached integrally at seams spaced not more than 30 inches apart
may be designed in accordance with Article 1.8.2 on the same basis as a
st:indard corrugated metal pipe having the same corrugations as the shell
and a vv eight per foot equal to the sum of' the weights per :foot of liner
and corru gated shell. This shall be limited to a maximum pipe diameter
of 84 inches, the thickness of the corrugated shell shall be at least 60 %
of the total thickness of shell and liner, and the specified backfill compac
tion shall be a minimum of 85 o of standard density. Where corrosion or
abrasion are anticipated, thickness of shell and liner shall be increased in
accordance with Article 1.8.4 or suitable coatings shall be specified.
Riveted
Continuous Welded
Spot Welded
AASHO M 196
Helical Underdrai n
Culvert
Steel
AASHO M 36
AASHO M 197
Specification
Pending
AASHO M 56
AASHO M 197 or
AASHO M 36
AA SHO M 211
AASHO M 36
tion9 are
Bolted
Aluminum
AASHO M 219
Steel
AASHO M 167
(6x2 Corrugations)
Noth ing inclu ded in this section shall be interpreted its prohibiting
the use of new develop me nts vv'here usefulness can be substantiated.
I .8.2 DESI GN
Four criteria must be considered in the structural design of a flexible
buried conduit. Each considers the mu tual function of the metal ring
and the soil envelope surround ing it ; interaction of these two materials
produces a composite structure.
The criteria are :
For 3 x 1 cor r ugatio us an equal n umber of / ;5 ASTM A 326 bolts may be subst it uted
Ior rivete.
18.2
LE SIGN
(C) Fail ure of the Cond uit Wall
(D) Deflection or Flattening
fA J
Seom Strength
T=(LL+DL)x
FF =D/E I
where
values :
2 'Z and
2 s x "e corrugation FF =4.3 10
3 1 corrugation FF =3.3 10'
6 2 corr ugation FF =2.0 10
For aluminum conduits, FF should generally not exceed the following values :
2 K and
2/s x'Z corrugation FF =9.5 10
9 2'/ corrugation FF =2.5 10
I CJ Failure of the Conduit Woil
Failure of the wall by wall crushing may occur if the wall flexibility is low (regardless of the quality of backfill) . Failure of the wall
202
TABLE 1.8.2
Minimum Lon9itudinnl Seem Strengths Ultimate strength in kips
per foot)
3 x 1 Corrugated
Steel Pipe
Thickness
Single
Rivets
Double
Rivets *
Thicknes s
Double
Rivete
0.064
16.7
21.6
0.064
28.7
0.079
0.109
0.138
0.168
18.2
29.8
0.079
23.4
46.8
0.109
24.5
49.0
0.138
25.6
51.3
0.168
6 2 Structural Plate Steel Pipe
Thickness
0.109
0.138
0.168
0.188
0.218
0.249
0.280
4 Bolts/ft
42.0
6 Bolts/it
62.0
81.0
93.0
112.0
132.0
144.0
180
194
9 2'/e Structural Plata
Aluminum Pipe
Aluminum Pipe
Aluminum
Thickness
0.060
0.075
0.105
0.135
0.164
35.7
53.0
63.7
70.7
Single
Rivets
Double
Rivet9
9.0
9.0
15.6
16.2
16.8
14.0
18.0
31.5
33.0
34.0
Bolts
5/s Bolts
Thickness
per :ft
0.09
0.10
0.125
0.15
0.175
0.20
0.225
0.250
22.2
26.4
34.8
44.4
52.8
Steel
Bolts
5/s Bolts
per ft
6 .
66.
72.
by elastic buckling may occur if the wall flexibility is high and the backfill is comp ressible (poorly consolidated) . Interaction of these two failure cond it ions, crushing and buckling, may develop in a zone between
h igh and low wall flexibi lity.
It is assu med that a flexible condu it in a soil-structure interac-
tions system does not I:tit at a specific stress defined by bending, since
DESIGN
1.8.2
203
the cond u it in yielding may transfer more of its load to the surrounding
soil.
For diameters less than D, where
24E
r
D =
k
zone is
f ,,
kD
48E
r
D =
24E
buckling zone is
12E
kD
where I,= minimum tensile strength, psi
I,= critical stress, psi, not to exceed the yield strength
k soil stiffness factor
X-D, EI +0.061 ER
where X = horizontal deflection of the pipe, in.
D, = deflection lag factor
HICiH\\'AY BPII1G ?
1.82
1.8.3
CHEMICAL AND MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
IAJ ALUMINUM Corrugated Metol Pipe ond Pipe-orch
Chemical AASH O M 196 (ASTM C478) an d M 197
Mechan ical
Th ickRS9,
Minimum
Tensi Ie
Min imum
Yield
psi
psi
Strength
in.
0.051 I 0.113
0.114 to 0.249
EIon gation
24,000
24,000
4*
Qo
31,000
31,000
IBJ ALUMINUM
Minimum
Strength
in 2 inches
Mod. of:
Elast.
psi
10 10
10 X 10
Chemical AASHO
Mechanical
Minimum
Tensile
Strength
psi
0.09 0 to 0. 175
0.175 to 0.250
,
IC) STEEL
35,500
34,000
Corrugated
Metol
Min imurri
Yield
Strength
psi
Min imum
Eto npati on
in 2 inches
Mod. of
Elast.
psi
28,000
26,000
6 9p
8 9p
10x 10
10 10
Pipe
ond
Pipe-orch
Chemical AASHO M 36
Mechanical
Minimum
Tensile
Strength,
psi
4 5,000
Min imum
Yield
Strcn gth,
psi
Min imum
Elongat ion
in 2 inches
Mod. of
Elast.
psi
29 x 10
DESIGN
( D I STEEL
Strucf urol
Plote
Pipe ond
Pipe-orch
42,000
Minimum
Yield
Strength,
Minimum
Elongation
in 2 inches
Mod. of
28,000
30 o
29 10
Elast.
psi
The mechanical properties shown above are for the flat material
prior to corru gating. A certificate of compliance shall be requ ired from
the manuf:acturer.
1.8.4
1.8.5
Rivets I:or corrugated sections and bolts for structural plate sections
shall conform with the following :
Aluminum Corrugated Section :
Rivets-Aluminum, ASTM B 316, Alloy 6053-T4
Aluminum Structural Plates :
treatment
plates or
pipe
shall be anchored to the headwall with not less than /i inch anchor bolts at
not more than 19 inch centers. Steel bolts for structural plate sections
shall be torqued during installation to a minimum of 100 it-lbs. and a
maximum of 300 ft-lbs. Aluminum bolts for structural plate sections shall
be torqued during installation to a minimum o1 100 ft-lbs., and a maximum
of: 150 ft-lbs. For power driven tools, the holdon period may vary from
2 to 5 seconds.
Bolts shall be of sufficient length to provide for a full nut.
1.8.6
MULTIPLE STRUCTURES
k 0.44, soil stiffness coefficient for good side fiI I material compacted
99
Maximum deflection :
5 percent of nominal diameter below circular shape
Safety factors used :
Longitudinal test seam strength 4.0
Pipe wall buckling
2.0
For pipe-arch structures placed on a stable foundation, the confining
backfill must be capable of supporting a corner pressure of 2 tons per
square :foot. Marginally stable or compress i ble foundations requ ire special investigation. Fill heights exceeding 100 feet shall be used only after
a thorough investigation of the foundation material.
1.9.4
DE SIGN
Section i0
TIMBER STRUCTURES
The allowable unit stresses given in Table 1.10.1 are for normal
duration of loading for stress grade9 of sawn lumber used under continuously dry conditions as in most covered structu res. For other service conditions, the following modification shall apply. For lumber used
above the fiber saturation point, as when continuou sly submerged, the
allowable unit stresses in Table 1.10. 1 in compression parallel to the
grain shall be reduced 10 percent, in compression perpendicular to the
grain shall be reduced one-third, and the values for the modulu9 Of
elasticity shall be reiluced one-eleventh.
( 1) Use of stress grades in flexure :
Allowable unit stresses in flexure for Iout and Plank gradee
apply to material with the load appl red to either the narrow or wide
face.
Allowable unit stresses in flexure for Beam and Stringer
grades apply only to material with the load applied to the narrow
I ace.
Beam grades ordinarily are graded for use on simple spans.
When used as a cont in uous beam the grad ing provisions cueto man ly appl ied to the middle thi rd of the length of simple spane
shall be applied to the middle two-thirds of the length of pieces to
be used over double spans and to the entire length of pieces to be
for long term loading conditions (greater than ten years either con-
UE SIGN
209
of elasticity.
IEJ Allowoble Unit Stresses for Wind, Eorfhquoke or Short Time Loading
When the duration of the full maximum load does not exceed the
as
3V
2bd
Where
I,.= h orizontal shear stress in pounds per square inch
b= width of beam in inches
d = depth of beam in inches
V= vert ical shear in pou n de
E
w.n
uses
( s ingle )
Reppeti-
Tension
n ara11e1
to, gra|n
Fi
Horizontal
sheair
F,
member
uses
Comp session
p arallel
top g ai
Mod ulus
of
e1astic,itv
E
Grading
N;
N.
No. 3
c Structural
N.e
N 2
o
uny vnIth
2300
1860
146
)70
1400
800
1oAA
800
450
100
80
80
421
426
425
l(D
1
700
1oAA
1Ao
z(
)
450
600
1,400, 0 0 0
1, 40 0, 00 0
26
1,100000
1850
IG 0 0
1450
125 0
Lumber
I n spectres
Bu rcau an I
As so ciati o n
]85
385
4?5
,
,
Produts "
456
386
385
West Coast
,
,
1250
10?0
neered
T errs ion
narallel
to grain
F i
Ccren iession
nernendicular
to grain
uses
( sinele )
F c _|_
1900
1600
1550
ch
Comn ress in n
; arallel
to grain
45 5
385
385
455
386
1400
14 0 0
120 0
85
1,600.000
1201
1,800,0 0 0
1,800, 00 0
2000
1660
Decking
Modulus
of
elastic ity
E
85
Posts an d
Timbers
Selected Deck inP
Comme rci at Deck in g
Deecki n
Selectel Decking
Comme rci at Deck ing
Decking
14 0 0
120 0
180 0
( Stresses a pnlY at
15 "/, moistu re
con ten I)
OOO
1,900, 0 0 0
1,'? 00, 0 0 0
Grading
rules
agency
80
1400
?70
Posts and
Timbers
8?6
80
80
Decking
EAST E RN SPRUCE ( S url a ced d ry- o r surf acel p reen. Used at TO 9 max . rn. c. )
NO.2
2[o 4thick
100
TO.
2 tO 4 thitk
1100
I:3eIect
Commerc rat
Deck i up
No. 3
-" to 4 ,vide
625
)TD
3B6
05
66
255
253
'?00
426
1,200,000
1,100,000
7o0
1 , 4 0 0, 0 00
1,?00, 0 00
(S(resscs apply nt
246
245
246
25
57 5
l,Z00,000
24
-4?
2 to 4 thick
C an I vv rder
'
Association
I see I oot n ot c s
70
Beams an d
Str inpers
70
Beams and
S tringe re
e t Structural
Pus(s nd
N/
N.
1,40 0,00 0
1,4 0 0,0 0 0
1,40 0, 0 0 0
1,400, 0 0 0
1600
1300
1,40 0, 0 0 0
Deck ing:
1,600,000
1,50 0, 00 0
( Stresses ap p ip at
1,4 00, 00 0
Decking
1 , 4 0 0, 00 0
1.4 0 0, 00 0
Beams an d
Syringe rs
1,400,000
Timbers
Lumber
Inc p ection hui-.
1,400, 0 0 9
1,40 0, 0 0 0
Selected Decking
Commercial Decki rig
Selected De ck ing
Commercial Decki up
245
800
97
Decking
243
126 0
86 0
1|3 0 0 !0 0 0
2 through 11 )
Si ze
class i ficat in n
uses
2P 0
280
Select
M o1u1u.s
of
elastic ity
E
( sec :footnotes
? th rough iI )
800
1,4 0 0,000
1, 3 00, 00 0
Deck i rig
PONDER OSA PINESUGAR PINE (Ponderosa Fiuc-Lodgero!e Pinc) (SufuccJ Jry or sufated qruen. UsnJ at 1O/ rnn. nn. c)
Selects it Deck rug
Com me rci at D ecki n q
Decking
P roluc ts
A see nation
Deckng
content)
1100
1150
7O
2 80
2 80
280
Posts an1
Timbers
1000
800
2 P0
2 80
Lumber
I n sp action Bit r.
280
14 6 0
West Coast
280
4'
to 4 xv i1e
No. 2 I\ted rum G iiin
TO
1G00
1850
TO 6 0
Extreme 5berin
bending Fs
E ng i -
neered
uses
( single)
2 to 4 thick
2 to 4 wide
tive-
member
uses
170 0
825
ctural
Dense
N.: 2
No. 2 Melium ;:rain
d 2 Den se
Ne
No. 3 Dense
180(I
6 and wider
860
Dense Stiuctura1 86
Den se Structural 72
2 to 4 thick
Select Dex
Commerc ia1 Dex
Deck in g
Deckin g
Decking
90
475
1150
1,700,000
550
90
475
700
1 500 000
1400
1000
1200
700
90
90
90
75
47?
405
475
346
1650
1260
1450
900
1900000
1800 000
1,900,000
1,400,000
976
90
47s
1w
650
750
1,400,000
1,500,000
'825
so
4o/
1000
1160
1000
1160
1,600,000
1,700,000
1,600,000
1,700,000
2050
1700
1,900,000
1,900,000
976
826
975
2 to 4 th ick
2 to 4 wide
2 to 4 thick
6 an d wide r
1000
476
EU
'728
rules
a gen cv
Repeti-
75
90
90
90
90
346
475
476
405
475
1'ioo'ooo
1450
1200
1050
West Coast
Lumber
Inspection B ur.
1400
1200
1250
1, 100,00 0
1, 00 0, 0 00
216
1.10.2
H IG HWAY BRIDGE S
FO O TNO T ES F O R TAB LE 1.10.I
Values for Fo, Ft ,' ' n d F for the grades of Const i u ction and Stan da ref air ii I y only
Th c values in T:ib1e 1.10. 1 are based on ed pewiso use. For th men s ion 2 " to 4 in th i ck ness .
wh en usel Al atw i so, th e rccommen led design values No r hber stress in ben d in y in ay be muJ tiplie1
2"
n
4 Click device in
n
Et rom e fi bcr i n
Len I in 3 Ft
a u
Tension
p ara11e1
to grai n
Ft
maximum
n
Hori zonIat
shy air
control
d s
Comn reset on
pcrpen1icuI ar
in grain
..y
.
Com n ression
par a1Ie1
to g rat n
.. y ..
Mo1ulus
of
Elasti city
. ;.,
1. I7
1.08
W hen 2 to 4 thick lumber is des igncl for use v'Ec re the mon ture content will exceeil 19
ii crcen I for an exten Ic1 jerioI of time, tLie values shown i n Table 1. 10, 1 should be multipl ie1
Tension
perpeuJiculai
0.8 G
J
'
i arallel
to grain
F
of
El asti city
E'
0.7 0
0.84
When lumber 5 and thicker is 1esigne1 for use where the mci sturc content will excec1 1 fi
iiercent for an exten ded reriod of time. the values shown in T:ib1e 1.10. I shou11 be mu1ti;1iel
Ex Irem e ft be r in
hen li n f: Fi
I . 00
Tension
1.0 0
1.0 0
0. 07
The I:ib u1atol hon zon ta1 s hear v al ues s frown he rein a re ba sett n the con se rv atis'e :issum i tion of the most severe checks , shaken or srlits ross ible, as if ii I an c were si1it full len gth .
When I urnbe r 4 an it thi n ner is man uf act urecl un Lea soncd the tabul atel values s houlrt be in tuft i1ic1
21.7
DESIGN
M uJtinlY tobtlteJ
"F" value Ly :
1.67
rerommvndc4 drsi& vn!ues shvvvn for Se|urt StrsrturaL No. t, No. 2 swJ Mn. 3 sradrs as shw
'' When MC IS" Decking is usef where the misturc content will exceed 15 pcrcenL fui in
cxtendcJ pencil of time, the dcsien 'oIue tahuloteI to npply at 15 petent mulsLurc content.
shoulI be mltipl ict by the following tnctnis . Extiemc Fiber in DenJing F'i.-0.?9; Mclulus nT
Elnsticitx
E"-0.92.
National Lumber Grades A utbority is the Ganalian rules-writine gcncy responsible for
preia ration, main tenance and ihssem i nation of a uniform softwooil lumbei- c ral ing rule to r :ill
Curvoture Foctor
in wh ich
1 2000 It/R
and UR shou Id not exceed 1/125 for Douglas fii-, larch and California redwood and 1/100 foi- Southern pine.
I,,=3M/2Rbd
TABLE 1.10.1A
Allov able Unit Stresses for Structural Glued Laminated Timber, Members Stressed Principally in Bending, Loaded Perpendicular to the \\'ide Face of the Laminations ' ' '
( S tresses she w n belov' are to r normal con di tions of macho g.
DRYGONDITIONSOFUSEE 1900O00
24F
4-10
11-20
21-26
26-35
36-40
41 ormore
2400
2400
2400
2400
24 00
2400
1600
1600
1600
1600
16 00
1600
1500
1500
1500
1600
HO0
1300
16 00
$
16 0
16 0O
$60 0
1600
1500
1500
450
460
450
450
4? CI
460
385
3811
385
38S
385
38h
450
450
450
410
410
410
410
410
410
165
165
165
166
165
16f
4-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
4l orm0re
22F
.6:.
1600
1600
1600
1600
$o
.
1300
1300
1300
1300
J0$
1100
1100
1100
1100
:.:
305
306
305
305
:60
260
260
260
260
14G
14G
145
145
145
24F
ip ag$
comNnations a
Fn eraII
:.bl:arom allba
g available and the de signer sFioul d check on availabili ty prior to sp ecif y ing.
aato
1300
13 0 0
145
1100
TABLE 1.10.1A
12)
( contd)
Southei-n P i ne
l8F
6 or more '
14 or more
1,800,000 ;I
1800
1800
1600
1600
J6I10
1500
385
386
2000
2009
1600
1600
1500
1500
385
886
2200
2200
1600
1600
1500
1600
450
?86
200
200
Note : The 2 6 F combination may ri ct be read ilp av enable arid th c den gner shou1'1 checlc on av a ilab i l i ty p nor to sweetly ing.
listed are z en erally av at table I rom all lam in ators.
1500
1600
1500
6
WET CONDITIONS OF USE E
1,6 0 0,000 1
260
:
12 or mor
6 or' more
14 or more
18 or more
2?F
1600
1C00
1300
1300
1100
1100
81
8
00
260
4 or in ore
24i'
Not e : The 2tiF c om1i nation may- not be rea1il' a x-at table an d the les i gne i shoulil check on v-ailab ili I' p nor to sr cert y my.
I rated are j en e ra11 ' av'uila11o I rom all I amin ators.
2
14 or more
1100
260
DESIGN
FOOTNOTES FOE iADLE :.(0.:A
The tebulateil stresses in thie table nre irimarily apiil icable to members st i-essetl in bcniline
member's ereter thiin I Z inches in dpth. the rciui remepts of Article 1.Ip.2 on Size factor a1uli'.
compression members. tension mcm
The ending i Ist ri ctiott:: us cotit:iined in A ITC 30tZ2, 30 124 en I 'ltl 1Zfi tension lam i nation
req\Jirements shnll he follov'J For the outermost tension laminutions representing ?,7 cf thn
thtal rlcTth of glued lnminrtel bcnling members 1 f inches or more in Ipth. J' rr oil nlitins
f ' A ITC 30122 to np9l itabli: to combination 22F , A lIC 3(I I-24 is ppl textile to combi nation
letn i 1s of these tension lam mutton requ i remen is.
rerallel to grain and romprcesion jiirallel to gruin can be met-eased to i s00 psi :ind i see pei
rmrrcUve!r for thv Jry cowJiflow of use und to 1500 psi sd t2J0 psi cpectivo|y fvr the wrt
tonJitiow vf use.
h i her
b
n
u
D
( 1)
1
2
AH
AH
1200
1800
3
5
AH
AH
2400
2600
u
a
Ar c
n
.
P
.
.
r
S
h
DRY CONDITION S OF U SE E
P n p
b
n b
145
2200
2300
2600
1,6 0 0, 0 00 1 I
260
950
1700
2000
1960
2300
410
450
260
220 0
2 6 09
240 0
26 0 0
n
St
I , 80 0, 0 0 0 is i
1400
1800
Southern Pme
tr
145
( 2)
120
120
1,80 0, 00 0 ; 1
1100
1800
2100
2400
2600
165
145
223
DESIGN
FO O TNO TES FOR TABLE 1.10.1B
' The tab ulated stresses i n th is table are p rim at'iI v nnli cable to members I carted ax iaI Iz o r
parallel to the wide face , of the ,lam i nat ions. For combi nations anl stro?s s arjlic:ible to mem-
baminat
n$,see Tab
al
n
due to a to.id Pj1ie1 periendicular to the wide fiice of the
.a A--"
" T h c tab idatcd etress es a re ai;l i cable to members conta in i rig th ree (3) oi mo re lam i n at ions.
'T lie ta bulated stresses arc ap iI i cable to members conta inin q four ( 4 ) or more tannin ation s .
For bearin gs of less than 6 inches in length and not nearer than
3 inches to the end of a member, the maximum allowable load per
square inch is obtained by in ul tip lying the allowable un i I stresses in
com press ion perpen d ie u far to grain by the following f actor :
/_
. . . . . . . . 1.75
1'?
6or
more
1.88
1.25
1.19
1.13
1.10
1.00
In using the preced ing formu la and table for rou nd washers or
bearing areas, use a length equ at to the diameter.
ID I Simple Solid Column Design
I'hese formulas to r simple solid col umns are based on pin-end
conditions b ut shal l be appl red also to squ are-end cond i t ions.
Allowable unit sti esses in pounds per square inch of cross-sectional
area of simple solid columns shall be determined by the :following
form ula, but s uch unit stresses shall not exceed the tabular values for
compression parallel to grain, F ,, as provided in Article 1.10.1 and
ad.) usted in accordance with the applicable provisions of Al-tiCle 1.10.1
where F
G .?0E
F,.
For an assembly of members having a lesser l /d ratio, the ind i v idu ml members are den pried as simple soI id colu runs. Spaced columns
are elasn fied as to fix i ty, i.e., cond it ion c r couch ti on 6, which
introduces a mul I ipl y ing factor a pplicab Ie in the lesign of its ind iv id ual in embers. ( See F i gu re I . 10,2
For individual members of a spaced colu run, /d shall not exceed
80, nor shall .,/d exceed 40. (See Figure 1.10.2) .
The ind iv idu ml members in a spaced colu in n on con ordered to act
together to carry the total column load. Each member is des i gned
separately on the basis of its l /d ratio.
A greater l/d ratio than ml lowed for simple solid colu runs is perm i tterl beeau se of the end fixi ty developed by the connect or s and end
blocks. Th is fixity is effective only in the th ickness di rect ion. The I 'd
ratio in the il irect ion of width is subject to the proh'isi on s for st mple
solid col um ns.
When a s in gle spacer block is I ocated with in the middle I on th cat
the column leng th I l I , connectors are not requ i red for th i s block. If
t here are two or more spacer blocks, conn ectors are iQU i red and the
distance between two adjacent blocks shal l not exceed one-half the
distance between centers of con nectors in the end b locks.
F"or spaced colu mm used as com preset on members of a tru ss, a
panel point wh ich is s ta5'ed lateral ly shall be cons icl e red a> the end of
the spaced colu run, and the portion of the web members, between the
ind ivid ual pi eces maki n g up a spaced col u run, may be con s idered as the
end blocks.
If there are two or more con nectors i n a contact face, the center of
grav ity of the grou p shal I be u sed in measu ring the d is tance I rom connectors in the end bl ock to the end of the colu run for dete rant n i n g fixi t j'
eonditi on a or b. (Figure 1.10.24 .
Th ickness of spacer and end blocks shall not be ten than that of
ind iv id ual members of the spaced colu run, nor sha 11 th redness, w idth,
and length of spacer and end blocks be less than requ ired for connectors
DESIGN
1.10.2
of a size and n umber capable of carrying the load compu ted in accordance w ith Article 1.10.2 I I ) . Blocks th ieker than a side member do not
appreciably increase load capac ity.
The total at lowal1e Road for a spaced colu run is the sum of the
allowable loads for- each of its ind ividual members. Allowable unit
stresses shal l be determ i ned as f oJlows, b u I the max i run in u n it stress
0.75E
(l/d)
For condition b, the al lowable load for the individ ua1 members
of a spaced colu run in which the connectors in en d blocks are placed
a distance of l/20 to l /10 from the ends and the blocks extend to the
ends of the col umn shall be determined by the formula :
0.90E
(l/d)
The
total
load
capacity determined
by the
forego i n g
procedu re
shou ld be checked against the su in of the load capacities of the ind ivid ual members taken as s i nip Ie solid colu runs with out regard to fixity,
using their greater d and the I between the lateral supports which provide restraint in a d irection paral lel to the greater d.
The values for F,., as above defei-mined, are subject to the dui ation o:I load adJ ustments as provided in Article 1.10.1.
I FJ Sole Lood on Round Columns
The s ate load on a round column shall not Pxceed that permitted
for a square column of the same cross-sectional area, or as determined
by the torrent a :
3.619E
The values for F',. determined by the formula may not exceed the
values for compress ion parallel to the grain, F',., adjusted for service
conditions and duration of load in accordance with Article 1.10.1. The
allowable unit stress values as determined from the :formula are subject to the duration of loading adjustments as given in Articles 1.10. 1
(D) and 1.10.1 (E) .
In determin ing the least di minsi on, d, for tapered columns, the
diameter of a round column or the least dimension of a rectangular
column, tapered at one or both ends, is taken as the sum of the mini
mum diameter or least dimension and onethird the difference between
the minimum and maximum diameters or lesser and greater dimensions.
IG J
Notched Beoms
R=
R= maximu in end load
F,
b breadth of beam
d= depth of beam above the notch
h -total depth of beam
IH I Bearing on Inclined Surfaces
P sin + Q cos O
N unit bearing on an inclined surface
1.10.2
DESIGN
I II Size Fuctor
When the depth of a rectangu lar beam exceeds 12 inches, the
tabu lated unit stress in bending F,,, shall be reduced by mu ltiplying the
tabulated stress by the size factor, C;., as determined from the following rel at ionsh ip
where C,. size factor
d = depth of member in inches
The size factor relationship as given above is appl icab Ie to a bending member satisfying the following basic a.ssumptions : fa) simply
supported beam, (b) uniformly distributed load, and (c) span to
depth ratio (P/d) of 21. This factor can thus be applied u ith reasonable accuracy to most commonly encoun tered design situ at ions.
Where greater accii racy is desired for other sizes and conditions of
loading, the percentage changes given in the following table may be
applied directly to the size factor calculated for the basic conditions
as previou sly stated. Stiaight line i nterpolati on may be used for other
9/d ratios.
Span to
Depth Ratio
P/d
Loading Condition
for Simply
Change
Supported Beams
Change
+2.3
1.6
Center Point
Third Point
-B 2
14
24
+78
For more detailed analysis of the size factor tnd its appl ication to
the design of bending members, the designer is referred to the AITC
Timber Construction Manu al. The red uction in bending stresses
for
228
Value of'
Effective Length, 9,,'
1.10.2
DE SIGN
where F , = tabulai- al lowable unit stress in bending, psi
040E
1. 10. 2
JOI NED
J .10.3 GENERAL
All wood used in timber structures shall be prese rvat ivel y treated
as provided in D wisi on I I, Section 21, unless otherv'ise spec ified.
I . I O.4 8OLTS
Bolts shall be spaced center to center not closer than 4 times the
bolt diameter. The d istance f rom the center of a bolt to the end of
any timbPr shall be not less than 7 times the bolt diameter if loaded in
tension parallel to grain, nor 4 times the bolt diameter if loaded in compiessi on parallel to the gram or in tension oi- compression perpen dicular to
the grain. For parallel to gi=ain loading in tension or compres- sion, the
distance from any edge of the timber to the center of the nearest bolt
shal l be at least 1/_ times the bolt diameter, except that 1or
/'/d ratios moi e than 6, use one-half the distance between rows of bolts.
For perpend ie u lar to grain loading, the ed ge distance toward which the
load is acting shall be at least 4 times the bolt diameter and the edge
distance on the opposite edge shall be at least 1/e bolt diameters.
1 . J 0.5 WASHERS
A washer shall be used u irder all bolt heads and nu ts wh ich wou Id
otherwise come in contact with wood. Eit her cast or plate washers may
wood when the bob Is at e tightened. For bolts or rods in tension, washers
shal I be su flicient size to develop the tension stress in the bolt or rod
without exceeding the allowable unit stress in compress ion perpen dicular
to grain for the species and grade of l umber used.
A standard circu lar washer shall be used u nder the heads of all lag
screws.
DESIGN
tud inally. In general, pi Ie bents shall contain not less than four piles
each and the outside piles, preferably, shall be battered. The piles shall
be designed for safe bearing and for column action.
I BI Fromed Benfs
Framed bents may be supported on piles, concrete pedestal >
- or mud
Bracing
Singlestory bracing shall not exceed 20 feet in height. The min i -
mum size of tran sverse sway braces shal l be 3 by 8 inches. All bracing
i ntershall be bol ted th rough the piles, posts or caps at the ends
shall be provided in ad dition to bolts. The bolts used shal l be not less
than /s-inch d iameter.
IFI Pile Bent Abutments
Pile ben I abu tments shall be adequ ately braced or anchored to resist earth press ure. Bulkhead plank shall be not less than 3 inches
thick. II shall be fastened to the pi les wi th spi kev, the length cif wh ich
1 .J O.9 TRUSSES
I Al
timber members, preferably, shall be provided with meta I end bear i rigs.
loints involving end bearing on inclined surfaces sha 11 be avoided,
prefe rance be i rig g iven to squ are-cut ends of timbers bearing against
blocks.
Floor Beoms
Flor beams shall be sized at bearing points. In floor beams composed of two or more timbers, th o timbers preferably shall be separated
by at least 2 inches for air circulation. Floor beams shall be connected
to the main truss members by means of rods or structural shapes.
IC J
Hongers
Hangers generally shall be rods having upset ends with a suitably
designed washer or bearing plate at each end. Upset ends shall conform to the requirements specified for Structural Steel Design, Division I.
ID J Eyebars ond Counters
The requirements specified for Structural Steel Dest gn, Division I,
for counters, eyebars an d eyebar packing shall apply to s uch members
when used in timber trusses.
IEI
Bracing
DESIGN
headroom. Outrigger brackets connected to extensions of the Poor
beams shall be used for bracing through-trussses having headroom
insufficient for a top lateral system.
RFI
Comber
Camber, in addition to that required to provide for dead load and
Nailing Strips
When timber floors are supported by steel joists, the joists shall be
provided with nailing strips which shall be bolted either to the top
flanges or the webs.
When nat ling strips are bolted to the flanges, they shall be used
on all joists. They shall be not less than 4 inches deep and shall be
wider than the supporting flange. They shall be secured with '/ -inch
bolts through the flan ges, spaced not more than 4 feet apart and not
more than 18 inches from the ends of the strips.
Nailing strips bolted to the webs shall be not less than 4 inches
thick and shall be fastened with bolts spaced not farther apart than 5
feet. They shal I be held e lear of the flanges by blocks between the web
and strip, and bolted throu gh the web with /s inch bolts sJiaced not
more than 4 feet apart and not more than IP inches from the ends
of the strips.
IDI
Flooring
Retaining
Pieces
Reta in ing p wees, where requ ired, shal I be rot less than 6 inches in
width. In general, they shall be secured in place by ?s-inch bolts at 3foot intervals and spiked at 1foot i ntorvals.
I FJ Wheel Guords
Wheel guards having a cross section of not less th an 4 by 6 inches
shall be provided on each side of the roadway. The gua rd timbers shall
be in lengths of not less than 12 feet. They shil l be secured with /sinch bolts at the end an cl at in termed rate points not moie than 4 feet
apart.
In str ip floors or cambered tloors, not prov ided wi th retain ing
pieces, the wheel puards sha 11 be placed d irectly on the flooring with
scu pper holes at su itable i nterva ls. In other floors the wheel guards
sh all be su ppo rted by scu pper blocks not loss than 4 inches th ick an d 1
foot long, held in place by sp ikes and a bolt th rough the wheel guard
and flooring, and spaced n ct more than 4 feet center to center.
IG J
Droinoge
AdeQu te prov is ion shall be made for the proper d ra i nage of I imber
floors.
IH I Railings
Wood railings shall consist of not less than 2 horizontal lines of
rails. Rails, rail posts and has ten in gs shall be designed for the load9
specified in Article 1.1.9 Rail ings.
P ref eiably, rat ls shall be .s u rfaced
st des
1 54 5' )
and
pa in ted.
least 5 feet and horizontally at least to the ends of the caps. A fire stop
between the joists shou Id be located over each curtain.
Section lJ
DE SIGN
ing under a special permit shal I take into account the type of material
from which the member is made and the physical condition of the
member. For structural elements for which p!ans are available and the
for
vehicles
carrying
J .J J .4 STRESS ANALYSIS
For the load under consideration, the stress analysis used shall be
in conform a rice wi th the provi sions of Division I, except that a more
reasonable distribution may be assumed for vehicles of unusual width
or wheels of unusual size such as those used in the construction industry.
J .J J .S ALLOWABLE STRESSES
No modification in allowable stresses for the appropriate material
and those hereinafter given shall be made except as provided in Article
1.11.1.
be assumed to be 29,000,000 psi and the coefficient o:I linear expans ion 0.0000065 per degree Fahrenheit.
Carbon
Steel
Silicon
steel
Nickel
M-94 ( 1961)
M-95 ( 1961)
M-96 ( 1961)
A7 ( 1967 )
A94 ( 1966)
A8 ( 1961)
60,000
33,000
steel
18,000
of
rod led
shapes,
bending,
0.55 F,
20
g reater than :
24,000
132
M-96
M-94
Compression in concentrically loaded columns (2)
Riveted ends
1.25
.55F,
Pinned ends
20,000-0.46
L ' 20,000-0.61
L
24,000 -0.86 L'-
F,
15,000-0.32
1.25 l
140
14,000
contact
Stress in extreme fiber of pins
36,000
26,000
32,000
44,000
40,000
Shear in pins .
16,000
18,000
Se Article 1.7.4
22,000
238
I length, in inches, of unsup ported II ange betvs'een lateral connections, knee braces or other
points of sup port. F'or con Iinuous beams and girders, I may be taken as the dista rice
Irom interior sup port to point of dead load contraPex ure if th is distan ce is tess than that
designated above.
For cantilever beams and g irders, I may be taken as twice the distan ce from the su pport to
the end of the cantilever if th is distance is less than designated above.
r
radius of g y ra tion, in in ches of a tee section comp need of the comp reset on Pange plus onesixth of the web area, about the cx is in the plane of the web :
for welded girders ( r)_ b/l2
12 ) Comi session in con centri cally loaded columns havin a valuee not greater then stovpn
in a;y be com puted Irom these an prox inn ate formulae, or Irom the more exact formulae given in
L- len gth of member, in i n ches
r least radius of ay ration of member, in in ches
For comp session members v'ith values of greater than those shoxs'n or of known eccentri city,
see Apiendix G. The factor of safetY to be used when using Ap pendix C is 1.76, 1.80 and 1.83
for M 9 4, M 95 an d M9 6 steels Yes p ectivel y.
( 3 ) The effecti ve bearing area of a p in sh all be its I i awe Ie r mull i plt d b 9 th+ th i Ok bus of
the metal on which it bers.
( 4 ) Number in pren thee js represents the last year these siecifi cations were p rinted.
(j) y;j shnfl ppp]y p p]pj pp@ } |jrfly in ax{sfly ]onded rnernbcrs suuh as truss rnem5PrS
a nd cable :idjus ting links. It shall not aj pl ' to p in s uset i n members havi ng rotation
ex; an s ion o r it effect ion.
crime it be
1.12.2
DE SIGN
Shape :factor (the area of the loaded face divided by the side
area free to bulge)
circular bearings
2t
The size of the elastomeric pad shall be euch that both surfaces are in
stress, the hardness o:I the elastomer and the shape factor. The compressive deflection of each layei is the product of the strain and the thickness of the layer. The total deflection o:I the bearing is the sum of the
perature, hardness of the elastomer and average shearing unit stress. The
shear deflection of a bearing is the product of the shear strain and the
total effective elastomer thickness. These relationships may be taken from
existing test reports, but for large bearings or groups of standard designs,
they shall preferably be verified by tests of the particular designs involved.
Bearings shall have built in taper when nonparallel load sur:faces
would otherwise produce a compressive deflection of .06 T under dead load.
Such taper shall be limited to'/8 ]3er foot.
To insure stability the following limits shall be observed :
Plain BearingsMinimum L or R ST
Minimum W
=5 T
=2 T
The total of the positive and negative movements caused by anticipated temperature change shall not exceed .5 T.
The average u nit pressure on elastomeric bearings shall not exceed
800 psi under a combination of dead load plus l we load, not including im-
pact. The average un it pressure due to dead load only shall not exceed
500 psi. When dead load plus live load upli(t reduce the average pressure
to less than 200 psi the bearing shall be secured against horizontal crawling prefe rably by positive attachment to the top surface or to the top and
bottom su rf aces. When secured to the top and bottom surfaces the bearing may be subject to momentary light tension.
Th e initial conip res swe dePecti on i n a plai n bearing or in any layer
of a lam i riated bearing, under dead load plu s live load, not including impact
shall not exceed .07 t. The detection can be determined from a plot showing the rel at ionsh ip of Shape Factor, load and the durometer hardness
of the elastomer under cen.>i deration. These curves are generally a ar!able from manu factu rers for their product.
1 .13.2 LOADS
External load on a circulai- tunnel liner made up of tunnel liner
plates may be predicted by various methods including actual tests. In
cases where more precise methods of analys- is are not employed, the
external load P can be predicted by the following :
1. ID the grouting pressure is greater than the computed externiil
load, the external load P on the tunnel liner shall be the grouting
pressu re.
2. In general the external load can be computed by the formula
DF'SIGN
Where : P the external load on the tunnel liner ;
P;= the vertical load at the level of: the top of the tunnel
4
375
5
2Ii0
6
190
7
140
8
110
9
90
10
75
H is the height of soil fill above the top of the tunnel liner.
Values o:I P; may be calculated using Marstons formula for load
or any other s u itable method.
In the absence of adequate borings and soil tests, the full overfill
height should be the basis for P; in the tunnel liner plate design.
The following is one form of Marstons formula :
Where : P,, = C,WD
242
HI GH WAY BRIDGE 5
J .13.3 DESIGN
The Iollowing criteria must be considered in the design o:I liner
plates :
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
I oini strength
Handling and installation strength
Critical buckling of liner plate wall
Deflection or flattening of tunnel section.
thrust developed from the total load supported by the liner plate. This
thrust, T, in pounds per lineal foot is T =PD/2
Ultimate strength,
kips/f t
0.075
0.105
0.135
2 Flange
20.0
30.0
47.0
0.179
62.O
54.0
0.239
0.313
0.375
92.0
81.0
115.0
119.0
0.164
55.0
0.209
87.0
4 Flange
26.0
43.0
50.0
67.0
DE SIGN
1.13.6
J .13.6
243
12E in psi
kD
\Vhere :
24E
f A
Where T thrust per lineal foot from Article 1.13.4
A = cross section area of l iner plrite, sq. in. per :foot.
FS = factor of safety for buckling
J .J 3.7
DEFLECTION OR FLATTENING
Chemical Composifion
Base metal shall
to ASTM A 569
244
4-Flanged
2-Flanged Plate
Gross
Required Moment
of Inertia
Thickness
Section
Area
0.031-0.035
0.0360.040
0.041-0.04
0.046-0.050
0.051 -0.055
0.056-0.0G0
0.061-0.065
0.06 6-0.070
0.071-0.075
0.076-0.080
0.081-0.085
0.0 860.090
0.091-0.095
0.096-0.100
0.1010.105
0.106-0. 110
0.111-0. 115
0.116-0. 120
0.1210. 125
0. 126-0. 130
0.13 1-0.135
0.13G-0. 140
\ .J 3.10
Cross
Thickness
Section
Area
in.
in.
in.
in.
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.135
0.135
0.164
0.134
0.134
0.134
0.172
0.172
0.209
0.075
0.105
0.105
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.096
0.135
0.135
0.174
0.174
0.174
0.164
0.209
0.164
0.213
0.164
0.209
0.164
0.179
0.227
0250
0250
0818
0.81B
03IB
0888
0209
0209
0235
0272
0272
0B12
0.313
0.313
0.313
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.388
0.388
0.388
0.461
0.461
0.461
0.461
0.239
0.239
0.312
0.312
0.209
0.209
0.250
0.264
0.264
0.313
0.164
0.213
0.179
0.179
0.209
0.213
0.233
0.233
0.272
COATINGS
means
when
recluired
for
resistance to
1.13.1 J
BOLTS
Bolts and nuts used with lapped seams shall be not less than ?s inch
in diameter. The bolts shall conform to the specifications of ASTM A
449 for plate th rednesses equal to or greater than 0.209 inches and A 307
for plate thickness less than 0.209 inches. The nut shall conform to
ASTM Designation A 563, Grde C.
Bolts and nuts used
ID inch in diameter for
and not ten than is inch
bolts and n uts shall be
ASTM Specificttions A
J .J 3.1 2
SAFETY
FACTORS
Division
II
CO NSTR U CTIO N
Section i EXCAVATION AND FILL
2.1. J GENERAL
Foundation excav t ion shal I include the removal of all material, of
whatever nature, necessary for the construction of to undat ions and
substructures in accordance with the pl:ins or as directed by the Engineer.
It shall incl ude the furn ish ing of all necessary eq u ipmcnt and the con
struction of all cribs, coff erdams, ca is sons, u nwaterin g, etc., wh ich may
be necessary for the execution of the work. It shall also include the s ubseq u ent removal of cofferdams and cribs and the pl acement of
all
necessary
backfi ll as hereinaf ter spec i fied. It shall also include the disposing of
excavated mate r rat, wh ich is not requ ired for backfi 11, in a manner and
in locations so as not to affect the carrying capac ity of the channel and
not to be unsigh tly.
C ompensat ion for a 11 clearing and grubbing contained within the
bridge site shall, u nless otherwise specified i n the contract, be incl uded
in the un i I price or prices bid for another item or other items. The bridge
site is defined as the entire area between the righ I of way lines and between lines parallel ing the bridge ends and passing through the longitud inal extrem i ties of the su bsf ructu re or su per structure, wh ichever is
greater, u nless a greater length is necessary for the requ i red construction
of the bridge, or unless othe rw i s. specified in the contract.
A ll substructures, where practicable, shal l be constructed in open
excavation and, where necessary, the excavation shal l be shored, braced
or protected by coff erdams in acco rdance with approved metho1s. When
footings can be placed in the d ry without the use of cribs or cofferdams,
backforms may be omitted with the approval of the Engineer and the
enti re excavation filled wi th concrete to the reQu ired e1ex'ation of the
top of the foot ing. The add i tional concrete requ ired shall be placed at
the expense of the Contractor.
2. J .2 PRESERVATION OF CHANNEL
Unless othervv ise spec ified, no excavat ion shall be made outside of
ca i ssons, cribs, cofferdams, steel piling or sheeti rig, and the natural
stream bed adjacent to the structu re shall not be disturbed without permission from the Engineer. If any excavation or dredging is made at
the site of the structure before caisson s, cribs or coffe rdams are sunk
or are in place, the Contractor shall, without extra charge, at:ter the foundation base is in place, backfill all such excavation to the original ground
surface or river bed with material satisfactory to the Engineer. Material
deposited with in the stream area from foun dation or other excavation
or from the filling of coffe rdams shall be removed and the stream area
l'reed from obstruction thereby.
248
HI GH WAY B RIDGE S
.+
shal I be cone i dered as approx i mate only and the en gi neer may order, in
and the fi nal removal of the foundation materixl to grade sh:ill not be
made u nti l j ust before the masonry is to be placed.
Generol
C off erdams and cribs for to u n d at ion construction shall be carried
to ad eQUate de the and her ghts, be safely des igned ind constr ucted, and
be made as water-tight as is necessa r j' for the proper performance of
the wo rk wh ich must be done in side them. In general, the interior
d imens ions of eofferda ins and cribs shall be such as to give suffic ient
clearance I or the const ructi o n of forms and the i n spect i on of ther r
exterio rs, and to perm it pu mping outs ido of the forms. Coff erdams or
cribs wh ich are tilted or moved late rally du ri rig the process of s inking
shall be righted, reset or enlarged so as to provide the necessary clearance and th is sha 11 be :it the sole expense of the contracto r.
When cond i tions are encou ntored which, in the opinion of the
engineer, render it impracticable to u nwater the to undation before
placin g mason ry, he may reju me the con sI ruction of a concrete foundation seal of such d ime ns ions as may be necessa ry. The ton ndation shall
then be pumped out and the balance of the masonry placed in the dry.
When weigh ted cribs are employed and the wei ght is utilized to partially overcome the hyd rostatic pressure acting agar net the bottom of
the fou ndation seal, special an th o rage such as dowels or keys shall be
prov ided to transf:er the entire weight of the crib into the f ou ndation
seal. During the placin g of a You n dation seal, the elevation of the
water ins ide the coff erdam shall be control led to prevent any flow
th rough the seal and if the coff e rda m is to remain in place, i I shall be
vented or ported at low water level.
IBJ
or bracing
shall be left in coffe rdams or cribs in s uch a way as to extend i nto the
substructu re mason ry, w ithout written perm ission from the engi neer.
2. 1. 5
CONSTRUCTION
I CI
Drowings Required
For su bstructure work, the Con tractor shall submit, ripon request,
drawings showing h is proposed method of coffe rdam constr uction and
other details left open to h is choice or not fully shown on the engineers
I DJ
Removol
Unless otherw isc provided, cofferdams or cribs with all sheeting
and bracing shall be removed after the completion of the substructure,
care being taken not to distu rb or otherwise inj ure the finished masonry.
2.J .6 PUMPING
Pumping I rom the interior of any You ndation enclosure shall be
done in such manner as to preclude the possibility of the movement of
water through any I resh concrete. No pump in g will be permitted d uring
the placing of concrete or for a period of at least 24 hours the reaftcr,
unless it be done from a s u it able sump separated from the concrete work
by a water-tight wall or other effective means.
Pu mping to unwater a sealed coff e rdam shal I not commence u ntil
the seal has set s ufficiently to withstand the hydrostatic pressure.
2.1.7 INSPECTION
After each excavation is completed the Contractor shall noti:fy the
Engineer, and no masoni-y shall be placed until the Engineer has :ipproved
the depth o:I the excavation and the character of the foundation material.
2. J .8 BACK-FILL
All material usei for back-fil I shall be of a quality acceptable to the
or
other
extraneous material.
All spaces excavated and not occupied by abutments, pier's, or other
permanent work shall be refilled with earth up to the surface of the surrounding ground, with a s uffic rent allowance for settlement. All back-fill
shall be thoroughly compacted and, in general, its top surface shall be
neatly graded.
The fill behind abutments and w i ng walls of all bridge structures
shall be depos ited in well-compacted, horizontal layers not to exceed 12
inches in thickness. The back-fill in front of such un its shall be placed
first to prevent the poss ibility of forward movement. Special precautions
shall be taken to prevent any wed ging action against the masonry, and
the s!ope bounding the excavation for abu tments and wing walls shall be
destroyed by stepping or roughen ing to prevent wedge action. Jetting
of the fill behind abutments and wing walls will not be permitted.
Fill placed arou nd culverts and piers shall be deposi ted on both
eides to approximately the same elevation at the same time.
Adequate provision shall be made for the thorough drainage of all
back-filling. French drains shall be placed at weep holes.
HIGHWAY BRIDGE S
218
be
carefu fly
placed in
excavated shall be paid for as extra work unless a price for extra backfill
i s included in the contract.
The yardage to be paid for shali be the actua l nu in ber of cu bic yards
in original position, of material acceptabl y excavated in conform ity with
the plans or as directed by the Engineer, but no yardage shall be included
in the meas uremen I for payment wh ich is outside of a volume bou rided
by vertical planes 18 inches outside of and para llel to th e neat l ines of
the footing. The cross-sectional area measured shall not include water or
other l iQu ids, bu t shall include mu d, muck and other similar sew i -solids.
The top an d bottom l init ts of computed volume shall be the on ginal
grou nd or the top of the requ i red grading cross secti on, whichever is
lower, and the bottom of the completed footing.
2.1.12
CONSTRUC'I'ION
foun d at ions below the elevation s shown on the plans, the excavation fir
the first th ree feet of add it ion i l depth wi 11 be incl uded in the quantity
for wh ich payment wi 11 be made u nder the item Foun dation Excavation.
Excavation below this add it ional depth will be paid for as extra work,
unless the Contractor is willing to accept payment at conti act prices.
Secfion 2
SHEET PILES
2.2. J GENERAL
Th i s speci fication covers only sheet pil ing shown on
the plans, or
(ASTM A 328) .
the Speci fixation for 5tr u ctu rat Steel, AA SHO M-1 b3 ( ASTM A36) .
Excovof ion
I n gen ct al, pi let shall not be d riven u ntil after the excavation is
complete. Any material frree1 up betw'een the piles sh all be removed
to correct eleviti on w ith out cost to the State before
masci nry
for
the
Cups
The heads of all cone re te piles, an d the heads of timber p i1es, when
the natu re of the d i'iv i in is s u ch as to u nd uly i n j ure them, shall be
protected b caps of app roved den gn, prefer ably hav i n a rope or othe r
CONSTRUCTION
against
I D I Poinfing
Timber piles shal l be poin ted where soil cond it ions requ ire it.
When necessary, the pi les shall be shod with metal shoes of a design
sat is:factory to the Engineer, the points of the piles being carefully
shaped to secure an even rind uniform bearing on the shoes.
IEJ
Splicing Piles
Unless otherwise provided, concrete piles, precast, or shel ls for cast-inplace piles, shall be driven w ith a steam hammer which shall develop an
energy per blow at each fu 11 stroke of the piston, of not less than one f ootpou nd for each pound of weight driven. In no case shall the total energy
developed by the hammer be less than 6,000 foot-pounds per blow.
If a gravity hammer is used, it shall have a weight not less than 50
per cent of the weight of the pile, b ut in no case less than 3,000 pounds ;
and the d rop of the hammer shall not exceed 8 feet.
H I GH WAY
IDJ
Additional
2.3.4
BRIDGE S
Equipment
hammer complying w ith the above minimum requ irements, the Contractor shall provide It heavier hammer, or resort to jetting at his own
expense.
I EA
Leods
driving.
Except where p iles are driven through water, the leads, prefe rably, shall
be of suffic i ent len gth so that the u se of a follower w ill not be necessary.
Preferably, inclined lead s shall be used in driv in g battered piles.
(FJ
Followers
The driving of pil ing w ith Iollowe r s shall be avoided if p racti cable
and shall be done only under written permission of the Engineer. When
followers are used, one pile from each group of 10 shall be a long pile
driven without a hollower, and shall be u sed as a test pile to determine
the average bean ng power of the group.
G 1 Writer Jets
When water j ets are used, the n u mber of jets and the
volu me
and
Accurocy of
Driving
Piles 8 hall be driven w ith it van ation of not more than "i inch per
foot from the vertical or from the better .shown on the plans, except
that pi let f c r tres tle bents shall be so dr iven that the cap in ay be placed
PILES
n ot
subject
2.3.5
C ON STRUC TI ON
OF BEARING VALUES
( See of so Article
1 .4.4 )
IAI
Loading Tests
When requ ired, the size and nu mber of piles shall be determ ined by
act ual loading tests. In general, these tests shall consist of the appi ication of a test load placed upon a su itable platform s upported by the
pi Ie, with su itable apparatus for accurately measuring the test load and
the settlement of the pi Ie under each increment of load.
In lie u thereof hydraulic jacks with su itable yokes and pressure
gauges may be used.
The safe allowable load shall be considered as 50 per cent of that
load which, after a continuous appl ication of 48 hours, prod uces a permanent settlement not greater than i inch measured at the top of the
pile. Th is maximum settlement shall not be i ncreased by a continu ous
application of the test load for a period of 60 hours or longer.
At least one pile for each group of 100 piles preferably should be
tested.
IBI
Timber
Pile
Formulas
When not d riveri to pract ical refusal, the bearing val ues of piles
preferably shall be determ tried by load tests as specified above. In the
absence of load ing tests or su bstant rated adequate pile form ulas, the
9af e bearing values for timber piles- shall be determined by the following formulas :
2WH
for gravity hammers,
s=o.i
where
'
driven to the bearing value giv en on the plans or in the supple mental
spec i fixation s. If bearing /alues are not given, timber piling shall be
d riven to a min imum value of twenty tons.
In case water Jets are used in con nect ion with the d riving, the
bearing capacity ehall be determined by the above formulas from the
resu Its of driving at ter the jets hive been withdrawn, or a load test
may be applied.
ICI
safe
bearing
OONSTRUGTION
surface of treated piles and cant-hooks, dogs or pikepoles shall not be
u sed. Cuts or breaks in the surface of treated piling shall be given three
brush coats of hot creosote oil of approved qual ity and hot creosote oil
shall be pou red into all bolt holes.
2.3.1 O CUTTIT'J G OFF TIMBER PILES
General
Cliiss of Concrete
Form Work
Forms :for precast concrete piles shall con:form to the general
requirements for concrete form work as provided in Art. 2.4.19.
Forms shall be accessi bIe for tamping and consolidation of the concrete.
Under good weather curing conditions side forms may be removed at
any time not less than 24 hours after placing the concrete, but the entire
pile shall remain supported for at least seven days and shall not be subjected to any handling stress until the concrete has set for at least 21
daye and for a longer period in cold weather, the additional time to be
Reinforcement
258
I El
Costing
overfil led, the su rplus concrete screeded off, and the top su i Iaces
finished to a u n iform, even texture s imilar to that produced by the
forms.
iFI
Finish
Trestle piling exposed to view shall be finished above the ground
line in accordance with the prov i st ons govern ing the fin ishin g of concrete columns. Foundation pil ing, that portion of the trestle piling
wh ich will be below the ground surface, and piles for use in sea water
or alkali soils shall not be fin ished except by pointing as above set forth.
I G1
Curin9
Concrete piles sha!1 be cu red as prov ided e!sewhere in these specifications for concrete. As soon as the piles have set su fficiently they shall
be removed f rom the forms and piled in a curing pile separated from
each other by wood spacing blocks. No pi le shal I be driven until it has
set for at least 21 days an d,
in
longer
period as
General
each shell th rou ghout its entire le ngth. Any i nip rope rl y driven , broken
or otherwi se defective she 11 shall be corrected to the sati sfaction o:I the
Engineer, by removal and replacement, or the driving of an additional
pi Ie, at no extra cost to the State.
CONSTRUCTION
IC J
Closs of Concrete
Class A or A IAE) concrete shall be used for cast-in-place piles.
I D I Reinforcement
I BJ Mef hoJ A
foot.
For furnish ing and driving piles at the contract price per linear
The total cutoff of piling shall be paid for at the prices set
forth by the State in the special prov ision for th.so of the following items incorporated in the work :
Cutoff, untreated timber piles, per linear foot
Cutoff, treated timber piles, per l in ear foot
G utoff, precast concrete piles, per linear foot
Cutoff, steel shells for piles, per linear foot
Gu toff, steel piles, per pound
(?)
ber of linear feet of cutoff to be paid for shall be the actual n umber
of Iin ear feet cu t off, except that no allowance will be made for
lengths in excess of those ordered by the Engineer, and except that
if the Contractor masts concrete piles fu 11 length of the reinforce
ment bars to tacit itate d riving, no payment will be made for that
portion v here concrete must be removed in order that bars may
project as shown on the plans. II paid for as cu toff, cutoff mate
rial ( i f the cutoff is in excess of 3 feet in length ) shall become the
property of the State. Cu toff material 3 feet or less in length, and
other cutoff material which, in the opinion of the Err gineer, is not
worth salvaging shall be di sposed of to the sati sfacti on of the
Engineer.
13 )
Payment for I urn ish ing and driving piles shall include the
mate ria1 and work specified u nder Payment I or Furn ishing P iles
and Payment for Driving P ilesMethod B.
ICI
Method B
For turn ishing pi les at the contract price per linear foot.
driv ing piles at the contract price per l in ear foot.
For
( I ) Fu rnish ing
are driven and which have been Iu rn i sh ed in acco rdance with the
material which, in the opinion of the E ngineer, is not worth salvaging, shall be disposed of to the sati9:faction o:I the Engineer.
The number of linear feet of cast-in-place piles to be paid for
sha 11 be the actual n umber of l in ear feet of piles remaining in the
completed structu re. The len gth measured shall include both the
steel shell and the reinforced concrete extension as measured from
the point of the tip of the pile to the bottom of the cap or bottom
of t)ie footing, as the case may be.
CON STRUC'TION
2.3.18
(2)
D rivi ng
as measured from the point of the tip of the pile to the bottom of
the cap or bottom of the footing, as the case may be.
(3)
for furnishing the pit ing and all material requ ired therefor ready
for placement, including all material nocessa ry for extens ions and
bu ild -u ps and for completion of the pile, and for ill labor, tools,
hau liRg, 9Q u i pment, handling, treatment and all work i nc idental to
the c on struction of the piling prior to driv in g or cont truction of
bu ild-u ps and extens ions. Payment shall also include I a) reinforcement in concrete piles re;u ired to extend beyond the end of
the pile for connecti on s ; (b) the fitting and attach ing of steel shoes
when they are specified for timber piles ; (c) the I urnish ing and
attachrrient of brackets, lugs, core stoppers and cap plates on steel
pi ling.
( d I Payment for Drivi ng Piles
Payment for driving piles per linear foot shall include full
compensation for I urn ish in g all labor, tools, materials, su pplies,
eqn ipmont and other n ecessa ry or
met dental
costs
of
handling,
Additionol
Requirements
If the length of wood piles, steel piles or steel pile shells designated by the Engineer is not sufhcient, the splicing, including labor,
equ ipment and materi at, shall be paid for on the basis of extra work
unless a contract item is provided to cover the payment.
Brackets, plates or other reinforcement on steel pit es requ ired by'
the Engineer in addition to those shown on the plans will be paid for as
extra work.
If not covered by a contract item, metal shoes for piling, ordered by
the Engineer, will be paid :for at cost delivered to the site, plus 15
per cent.
No additional allowance, or adjustment, will be made in the con-
tract prices for Iu rni sh i ng or driv in g pi ling because of these addr tion at
requ i rements.
Section 4
CONCRETE MASONRY
2.4.1 GENERAL
2.4.2 MATERIALS
\AJ
Cement
( \ )
Po rt I o n d Ce men t
Type IA.
Type
Type
Type
Type
CONSTRUC TION
2.4.2
Type IV.
Type V.
quired.
For use when high sulfate resistance is required.
NOTE : Atten tion is called to the fact that cements conformi rig to
the requ i remen ts to r ty pcs I V a n d V a re n ct u s uaI ly ca r rted i n stock.
I n ad va rice of s pecif y i rig their use j u rch ase rs o r ther r rep rosenta tiv:s should dete ran i n e
made av aiJabJe.
can
be,
Porflo nd
BI ost - Furnoce
Slog
Cement
Mo son ry Cement
It ofuro I Cemen I
5 o in plin g o nd Tesfin g
test.
13 I
Ad mixtures
Adm ixtures in concrete shall be used only when approve1 by
the Engineer. Air-en training ad mixtures if specified or permitted
shall conform to the requ iremcnts of AAS H O Standaid Spec ifications for A ir-E ntrain ing Adm ixtu res for Gonc rote, M 1154
(ASTM C260) .
14)
All fine aggregate for concrete shall conform to the Specihcation for Fine Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete, AASHO
M 6. NOTE : Requ irements for soundness should be stipulated in
the special provisions (Refer to AASHO M 6, paragraph 4. 1, 4.2
(2)
CONSTRUCTION
Coorse Aggregotes
I I I Coorse Aggregofes
All coarse aggregates for concrete shall conform to the Specification :for Coarse Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete,
AASHO M 80 as to quality and to the Speci fiCtion for 5tandard
Sizes of Coarse Aggregate for Highway Construction, AASHO M
43 (ASTI\1 D 448) .is to size. NOTE : Requirements for soundness
should be stipu lated in the special provisions [Refer to AASHO
M 80, paragraph 6.1, 6.2, 6.3) .
Slag shall be used for- aggregate only it its use is provided for
in the s peer al provisions.
(2)
Ru bb ie or Cyclopeon Aggrego te
Engineer.
When requ i red by' the terms of the contract, the Contractor shall
keep acc ti ratc records of the del i x eries of cement an d of it s use in the
work. Copies of these records shal l be supplied to the Engineer in such
form as maJ be req u i red.
Class E
Class C
Class X
Class Y
A ir-entrained
cone rete
Class A ( A E )
Class B ( A E)
Class C ( AE )
Glass X ( AE )
Class Y ( AE )
2.46
267
CONSTRUCTION
Sacks
Fine
Goame
Fue
Goame
The wei ghts of fine and coarse aggregate given in th e abov e table
batches on the project, th e amou tit of adm i xture req u i red to prod uce an
air content wi th in the ra n ge spec ifi ed. In case an air-en training cement
i 9 to be used, the E ngi nee r shall determine whether the cement when
u sed i n concrete i ri the requ i red propo rtions w i 11 entra i n at r in the
concrete w ith in the I inn i ts spec i fled. In case the at r content, thus deterinned, fall s on ts i de th e spec i fied ran be and i I is found i mposs ible to
obtai n the rec) ii i red a i r conten I by sl i ght ad j u stme n ts in the finecoarse
aggregate ratio and/or by changes in mixing p roced u res, the Contractor
way, i I the at r con ten t is too low, ftse an at r entra i n i n g adm ixtu re of
the same type as that u sed in the man ii fac tu n' of the a i r-entra i n in g
cPment, in an amou nt su fin i e nt to bi i n g the a i r cci ntent v i th i n the
required range. If the air content is too high, the Gontracto r, subject
to approva l by the Eng ineer, may use a non-air-entraining cement as a
rcJlaceme nt for a portion of the a i r-e ntrain in g cement in an amount
su ltte rent to br i n g the at i content w i th in the ieq u i red iange.
22 (ASTM C39)
OONSTRUGTION
248
aggregate.
When the aggregates contain more water than the q u:tntity neces
sary to produce a saturated s u rfaee-dry cond it ion in c on tomplated in
Article 2.4. 6, represen tative samples shall be taken and the moistu re
content determined for each kin d of aggregate.
When sack cement is used, the q u ant i ti es of aggregates for eaCh
batch shill be exactly s uflic ient for one or more fu 11 sacks of cemcnt
and no batch requ iring f racti on at sacks of cement will be perm i ttcd.
Mixing ot Sife
Con crete shal I be th o rou gh ly mixed in a batch mi xe r of an approved
size and type which will insu i-e a u n i form d istr ibuti on of the mate r i als
th rough out the mass.
The mixer shall be eq u ipped with adeq u ate wate r storage and a
device for accu rt tCly measu ring and automati cal ly contriI li rig the
amount of water used in each batch. P rcfe rab ly', mech an ical mean s
shall be provi dcd for record i rig the n umber of i-evol utions for each
batch and au to ma tica l l y preventing the d recharge of the in ixe r unt il the
mate r ia ls have been mixed the s;ec ified mini mu in time.
The enti i e contents of the mixer shall be removed from the d ru in
hefore matPr ials for a succeed ing batch are placed tlierei n. No mi xer
h avi rig a i a ted cap an ty of lo.>s than a 1-bag batch sha I l be used nor
shal l a in ixe r be charged in excess of its rated ea pac i ly.
All cone rete shall be in ixed for a pei- rod of not less than 1'/_
minu tes after all mate r i a ls, incl u din g water, are in th e mixer. Du ring
the pen nd of in txt rig, the mixer shall operate at the speed for wh ich it
has been dest gned, but th is speed shall be not loss than 14 nor more
than 20 revol u tion s per min ute.
The fi re I batch of cone rete mate ria]s placed in the mixer sh all
contain a en the i ent excess of cement, sand and water to coat the inside
of the dru in without i ed uc i rig the requ ired mortar content of the mix.
Upon the ces sa I io n of mixing for a considerable period, the in ixe r shall
be thoroughly cleaned.
Truck mixers, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, shall
be of the revolving dru in type, waterti ght, and so con s trusted thit the
IEI
Plont fdix
M ix i rig .it a cont r:i 1 plan I shall cn for in I o the reJ It i rei rients for
in ix i n g itt the s ite.
IF I Time of Hauling ond Placing Mixed Concref e
IG I Hond Mixing
CONSTRUCTION
271
IHI
Del ivery
The organization supplying concrete shall have suffic ient plant
capacity and transporting apparatus to insure continuous delivery at
the rate requ ired. The rate of delivery of concrete during concreting
operations shall be such as to provide for the proper handling, placing
and fin ishing of the concrete. The rate shall be such that the interval
between batches shall not exceed 20 min utes. The methods of delivering
and handling the concrete shall be such as w ill tacit itate placing with the
minimu in of rehan dling an d without damage to the structure or the
concrete.
11 I
Retemperin9
The concrete shall be in ixed on ly in s uch quanti ties as are requ ired
for i mmcd rate use and any wh ich has devo loped initial set shall not be
used. Concrete which has partially hardened shall not be retempered
or remixed.
Generol
In prep a ration for the placing of concrete all sawdust, chips, and
other constru ction debris and extraneou s matter shall be removed from
the interior of forms. Str uts, stays and braces, serv ing temporarily
to hold the forms in correct shape and al i gnment, pending the placing
of concrete at their locations, shall be removed when the concrete placing has reached an elevation ren dering their service unnecessary. These
temporary members shall be entirely removed from the forms and not
buried in the concrete.
No concrete shall be used which does not reach its final posi tion in
the forms with in the time stipulated under A rt icle 2.4.5 ( F .
Concrete shall be placed so as to avoid segregation of the mater ials
and the d i splacement of the reinf o rcement. The use of: long troughs,
chutes and pipes for conveying concrete from the mixer to the forms
shall be permitted onl) on written authorization of the Engineer. In
case an inferior quality of concrete is produced by the use of s u ch
conveyors, the Engineer may order discontinuance of their use and the
i n sti tu ti on of a sat is factory method of plac i ng.
Open troughs and chutes shall lie of metal or metal lined - where
steep slopes are reQu i red, the chutes shal I be eq u ipped with
in short lengths th at reverse the d irection of movement.
All ch utes, t rou g hs and pipes shall be kept clean and I ree from
coatings of hardened concrete by thorough ly flush ing with water at ter
each r un. Water used for fl ush ing shal I be d ischarged clear of the
str ueture.
W hew plicing operitions would involve droppi ng the concrete more
than 5 Acct, it shall be depos i ted through sheet metil or other approved
pipes. A.s far as pi act icable, the pipes shall be kept f u ll of concrete
d ui'in g placing ind ther r lower ends shall be kept bu riecl in
the newly
placed con e reto. Af tci- ini tial set of the conc rete, the forms shall not
be jarred and no s train shall be placed on the ends of re in forcement
bars wh ich proj ect.
HIGHWAY BRIDGE S
2410
Concrete, during and immediately after depositing, shall be thoroughly compacted. The compaction shall be done by mechanical vibration subject to the fol'ow ing provisions :
( 1) The vibration shall be internal unless special authorization
of other methods is given by the Engineer or as provided herein.
12) V i b rators sh all be of a type and design approved by the
E ngineer. They sha 11 be capable of transm i tti n g vi Aeration to the
concrete at ft-eg u e ncies of not less than 4500 impulses per minu te.
(3I The intensity of vibration shall be such as to visibly affect
a mass of concrete of 1inch slump over a radiu s of at least 18
inches.
(4) The Contractor shall provide a sufficient number o:I vibrators to properly compact each batch immediately after it is
place d in the forms.
(5) Vibrators shal l be man ipu lated so as to thoroughly work
the concrete around the reinforcement and imbedded fixtures, and
into the corners and angles of the for ins.
Vibration shall be appl red at the point of deposit and in the
area of fresh I y depos ited concrete. The vibrators shall be inserted
and withd rawn out of the concrete slowly. The vibration shall be of
su Lucien t d uration and in tens ity to thorou ghly compact the concrete,
bu I shall not be conti nued so as to cause segregation. Vibration
shall not be continued at any one point to the extent that local ized
areas of grou t are formed.
Appl ication of v ibrators shall be at points un iformly spaced
and not farther apai t than twice the rad ius over which the vibratie n i s visibly effect i ve.
(6 Vibrati on shall not be appl red di rectly or through the reinfo rcomon I to sections or layers of concrete wh ich have hardened to
the degree that the concrete ceases to be plastic under v ibration. It
shall not be u sed to make concrete flow in the forms over d istances
so great as to cau se seq repation, and vibrators sha 11 not be used to
tran spo rt concrete i n the forms.
17 I Vibration shall be su pp lemented by such spad ing as is
necessa ry to insure smooth su rfaces and dense concrete along l'orm
surfaces and in corners and location s imposs ible to reach with the
v i b rate rs.
18I The prov i sion s of this article shal l apply to the filler cone rete for steel grid floor except that the vibrator sha 11 be applied to
the steel.
19\ The prov is ions of th is article shall apply to precast pil ing,
conci-etc cri bb ing and other precast members except that, i f ap-
bu lkhead. Each layer shall be placed an d compacted be for e the preced in p batch has taken initial set to prevent inj ury to the green con-
273
cretc and avoid su rf accs of scpa rat i on between the batches. Each
layer shal l be com pacted so as to avoid the Iormation of a construction
joint w ith a preCed ing layer wh ich has not taken in it rat set.
When the plac ing of concrete is temporarily d i scontinti ed, the con-
crete, af too beeom my firm enough to retai n its form, shall be cleaned
of laitance and other ob.j ecti on at le material to a su fhcient d epth to
expose sound c on crete. To avoid vis ible joints as far as possible upon
exposed faces, the top surf aw of the concrete adjacent to the forms
shall be smoothed with a trowel. Where a feather edge might be
prod uced at a con struct i on joint, as in the sloped top surface of a wing
wall, an in set form shall be used to produce a blocked out portion
in the prec ed i n g layer wh ich shall produce an edge th ickness of not
less than 6 i nches in the s ucceed ing layer. Work shall not be disc on
tin ued with in 18 inches of the top of any face, unless prov is i on has been
made for a cop mg less than 18 inches thick, iii wh ich case, if permitted
by the E ngineer, the construction joint may be made at the under eide
of the coping.
Ian med ia tely followi ng the d i wont in uance of placing concrete at I
we u mu latin us of mortar splashed upon the reinforcemen t steel and the
su rf aces of forms shall be removed. D rted mortar ch ips and dust shall
not be pu idled into the u met concrete. If the aecumu lations are not
removed pr ior to the concrete becoming set, care shall be exercised not
to in j u i e or break the concrete-steel bond at and near the surface of
the concrete, v hile clean ing the rei n forcement steel.
IBI
Culverts
so
274
ICI
For simple spans, concrete, preferably, shall be depos ited by beginning at the center of the span and working from the centPr toward the
ends. Concrete in girders shall be deposited un if orml y for the full
length of the girder and brought
up even ly in horizontal
layers.
For
cont in uou s spans, wh t2re rPQU iFd by dest gn cons id e ration s, the concrete
(il win g seQuCne Shal l be shown on the plan s or in the special prov is ion s.
Concrete in girder hau nchPs less than 3 feet in height shall be
pined at the same time as that in the girder stem, and the column or
ibu tmen I tops shall be cut back to form seats for the hau nches. Whenever any haunch or fillet has a vertical height of 3 feet or more, the
abutment or columns, the haunch, and the girder shal I be placed in th ree
su cccs swe sta es first up to the lower side of the haunch ; socon d, to
the low er s ide of the girder ; and th ird, to completi on.
For haunched c ont in uo us girders, the girder stem I includ ing
haunch ) sh all be poured to the top of stem. Where the s we of the pou r
is such that it cannot be made i n one pour, vertical con sti u ction .jo.nts
shall preferably be located within the area of contraflex u re.
Concrete in slab spans shal I be placed in one cont in uous operation
for each span unless otherwise provided.
The floors and gi rders of th rough girder su pe rstr uctu res shall be
p!aced in one con tinu ous operati on unless otherw ise spec i fied, in which
case special shear a rich o i age shall be provided to insure monolithic
action between girder and floor.
Cone rete i n T-beam or deck girder spans may be placed in one
cont in uous operation or may be placed in two separate ope rati on s, each
of wh ich shall be continu ous ; first, to the top of the girder stems, and
secon d, to completion. I n the latter case, the bond between stem and
slab shal I be pos itive and mech an ical, and may be secured by means of
s u i table shear keys or by arti tic ially roughen ing the s u rface of the top
of the g irder stem. In general, su itable keys may be formed by the u se
of ti mber blocks app rox i mately 2 by 4 inches in cross-section and having
i length 4 inches few than the width of the gi rder s tern. Then key
blocks shall be spaced along the gi rder stems as reQu i red, but the
spacing shil l be not greater than 1 foot center to center. The blocks
shall be beveled an d or led in such manner as to insure their ready re
moval, an d th ey sha I I be removed as soon as the concrete has set suf
ficiently to retain its shape.
Concrete in box girders may be placed in two or three separate
oper at ion s. In either case the bottom slab shal l be poured first. Bond
between the bottom slab and stem shall be pos it we and mech a n ical. If
the webs me pou red separa tely from the top slab, bond between the top
slab and webs shall be secured in the same manner as for T-beams. Requ iremen ts for shear keys for T-beams shall also apply to box girders,
except that keys need n ot be deeper than the depth to the top of bottom
slab re i n to rce ment.
C'onc re te in colu run s shall be placed in one continuous operatio n,
u nless otherwise di rected. The concrete shall be at towed to set at least
12 hou rs before the caps are placed.
Unless otherw'ise permitted by the Engineer, no concrete shall be
placed in the superstructure until the column forms have been stripped
24.10
CONSTRUCTION
2.4.12 PUMPING
Placement of concrete by pu mping will be permitted only if speci-
ment sh aJl be so arranged that vi brations will not damage freshly placed
concrete.
Where concrete is conveyed and placed by mechanically applied
pressure, the equipment shall be su itable in kind and adequate in capacity
for the work. The operation of the pump shall be such that a cont in uous
stream of concrete without air pockets is produced. When pu mping is
completed, the concrete remaining in the pipeline, if it is to be used, shall
be ejected in such a manner that there will be no contamination of the concrete or separat ion of the ingredients. After this operation, the entire
equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned.
of the Engineer and under his immediate su pervision ; and in this case
the method of placing shall be as hereinafter designated.
Engineer.
If not detailed on the plans, or in the case of ewe rpency, construction joints shall be placed as directed by the Engineer. Shear keys or
inclined rci nforcement shall be used where n ccessary to transmit shear
or bond the two secti on s together.
IBI
Bonding
24.14
GONSTRUGTION
27T
be left undisturbed.
278
alkali ne
waters or
soils, speci at care shall be taken to place it in accord ance with placing
spec theatre us herein. Whenever poss ible, placi ng shall be cont in uous until
comp le tion of the section or unti I the concrete i s at least IP inches above
ground or water level. Alkal me waters or soils shall be kept from contact
w ith the concrete durin g placement and for a period of at least 72 hours
th ereaf ter.
2.4.19 FORMS
A 11 forms shall be of wood or metal and shall be built mortarti ght
'
an d of su the rent ri gid ity to prevent d i stortion d u.e to the pressure of the
concrete and other loads incident to the construction operations. Forms
shall be co nstrusted and mai nta i ned so as to prevent warping and the
open ing of joi rite due to sh ri nkage of the lu mber.
The form s shall be sub.stantial an d unyield i ng and shall be so
des igned that the finished concrete wi 11 conform to the proper dimen.sion,s a nd contou rs. The design of the forms shall take into account
the effect of v ibration of concrete as it is placed.
Forms for exposed surfaces shall be made of' d ressed lu mber of
uniform th redness, with or without a form liner of an approved type, and
shall be mo rta rt i ght. Forms shall be billeted at all sharp corners and shall
be gi ven a bevel or draft in the case of all projections, such as girders
and copings, to insure easy removal.
2.4.19
CONSTRUCTION
279
the placing of concrete, the Engineer shall order the work stopped until
the defects have been corrected.
The shape, s I ren gth, rigidity, watertigh tn ess and surface smoothness of re-used forms shal l be ma i n tai ned at all times. Any warped or
b ulged lumber must be resized before being reused. Forms which are
unsatis:factory in any respect shall not be reused.
For narrow walls and colu runs, where the bottom of the :f orm is
in access i b Ie, the lower form boards shall be Ref t loose so th at they may
be removed for cleaning o ut extraneous material inn med iately before
placing the concrete.
All forms shall be treated with oil or saturated with water immediately before placing the concrete. For rail members or other members with exposed faces, the forms shall be treated with an approved
oil to prevent the adherence of concrete. Any material wh ich wi 11
adhere to or d iscolor the concrete shall not be used.
2.4.20 REMOVAL OF FALSEWORK, FORMS AND HOUSING
In the determination of the timc for the removal of falsework,
forms and hous rug, and the d iscont in u ance of heating, cone ideration
shall be give n to the location and ch arac ter of the structu re, the weather
and other cond it ions in fl u encin g the setting of the concrete, and the
materials used in the mix.
If field ope rations an not con trolled by beam or cylinder tests the
Toll oiv in g periods, excl us we of diys when the tempe rat ure is beI ow 40,
for removal of forms and su pports may be used as a gu ide :
Arch centers
14 days
Centering u nd e r beams
14 days
Floor slabs
7-14 days
Walls
12-24 hrs.
Columns
1- 7 days
Sid os of beams and all other parts
12-24 hrs.
If high-early strength cement is used these periods may be reduced
280
used. The 1eams or cy linders shall be cured under conditions which are
not more f avorable than the most unfavorable conditions for the portions
of the concrete which the beams rep resent.
Methods of form removal I ikely to cause over stressin g of' the concrete shall not be u sed. I n general, the forms shall be removed from
the bottom upwards. Formc> and thei r supports shall not be removed
without the approval of the Engineer. Supports shall be removed in
such a man ne r as to permit the cone rcte to uniformly and gradu ally
take the stresses l ue to its own weight.
In general, arch centering sha 11 be struck and the arch made selfsu pportin g before the rail m g or coping is placed. This p recaution i s
essenti at i n order to avoid jamming of the ex;ansion J or rite and variations in at inment. For filled spandrel arches, such portions o1 the
spandrel wal ls shall be left for construction subseq u ent to the striking
of centers, .n may be necessa ry to ax'oid jamming of t he expans to n
joints.
Centers shall be gradually and uniformly lowered in such a manner
as to iivoil in jii riou s s tresses i n any part of the struct u re. In arch
struc tures of two or more spans, the sequence of striking cente r.s shall
be specified or approved by the Engineer.
manders or steam cQU ipment and the neee ssary Iuel. When dry heat
is
used, means of maintain ing atmospheric mo isture shall be prov ide1. All
aggre gates an d in ixing witcr shil1 be heated to a tompe retu re of at least
70 F but not more than 150 F ; the aggregates may be heated by either
steam or dry heat. If perm i tted by the Engineer the torch method of
heating mixed coneieto may be used, ;rov i ded the heating appar:it us
shall be nich as to heat the mass un iformly and avoid hot spots which w ill
bu rn the in:tteri ate. The temperatii re of the concrete shall be not less thtn
60 F at the time of placing in the forms. In case of extremely low temperatures, the Engineer may, at his discretion, raise the minimum limiting
te mpe ratu red for wate i-, ag gregates and mixed concrete.
burlap, sand or other satisf actory material and kept moist ; or if the
su nates are not covered, they shall be kept moist by Pushi rig or sprinkling. Curing shall continue for a Jeriod of not less th an seven days
after placing the concrete. If h igh -early strength cement is used, this
2.4.22
CONSTRUCTION
281
IBI
Open Joints
Filled Joints
Poured expans ion joints shall be con.sti ucted similar to open joints.
When p re mol d ed types ai-e spec i fit d, th e fil ter sh.t Il be in correct pos i -
tion vi hen thP concrete on one s id e nd the joint is placed. When the
form is removed, the cone i eto on the other s idP shall be placed. Ad eJ uate v atei- stops of mCtal, rubber or plastic shall be caref u fly placed
.is sh own on the plans.
I CJ
D 1752 ) .
Bitu minou9 type filllr 9hall con:form to the Specificati on for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete, AASHO M 33.
IDJ
Steel Joints
The pl a tes, an g1es or other structu ral shapes shall be accu rately
sh Jed, at the shop, to conf orm to the section of the concrete floor.
The fabrication and painting shall conform to the requ irements of the
spec ificati on s covering those items. When called for on the plans or in
the special provisions, the material shall be gal van ized in l ieu of painting. Care shall be taken to insu re th at the surface in the fin ished plane
is true and free of wa rp i ng. Positive methods shall be employed in
placing the joints to keep them in correct position during the placing
of the cone i ete. The open ing at expansion joints shall be that designated on the plans at normal temperatu re, and care shall be taken to
avoid impa irment of the clearance in any manner.
I EI
Water Stops
HI GH WAY BRIDGE 5
M 138.
IG J
Beoring Devices
Bear ing plates, rockers and other expansion devices shall be constructed accord ing to details shown on the plans. Unless set in plastic
co ncrete or as otherw we spc c i fled, they shall be set in grout to insure
un iform
to
the
as is spec ified. If not otherwise speci fied, the follow ing surfaces shall
be given a Glass 2, Rubbed Finish : The exposed laces of piers, abutments, wing walls and retaining
the outs ide laces of girders,
T-beams, slabs, colu runs, bracke ts,
headwalls, railings, arch
rings, .spand rel walls and parapets ; but not on the tops and bottoms of
floor slabs and sidewalks, bottoms of beams and gi rders, sides
of
in-
terior beams and girders, backwalls abox e bridge seat or the underside
of copings. The surface finish on piers and abu tments shall include all
exposed surfaces below bridge seat to 1 foot below. low water elevation
or 2 feet below finish groun d line when such ground line is above the
water surface. Wing walls shall be fin ished I rom the top to 2 feet
below the hn ish slope lines on the outside face and shall be finished on
top and for a depth of 1 foot below the top on the back sides.
Unless otherwise specified, roadway floors shall be given Class 6,
Floated Surface Fin ish.
2.4.25
CONSTRUCTION
the cavities produced by form ties and at l other holes, honeycomb spots,
su rface has
been obta in ed. The paste produced by this rubbing shall be le:ft in
place at this time.
After al l concrete above the surface being treated has been cast,
the final fin i sh shall be obtai ned by ru bbing with a fine carboru nd um
stone and water. This rubb ing shall be continued until the entire
surface is of a smooth texture and uniform color.
After the final rubbing is completed and the surface has dried,
i t shall be ru bbed with burlap to remove loose powder and shall be left
free from all unsound patches, paste, powder and objectionable marks.
284
HI GHWAY BRIDGE 5
2428
IBJ
Flooting
Af ter strikin g off .tnc1 con slid.i t trip as spec ifiPd above, the surface
Shall bC in:tdc u n i form by lon gi tu I inal or t ran eve rse floit ing, or both.
Long i tu dinal float i rig wi 11 be requ ired except i n places where thi s
Longitudinol
Flooting
Th e lori gitud in at float, ope rited from foot bri d qcs, shall be worked
w ilh a sa\x i rig moti on whi le hPld in i float i np position p:iral tel to the
roid ccnterli n c .i nd piss i up grd u il1y f rom one s ide of the pavement
to the other. T he float shall thCn be moved forward onehalf of its
length arid th P above ope rat i on repcated. Machine float in g wh ich pro
duces eq u ivalent results may be substitu ted for the above hand method.
iDJ
Tronsverse
Floating
The transvc rse float shall be operated across the pavement by start-
ONSTRUTION
24.30
28J
ing at the edge and slowly mov'in g to the ce nter and back again to the
edge. The float shall then be moved forward one-half of its len Mth and
the above operati one repeated. Care shall be taken to preserve the
crown and cross section of the paveme tit.
IE J
Stroighfedging
Af te r the lon gitu d ina l R ou I i n g has bPen complo ted and the CxcCSs
water removed, but wh i Ie the concrete is still plastic, the slab su rf ace
shall be tested for trueness with a st.ra igh tedgc. For th i s pu nose, the
contractor shall turn ish and u se an accu i ate 10foot straightedge
swung from han dles 3 fcet longer than one-half the width of the slab.
The Qtr a ih tedge shall be held in s uceess we positio us parallel to the
road centerline and in contact with the surface and the whole area gone
over :from one side of the slab to the other as necessary. Advancement
along the deck sh. 11 be in success we stages of not more than one-half the
length of
sh all be imme-
diately fil led v ith fresh ly mixed concrete, struck off, con sol idated an d
refin ished. High areas shal I be cut down and i-efin i shed. The str a ightedge testing and refloatin g shtll contiri ue until the entire surface is
found to be free from observable depart u res from the str:t ightcd ge and
the slab h.ts the reQu ird grade and contour, until there are no deviations of more than Ii i rich under the 10-foot straightedge.
iFJ Finol Finishing
When the concrete has hardened suffic icntly, the su i face shall be
given a broom fin ish. The broom sh all be of an t J proved type. The
strokes shall be square across the sItb, from cd ge to edge, with adjacent
strokes sI ihtly ove rl appcd, and shal l be made by di-awing the broom
without tearing the concrete, but so as to produce i egu far cori u Nations
not over s" of an inch in depth. The su rface as thus fin ished sh:tI I be
free from porous spots, irregu lan ties, dep re ssions and small pockets
or ro ugh spots s uch as may be caused by acci d enta I d istu rb inp, during
the final 6 room in g, of pirticles of course agg rcgate embedded near the
surface.
j oints.
The
s urface
shal l not
vary
more than fs inch u rider a 10foot stra ightedge. The surface shal I
have a granular or matte tcxturc which will not be st ick when wet.
Sidewalk surfaces shall be laid out in blocks wi th an approved
grooving tool as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
General
This section refers to premixed sand
and
cement
pneu matical ly
28?
HIGHWAY BRIDGE 5
I BJ
Proportions
Woter
Content
Mixing
The cement and san d shall
be
thorou ghly
mi xetl
before
being
charged into the mach me. The sand shall contain not less than 3 nor
more than 6 per cent moistu re by wPi ght.
I EA
Nozzle Velocity
T'he veloc ity of the material as it leaves the nozzle must be main
Nozzle
Position
Rebound
Sond
Rebou nd or accu mutated loose sand shall be removed from the surface to be covered prior to placing of the orig i n at or succeedi rig layers
of mortar.
IHI
IIJ
Forms
Joinfs
The pneu in atically appli ed mortar at the end of any day's work or
2.432
CONSTRUCTION
2B7
I KJ Curing
ILJ Reinforcement
The reinforcement, when requ ired, shall be adequate from the
standpoint of structural requ irements and shal I consist of mesh or
round bars, spaced not less than 2 inches nor more than 4 inches apart
either way, and having a diameter not less than that of No. 12 wire.
The area of the reinforcement shall be at least 0.2 per cent of the cross
sectional area of the mortar. The reinforcement shall be at least /i inch
from the unexposed surface of the mortar and at least 'i inch from the
exposed surface.
General
f abricator shall provide a techn ter an skilled in the use of the system
of prestress ing to be used who shall supervise the work and give the
Engineer such assistance as in his judgment may be necessary.
ICJ
Equipmenf
The Contractor or fabricatoi shall provide all equipment necessary
for the constr uction and th e prestress ing. Prestress ing shall be done
with approved jacking equipment. If hydrau I ic jacks are used, they
shall be equ ipped with accurately reading pressure gages. The combination of jack and gage shal l be calibrated and a graph or table
showing the calibration shall be furnished the Engineer. Should other
types of jacks be used, calibrated proving rings or other devices shall
be furnished so that the jacking forces may be accurately known.
IDI
Concrete
288
IEA
Steom Curing
I FJ
Tronsportotion
ond Storoge
'
and
Pretensioning
Method
CONSTRUCTION
2.4.33
289
made and cured i de nt wally with the members, of at lent the min imu in
9trength shown on the plans or in the spec i ficati one for such transfer
of load. The elements shal l be cut or released in su ch an order that
lateral eccentric ity of prestress will be a minimum.
\ HI
Post-Tensioning
Method
The tens toning process shall be condu cted so that the tension being
applied and the cI ongation may be measured at all times. The friction
loss shall be estimated as provided in Article 1.6.7. A record shall
be kept of gage pressu res and elongati on s at all times and su bmitted
to the En gineer for his approval. Loads shall not be applied to the
concrete u ntil it h:is attained strength as specified in Article 2.4.33
G) for pretend toning method.
IIJ Grouting of Bonded Steel
sand, the
(AST61 A 421) .
High-tensile-strength seven-wire strand shall conform to the requ irements of AASHO M 203 ( ASTM A 416) .
High-te nsilestrength alloy bars shall be st. ess relieved and then
G ONS T RU CTION
291
of joint fillers, metal drains, expans ion joints and in iscella neou s metal
devices u nless they are covered by other items in the contract. The
payment for pne u matical ly ippl red mortar shal I incl ude eompenst ion
for all eqn ipment, tools, mater ia ls, labor and i nc i denials necessa ry to
complete the work and shall include metal rei n fo rcemen t u n less othe rwise provided.
Section 5
REINFORCEMENT
2.5.1 MATERIAL
fA J
Bor Reinforcement
with
following modifications :
IBI
Bar mat rein fo rcement for concrete sh:ill conform to the Specification fr Fab r i cated Steel Par or Ron Mats for Concrete Re in Iorcement
of the AA S H O M 54 I ASTM A 184
IDJ
Structurol Shopes
Stru ctu rat shapes u sed as rei nf orcement in concrete shall conform
to the requ i resents for structu rat steel as prov i led in th e.e speci fica-
to thc revi s ion of naatei ml fu rn ish ed i n accord an ee with such lists and
dia g rams to make it comply with the dest gn drawings shall be borne by
the Contractor.
2.5.4 FABRICATION
Bar re i n Io rccment shall be bent to the shapes shown on the pl:in s.
All bare shall be bent cold, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. No bars partially Embedded in concrete shall be field bent except as
shown on .the plans or specifically permitted by the E ngineor.
The radi i of bend meas ured on the inside o1 the bar for standard
hooks sh.all be not ten than the fo11w ing :
B:ir Size
6, 7 oi P
9, 10 or 11
14 or 18
3 bar
4 bar
( br diameters
2. 5.4
CONSTRUCTION
Bends for stirrups and ties shall have radi i on the inside of the bar
not less than one bar d iameter. I3ends :for all other bars shall have rad i i
on the inside of the bar n ot low than the values tabu lated in the p reced in g
parag mph s.
Bar re in Iore owe tit shall be sh ipped in stiiiidard bundles, tagged
and marked in accordance with the Code of Stan dird Practice of the
Concrete Re in Iorcement Steel Institu te.
2.5.6 SPLICING
All reinforcement shall be turn ished in the :fu ll lengths ind icited
on the plans. Splicing of bars, except where shown on the plans, will
not be permitted without the written approval of the Engineer. Spl ices
shall be staggered as :far as possible.
Unless otherwise shown on the plans, bars shall be spl iced in accordance with Article 1.5.6 IC ) . In lapped splices, the bars shall be placed in
contact and wired together in such a manner as to ma in tain a clearance
of not less than the minimum clear distance to other bars and the mini
mum distance to the sui face o:I the concrete specified in Article 1.5.6 (B) .
2.5.7 LAPPING
Sheets of mesh or bar mat reinforcement shall overlap each other
suffic iently to maintain a u n iform stren gth and sha!l be securely fastened at the en de and ed ges. The ed ge I ap sh all not be less than one
mesh in width.
2.5.8 SUBSTITUTIONS
Subst itu tion of d ifferent size bars will be permitted on ly with
specific authorization by the Engineer. The sub9titu ted bars ehall have
an area equ ivalent to the des i gn area, or larger.
2.5.9 MEASUREMENT
Steel rein to rce ment incorporated in the concrete masonry will be
measu red in pou rids based on the total computed weight :for the sizes
and lengths of bars, mesh or mats shown on the plans or au thor i zcd.
The weight of reinf orcement u sod in raili ngs shall not be included
when rat l in ps are paid f r on a I i near foot bas is. The we ight of reinforcement in precast p iles and other items w hero the reinforcement is included
in the contract price foi the item shall not be incl uded.
N o allowance wil I be made for e lips, vv'i re, separators, \vi re chairs,
2.5.10 PAYMENT
Payment for reinf orcemen t as determined under measurement shall
be made at the contract price per pound. Payment shall i nclude the cost of
CO N STRU G TI O N
2.6.1
Section 6
ASHLAR MASONRY
2.6. J DESCRIPTION
Ashlar masonry shal I const st of first-class cut
stone
masonry
laid in
regular courses and shall incl u de all vork in which, as d istingu ished from
rubble ma so n ry, the ind ividual stories are dressed o r tooled to exact
d imens ions.
2.6.2 MATERIALS
fAl Ashlor Stone
Stone for ashlar masonry shall be of the kind specified on the plans
or in the contract. The stone shall be tough, dense, sound and durable,
resistant to weathering action, reasonably fine grained, uniform in
color, and free from seams, cracks, pyrite inclusions, or othe r structural
defects. Preferably, stone shall be from a quarry, the prod uct of wh ich
is known to be of satisfactory quality. Stone shall be of s uch character
that it can be wrought to such lines and surfaces, whether curved or
plane, as may be requ ired. Any stone having defects which have been
repaired with cement or other materi a Is shall be rej ected.
Each b idder shall submit with his bid a 6-inch cubical block of the
stone he proposes to furnish and shall designate the quarry from which
it is obtained. Th Quality o:I the stone furnished shall be at least equal
to that of the sample. The sample shall be squared an d dressed on
three sides ; one side shall be smooth-finished, one s ide finefin ished, and
one side shal l be given the finish ind icated on the plans for exposed
surfaces of face stone. The remaining sides shall be left with quarry
face.
When permitted by the Engineer, bidders may submit bids, accompanied by samples as specified above, on kinds of stone other than that
specified.
The stone shall be kept free from di rt, oil or any other injurious
material which may prevent the proper adhesion of the moItar or
detract from the appearance of the exposed surfaces.
IBI
Menem
Mortar for laying the stone and pointing shall be composed of one
part of portland cement and three parts of sand unless otherwise provided. The sand shall conform to the requirements of Article 2.4.2 (C) .
shal I not be less than 12 nor more than 30 inches in thickness. The thicknesses of course, if varied, shall diminish regularly from bottom to top of
wall. The size of ring stones in arches shall be as shown on the plans.
exceed 3 inches and no part of the face shall recede back of the pitch
line.
2.6.6 STRETCHERS
Stretchers sh:it I have a w id th of bed of not less than 1'l_ ti rues their
thickness. They shall have a length of led not less than twice nor more
than 3_ ti rues thei r th i ckness, and not less than 3 feet.
2.6.7 HEADERS
Hoade n shall be placed in each course and shall have a ivid th of not
less than 1/'_ times their th ickncss. In walls hav in g a th ickness of 4 feet
GON8TRUCTION
26.7
297
or less, the headers shall extend entirely through the wall. In walls o:I
greater th redness, the length of headers shal I be not less than 2'_' ti rues
their th icknes s when the course is 18 inches or less in heigh t, and not less
than 4 feet in courses of greater he ight. Headers shall bond with the core
or backing not less than 12 inches. Headers shall hold in the heart of the
wall the same size sh own in the face and shall be spaced not further apart
than 8 feet center to center. There shall be at least one header to every
two stretchers.
General
Fcice Stone
Stone shall not be dropped upon, or slid over, the wall, nor will
hammering, roll in g or turn in g of stones on the wall be allowed. They
shall be caref u lI y set without jarring the stone at ready laid and they
shall be handled with a lewis or other appliance which will not cause
disfi g urement.
Each stone shall be cleaned and thoroughly saturated with water
before being set and the bed which is to receive it shall be cle.tried and
well moistened. All stones shall be well bedded in f reshly made mortar
and settled in place wi th a su itable wooden maul before the setting of
the mortar. Whenever possible, the face joints shall be properly pointed
298
before the mortar sets. Joints which cannot be so pointed shall be prepared for pointing by raking them out to a depth of 2 inches before the
mortar has set. The face surf'aces of stones shall not be smeared with
the mortar forced out of the joints or that used in pointing. No pinn ing u p of stones wi th spalls will be perm itted and no spalls will be
permitted in beds.
Joints and beds shall be not tess than ?s inch nor more than '/: inch
in thick ness and the I h redness of the jo int or bed shall be uniform
throu ghout.
for face stone, with headers interlocking with I ace headers when the
th redness of the well wi 11 perm it. Backing shall be laid to break joints
with the face stone. Stone cores shi1l be laid in I u 11 mortar beds so as
to bond not ten than 12 i nches w ith face and backing stone and w ith
each othei . Ped joint s in cores an1 bieking shall not exceed 1 inch and
vertical joints shall not exceed 4 inches in th redness.
IDI
concrete
cores or backing by
the intern ttent plac nig of concrete shall be located, in general, not less
than 6 inches below the top bed of any course of masonry.
2.. J 2 RESETTING
In case any stone is moved or the joint broken, the stone shall be
taken up, the mortar thoroughly cleaned from bed and jo ruts, and the
stone reset in fresh mortar.
CONSTRUCTION
299
Dowel holes shal I be dri fled through each stone before the stone is
placed and, after it is in place, such dowel holes shall be extended by
drill ing into the u nderlyin g con rse not less than 6 inches.
Cramps shall be of the shapes and dimensions shown on the plans
or approved by the Engineer. They shall be inset in the stone so as to be
flush with the surfaces.
Cramps and dowels shall be set in lead, care being taken to completely
fill the surrounding spaces with the molten metal.
2.6.J 4 COPINGS
Stones for copings of wall, pier and abutment bridge eeats shall
be carefu fly selected and fully d i mens toned stones. On piers, not more
th an two stones shall be used to make up the entire width of coping. The
copings of abutment bridge seats shall be of sufficient width to extend at
least 4 inches under the backwal 1. Each step forming the coping of a
wing wall shall be formed by a single stone which shall overlap the stone
form in g the step immediately below it at least 12 inches.
Tops of copin gs shall be given a bevel cut at least 2 inches wide,
and beds, bevel cuts and tops shall be fine-finished. The vertical joints
shall be smooth-finished and the copings shall be laid with joints not
more than 'Zi inch in thickness. The under sides of projecting copings,
2.6.J 5 ARCHES
The nu mber of courses and the depth of voussoirs shall be as shown
on the plans. Von ssoirs shall be placed in the order ind icated, shall be
full size throughout, dressed true to template, and sh all have bond not
less than the thickness of the stone. Beds and j oints shall be finefin ished and mortar joints shall not exceed "/i inch in th ickness. Exposed
surfaces of the intrados and arch ring shall be given the surface finish
i nd icated on the plans.
Backing may consist of Class B concrete or of large stones shaped
to fit the arch, bonded to the spandre 1s, and laid in full beds of mortar.
The extrados and interior faces of the spandrel walls shall be given a
finishing coat of 1: 2'm cement mortar which shall be trowelled smooth
to receive the waterproofing.
Arch centering, waterproofing, drainage and filling shall be as
specified for concrete arches.
2.6.16 POINTING
Pointing shall not be done in freezing weather nor when the stone
contains frost.
Joints not pointed at the time the stone is laid shal l be thoroughly
wet with clean water and filled with mortar. The mortar shal I be well
driven into the joints and finished with an approved pointing tool. The
in hot or dry
sun and kept
the wall shall
cond it ion.
I inn it i n g d i me net on s sh:ill not exceed those shown upon the plans or fixed
by the Engineer. The contract price shall include all labor, tools, materials and other expense incidental to the satisfactory comp letion of the
work.
Section 7
2.7.1 DESCRIPTION
Morta r rubble masonry, as here spec ified, shall include the classes
commonly know n as courted, random and random ringe work and shall
consist of rou ghly squ a red an cl dressed stone I:iid in cement mortar.
2.7.2 MATERIALS
I AJ
Rubble Stone
Stone for mortar rubble or dry rubble masonry
shal l
be
of
ap-
proved q ii alit y-, so und and du rablc, and free from seq regations, seams,
c i icks, and ther structu rat tlef ccts or impe rfect ions ten d ing to destroy
i ts ns is tance to the ve cath er. I I shall be free from ro unded, worn, or
weathc red en rfaccs. All xv fathered stone shal I be rejected.
The stno shall be kept I ice f rom d i rt, oil, or any other in jurious
material wh ieh may prev ent the proper adhesion of the mortar.
I BI
Mortor
2.7.3 SIZE
2.7.4 HEADERS
II eaders shall hold i n the heart of the wall the same s ize shown in
the face and sha 11 extend not less than 12 inches into the core or backing.
2.7.4
OONSTRUGTION
They shall occupy not less than "- of the face area of the wall and shall be
evenly d i stribu ted. Headers in walls 2 feet or less in thickness shal I extend
entirely through the wall.
beds
and
I:ices.
Selected stone, roughly sq uared and pi tched to line, shall be used at all
angles and ends of walls. If specified, all corners or angles in extei-ior
surfaces shall be finished with a chisel draft.
All shaping or dressing of stone shall be done before the stone is
laid in the wall, and no dressing or hammering wh ich vv'ill I oosen the
stone will be permitted after it is placec'.
2.7.8 ARCHES
The number of courses and the depth of vouseoire ehall be as shown
on the plans. Voussoi r9 shall be placed in the order indicated, shall be
full size throughout and 9hall have bond not less than their thickness.
Bede shall be roughly pointed to bring them to radial planes. Radial jointe
shall be in planee parallel to the transverse axi9 of the arch and, when
measured at the intrados, shall not exceed >i inch in thickness. Joints
perpendicular to the arch axis shall not exceed 1 inch in th ickneee when
measured at the intrados. The intradoe face shall be dressed sufhciently
to permit the stone to rest properly upon the centering. Exposed faces of
the arch ring shall be rock-faced with edges pitched to true lines.
The work ehall be carried up symmetrically about the crown, the
stone being laid in full mortar beds and the Joints grouted where necessary. Pinning by the use of stone spalls will not be permitted.
Backing may consist of Claes B concrete or o:I large stones shaped
to fit the arch, bonded to the spandrels, and laid in full beds of mortar.
The extrados and interior faces of the spandrel walls shall be given a
finished coat of 1 :Z4 cement mortar which shall be trowelled smooth to
receive the waterproofin g.
Arch centering, waterproofing, draining and filling shall be as
specified for concrete archee.
2.7'.9 POINTING
Pointing shall not be done in freezing weather or when the stone
contains frost.
Join ts not pointed at the time the stone is laid shall be thoroughly
wet with clean water and filled with mortar. The mortar shall be well
driven into the joints and finished with an approved pointing tool. The
wall ehall be kept wet while pointing is being done and in hot or dry
weather the pointed masonry shall be protected from the sun and kept
wet for a period of at least three days after completion.
After the pointing is completed and the mortar set, the wall shall be
thoroughly cleaned and left in a neat and workmanlike condition.
2.8.1
CON STRUCT I ON
Section 8
2.8. J DESCRIPTION
D ry rubble masonry as here specified shall include the classes commonly
known as coursed,
random
and
random
range
work and
shall
2.8.2 MATERIALS
Stone for mortar rubble or dry rubble masonry shall be of approved quality, sound and durable, and free from segregations, seams,
cracks, and other structural defects or imperfections tending to destroy
its res istance to the weather. It shall be :free from rounded, worn, or
2.8.4 HEADERS
Headers shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 2.7.
underlying course. Open joints, both Irout and rear, shall be ch in ked
with spalIs fitted to take firm bearing upon the ir top and bottom sur
faces, for the purpose of securing firm bearing throughout the length
of the stone.
When requ ired by the terms of the contract, the open joints on the
rear surfaces of abu tments or retain ing walls shall be slushed thoroughly with mortar to prevent seepage of water through the )oints.
2.7.
HIGHWAY BEIIJUES
oo
Section 9
BRICK MASONRY
2.9.J DESCRIPTION
Brick mason ry shall consist of brick laid in cement mortar and
shall inclu de such construction with bu ilding brick or ornamental brick
as may be speci fied. Brick pavements are not included under this
designation.
2.9.2 MATERIALS
lA J
Brick
2.9.3 CONSTRUCTION
The brick shall be laid in such manner as will thoroughly bond
them into the mortar by means of the shove-joint method ; buttered
or plastered joints will not be permitted. All brick must be thoroughly
saturated with water before being laid. The arrangement of headers
and stretchers shal I be such as will thoroughly bond the mass and, unless otherwise spec ified, brick work shall be of alternate headers and
stretchers with consecutive courses breaking ioints. Other types of
bonding, as for ornamental work, shall be as specified on the plans.
All joints shall be completely filled with mortar. They shall not be
less than /i inch and not more than '/: inch in thickness and the thick-
ONSTRU&TION
No spalls or bats sh all be used except for shaping around irregular
open ings or when u nave idab le to finish out a course, in wh ich case full
bricks shall be placed at the corners, the bats being placed in the interior
of the course.
Piers and walls may be bu ilt of solid brick work, or may consist of
a brick shell backed with concrete or other su itable material as specified
on the plans. None b ut expert brick layers shall be employed on the
work and all details of the construction shall be in accordance with the
most approved practice and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
work or of Class A concrete and shall conform to the requ irements for
Ashlar Masonry or Concrete Masonry as the plan may ind icate. When
not shown upon the plans, concrete shall be used.
Section 10
STEEL STRUCTURES
FABRICATION
HI GHWAY B RIDGE 5
2.10.B
2.10.3 MATERIALS
IAl Strufurol Steel
(J )
Genero I
Steel shall be furnished according to the following specifications. Unless otherwise specified, structural carbon steel and
structural rivet steel shall be furnished.
(2I
St ructu re I Steel
Eyeb n rs
13 )
A 440)
High-Strength Low Alloy Structural I\Manganese Vanadrum Steel, AASHO M188 (ASTM A441)
High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels
of Structural Q u at ity, AA SHO M223 (ASTM A572)
High Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 50,000
psi Minimum Yield Point to 4 In. Thick, AASH O M222
/ ASTM A588J
conform to :
High-Strength Low Alloy Structural MangaRl9e Vanadrum Steel, AASHO M188 IASTM A441 )
High lstrength Low Alloy Structural Steel, AASHO M161
(ASTD\I A242) of a weldable quality.
High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels o:I
Structural Q ualitj', Gi-ades 42, 45, and 50, AASHO M223
(ASTM A572 with Su pplementary Requirement 52 of
AASHO M223 mandatory)
CONSTRUC TION
2.10.3
mandatory)
(5)
A 440)
High Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel, AA SHO M161
(ASTM A242)
High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels
High-Strength Low Alloy 5tructural Manganese Vanadium Steel, AASHO M188 (ASTM A441)
shall conform to :
High-Yield-Strength,
Quenched and Tempered Alloy
Steel Plate, su itable for welding, ASTM A 514
High-Strength Alloy Steel Plates, Quenched and Tempered
for pressure vessels, ASTM A517
Quenched and tempered alloy steel structural shapes and
seamless mechanical tubing, meeting all of the mechanical and
chemical requirements of AS 14/A517 steel, except that the
specified maximum tensile strength may be 140,000 psi for
structural shapes and 145,000 psi for seamless mechanical tub-
A502, grade 2) .
(9)
High Sfrength
Bolts
308
HI GHWAY B RIDGE 5
three radial lines and the symbol A325, and nuts are marked
Welded
2.10.3
Width Across
Thread
y]gj
lUei8
Width Across
!ength
Height
Ci rcular Washers
Over 2 to
2D /
D +'$
.097
.122
.177
. l77
.136
. 177
.136
.136
.136
.136
.177
.177
.177
.177
.l86
.l78
.178
.l77
.28
.28
.34
I:6
l:6
1:6
1 :6
Dimensio us in inches
May be ex cee6ed by /j in .
9 in. nom i n at
/j i n. nom i nal
Tensile Strength
Yield Strength *
Elongation
Reduction of area
As determined bz a 0.2 9o
off8et method.
(min.)
(min.)
(min.)
(min. )
60,000
Ii0,000
20 in in 2 inches
50i
IBJ
Eteel Costings
for
Highwoy
Bridges
or
Mild-to-Medium-
CONSTRUCTION
2.10.3
163
Workmonship
ond Finish
Cleo ning
I El
finish
Cleoning
Malleable castings shall be true to pattern in form and dimensions, free from pouring faults, s;onginess, cracks, blow holes, and
other defects in positions affecting their strength and value for the
service intended.
Cleoning
All castings must be sandblasted or otherwise effectively
cleaned of scale and sand so as to present a smooth, clean, and
uniform surface.
IGJ
Bronze Cosfings
B 100) .
IHI
Sheet Leod
Sheet lead shall conform to the requirements for Common Desilverized Lead of the Specihcation for Pig Lead, AASHO M 112 (ASTM
B 29) .
Il J
Sheet
Zinc
Sheet zinc shall conform to the requ irements for Type II o:I the
Specifications for Rolled Zinc, AASHO M 113 (ASTM B 69) .
I JJ
Golvonizing
210.3
IKJ
CONSTRUCTION
Convos ond Red Leod for Bedding Mosonry Plotes ond Equivolenf
Bearing Areos
The canvas shall conform to the Standard 5pecifications for
Numbered Cotton Duck and Army Duck, AASHO I\I 166 (ASTM D
230) , and to the weight specified. The red lead paint shall conform to
the specifications for paint for metals, Article 2.14.2.
ILI Preformed Fobric Pods
The pre:formed fabric pads shall be composed of multiple layers of 8ounce cotton duck impregnated and bound with high-quality natural rubber
or of equivalent and equally suitable materials compressed into resilient pads
of uni:form thickness. The number of plies shall be such as to produce
the specified thickness, after compression and vu lcan izing. The finished
pads shall withstand compression loads perpendicular to the plane of the
laminations of not less than 10,000 pounds per square inch without
detrimental reduction in thickness or extrusion.
2.10.4
STORAGE OF MATERIALS
shall be kept fi-ee from dirt, grease and other foreign matter, and shall be
protected as far as practicable from corrosion.
2. J 0.5
IA J
Moteriol
Beams and girde1"s mtly be curved by either continuous or Vtype heating as approved by the E ngineer. For the continuous method,
a strip along the edge of the to; and bottom flange shall be hPated
s imu ltaneous ly ; the strip shall be of sufficient width and
temperature to obtain the required curvature. For the V-type heating,
the top and bottom flanges shall be heated in truncated triang It lar or
wedgeshaped areas having their base along the flange edge and
spaced at regular intervals along each flange ; the
HI GHWAY
B RI l9tifi IS
shall extend past the v'eb for a distance equ:il to '/s of the flange or
3 inches, whichever is less. The truncated ti iangular pattern shall
have an included angle of approximately 15 to 30 degrees, but the
base of the triangle shall not exceed 10 inches. \'ariations in the
patterns prescribed above may be made with the approval of the
Eng ineer.
For both types of heating, the flange edges to be heated are
those that will be on the inside of the horizontal curve alter cool
ing. Heating both inside and outside flange surfaces is only mandatory when the flange thickness is 1?i inches or greater, in which
case, the two sur:faces shall be heated concurrently. The maximum
tcmperatu re shall be as prescribed below.
1 3I
Te in p erci t tire
The girder may be heat-curved with the web in either a vertical or a hor izontal position. When curved in the vertical position,
the girder must be braced or supported in such a manner that the
tendency of the girder to dePect laterally during the heatcurving
process will not cause the girder to overturn.
When curved in the horizontal position, the gir6er must be
su pported near its ends and at intermediate points, if required, to
obtain a uniform curvature ; the bending stress in the flanges due
to the dead weight of the girder must not exceed the usual allowable design stress. When the girder is positioned horizontally for
heating, intermediate safety .catch blocks must be maintained at
the midlength of the girder within 2 inches of the flanges at all
CONSTRUCTION
1 6 I Co in ber
Girders shall be cambered before heat curving. Camber for
rolled beams may be obtained by heatcambering methods approved
by the Engineer. For plate girders, the web shall be cut to the
prescribed camber with su itable allowance for shrinkage due to
cutting, vv elding, and heat curving." However, subject to the
approval of the Engineer, moderate deviations from specified
camber may be corrected by a carefully supervised application of
heat.
1 7I
Meosuremenf
of Curvoture
o nd Co in ber
Horizontal curvature and vertical camber shall not be meinsured :for final acceptance before all welding and heating operations
are completed and the flanges have cooled to a uniform temperature. Horizontal curvature shall be checked with the girdei in the
vertical position by measuring off-sets from a string line or wire
HIGHWAY BRIDGE S
2.10.7
type bolts shall be su bpu nched or subdrilled /is inch smaller than the
nominal diameter of the bolt and reamed assembled or to a steel template or, after assembl ing, dri fled from the solid at the option of the
Fabr icator. In any case the finished holes shall prov ide a driving fit as
specified on the plans or in the special provisions.
2. 10. 10
CONSTRUCTION
317
qu ired according to Article 2.10.7) and subsequentl y reamed wh ile assembled or to a steel template, as required by Article 2.10.14. All ho]ee for
floor beam and stri nger field end connections shall be subpu nched and
reamed to a steel template or reamed while assembled. Reaming or drilling :fu 11 size of field connection holes through a steel template shall be done
after the template ha9 been located with utmost care as to position and
angle and firmly bolted in place. Templates used for reaming matching
members, or the opposite faces of a single member, shall be exact duplicates. Templates used for connections on like parts or members shal I be
so accu rately located that the parts or members are duplicates and require
no match-marking.
For any connec tion, in lieti of su bp unch ing and rearing or subcl ril Iin and rea in ink , the M:th neater may, at hic option, drill holes f iI 11
size with all th rednesses of niatoriil asscrub led in Jroper port tion.
If add it ional sub-punching arid teaming is requ ired, it shall be specified in the special provisions or on the plans.
cylindrical pin *8 inch smaller in diameter than the nominal size of the
punched hole may be entered perpend icu far to the face of the member,
without drifting, in at least 75 per cent o:I the contiguous holes in the
same plane. If the requirement is not f u lfilJed, the bad ly punched pieces
will be rejected. II any hole will not pass a pin /i inch smaller i n diameter
than the nominal size of the punched hole, th is will be cause for rejection.
318
9cribed normal to the longitudinal :ixis of the member and the tem-
CON ST RUCTION
2. 10.14
319
plates at both ends of the member shall be accurately located from one
of the milled ends or scribed lines.
ID J Progressive Chord Assembly
Progressive Chord Assembly shall convict of aesembl ing contiguous
chord members in the manner spec ifiod for Full Chord Assembly and in
camber.)
Each assembly, inclu ding camber, alignment, accuracy of holes and
fit of milled joints, shall be approved by the Engineer before reaming ie
commenced.
A camber diagram shall be furnished the Engineer by the Fabricator showing the camber at each panel point of each truse, arch rib,
cont in uoue beam l me, plate girder or rigid frame. When the shop assembly is Full Truss or Girder Assembly or Special Complete Structure
Assembly, the camber d iagram shall show the camber measured in assembly. When any of the other methods of shop assembly is used, the
camber d iagram shall show calculated camber.
2.10.16 MATCH-MARKING
Connecting parts assembled in the shop for the purpose of reaming
holes in field connections shall be match-marked, and a diagram showing
such marks shall be furnished the Engineer.
2.10.J 7 RIVETS
The Size of rivets c:illed for on the plans shall be the size before heating. Rivet heads shall be of standard shape, unless otherwise specified,
and of uniform size for the same diameter of rivet. They shall be full,
neatly made, concentric with the rivet holes, and in full contact with the
surfaces of the member.
with an ample surplus to replace all rivets burned, lost or cut out.
Generol
Unfinished Bolts
Unfinished bolts shall be furnished unless other types are specified.
I CJ Turned Boils
The s u rface of the body of turned bolts shall meet the ANSI
rori ghness rating value of 126. Heads and nuts shall be hexagonal with
standard dimensions for bolts of the nominal size specified or the next
Ribbed Bolts
Generol
This article covers the assembly of structural joints using AASHO
CONSTRUCTION
fasteners, tightened to a high tension. The bolts are used in holes conforming to the requ irements of Articles 2.10.7, 2.10.8, and 2.10.9.
I BJ
Article 2.10.3. ( A) 9.
I CJ
Bolted Ports
The slope of surfaces of bolted parts in contact with the bolt head
and nut shall not exceed 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the
bolt axis. Bolted parts shall fit solidly together when assembled and
shall not be separated by gaskets or any other interposed compreesible
material.
When assembled, all joint sur:faces, including those adjacent to the
bolt heads, nuts or washers, shall be free of scale, except tight mill
ecale, and shall also be free of dirt, loose scale, burrs, other foreign
material and other defects that would prevent solid seating of the parts.
Contact surfaces within friction-type joints shall be free of oil,
paint, lacquer or rust inh ibitor, except that hotdip galvan wing will be
permitted, provided that contact surfaces are scored by wire brushing
oi blasting af ter galvan izin g and prior to assembly. The wire brushing
ti eatment shall be light application of manual or power brushing that
marks or scores the surface but removes relatively little of the zinc
coating. The blasting treatment shall be a light brush-off treatment
which will Jiroduce a dull gray appearance. However, neither treatment
should be severe enough to produce any break or discontin It ity in the
zinc su rf ace.
When specified on the plans galvanized high strength structural
bolts shall be f u rn ished and installed in con1'ormance with ASTM
A 32571A, in which a special lubricant is required for the ntits and
additional test requ irements are specified for a Still size assembled Joint.
IDI Instollofion
( ) Bolt Tension
Each fastener shall be tightened to provide, when all fasteners
in the joint are tight, at least the minimum bolt tension 9hown in
Table 2.10.20A for the size of fastener ueed.
Threaded bolts shall be tightened with properly calibrated
wrenches or by the turn-of-nut method. If required because of
procedure may be done by turning the bolt while the nut is prevented from rotating. Impact wrenches, if used, shall be of adequate capacity and sufficiently supplied with air to perform the
Woshers
BOLT TENSION
Minimum Bolt Tension ( 1)
Bolt Size, in inches
'I
8
in pounds
AASHO M 164
( 1) Equal to the p roof load ( length measurement method ) given in AASHO II i 64 ( ASTh1
A 326 ) .
Where an outer face or the bolted part9 has a slope o:I more
than 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis, a smooth
beveled waeher shall be used to compensate :for the lack of
parallelism.
(3I
When the turn-of-nut method is used to provide the bolt tension specified in paragraph ( D) 11) , there shall first be enough bolts
brought to a snug tight condition to insure that the parts of the
jo int are brought into full contact with each other. Snug tight is
defined as the tightness atttained by a few impacts of an impact
2.10.20
C ON ST RUC T I ON
needing 8 diameters
or 8 inches
8 diameters or 8 inches
bolts
( 2 ) Fo r coarse thread heavv hexagon struc tural bolte of all sizee and lengths an d heavy
hexagon sew i-fi n ished nute.
( 2 ) Nut rotation is rotation relative to bolt regardless of the element ( nut o r bolt ) being
turned. T'oJerance on rotation
) over an d nothing under.
( 3 ) Slope 1 :20 maximum.
( 4 ) Bolt length ie measured f rom undera ide of head to extreme end of bolt.
IS )
Inspection
(E) (3) (e ) .
wrench and its /ob irisp ectin9 for que Lo 10 percent of the bolts,
but not less than two bolts, selected at random in each connection.
If no nut or bolt head is turned by thi9 application of the yob
inspecting torque , the connection shall be accepted as properly
tightened. If any nut or bolt head is turned by the application of
the )o b inspect/np torque, this torque shall be applied to all bolts in
the connection, and all bolts whose nut or head is turned by th )ob
/napectnp torpuc shall be tightened and reinspected, or alternatively, the Fabricator or Erector, at his option, may retighten all of
the bolts in the connection and then resubmit the connection for the
specified inspection.
(4) The procedures for inspecting and testing the lock-pin and
collar I:asteners and their installation to assure that the required preload tension is provided shall be as approved by the Engineer.
2.10.21 RIVETING
Rivets shall be heated un iformly to a light cherry red color and shall
be driven while hot. Any rivet whose point is heated more than the remainder shall not be driven. When a rivet is ready for driving, it shall be
Length may be an y length representative of bolts used in the structure.
2.10.21
CONSTRUCTION
free from slag, scale and other adhering matter. Any rivet which, In the
opinion of the Engineer, is scaled excessively, will be rejected.
All rivets that are loose, burned, badly formed, or otherwise de:fective
shall be removed and replaced with sati9f actory rivets. Any rivet whose
head is defective in size or whose head is driven off center will be con
sidered defective and shall be removed. Stitch rivets that are loosened
by driving of adjacent rivets shall be removed and replaced w ith satisfactory rivets. Gaulk ing, recuppin g or double gunning of rivet head9 will not
be permitted.
Shop rivets shall be driven by direct-acting rivet machine9 when
practicable.
Approved beveled rivet sets shall be used for forming rivet heads on
sloping surfaces. \Vhen the use of a direct-acting rivet machine is not
practicable, pneu matic hammers of approved size shall be used. Pneumatic
bucking tools will be required when, in the opinion of the Engineer, the
size and length of the rivets warrant their use.
R1VClt9 may be driven cold provided their diameter is not over /g inch.
Visuol
Inspection
ond
Repoir of
Plote
Cut Edges
in lh o
if i met i rin .
thP platecut edge and the depth is the distance that the discontinuity
extends into the plate from the cut edge.
Repair Required
plored.
than ,'.
Any discontinuity over 1 in length
than 1.
Applicable
provisions,
as
2.10.22
C O N S'I'RU C TION
F i gu rg
2.IO. 2 2 B
2.10.23 WELDS
I Al
Generol
Filler
Metol
All electrodes for manu:it shielded met:it-arc weldlng shall conform to the lowhydrogen classification i equ moments of the latest edition of the American Welding Societys Fi fler I\fetal Specification AWS
2.10.23
C O N STRU CT I ON
been satisfactorily tested in lieti of the test requ ired provided the same
welding procedu re is used.
Electrodes eonfo rming to AWS AS. 1 shall be purchased in heilTlCliCal ly sealed containers or shall be d i-ied :for at least two hours between 450 and 500 F bef oi o they are used. El ectrodes cont ormi ng to
AWS AS. 5 shall be pu i-chsed in hermetically sealed containers or shall
strength lower than that of the E 100 clssi fixation shall be dried :f or
1 hour 15 minutes at a temperalu re of 800 F 25
before
being
redried before
ii se. E lectrodes
which
have been wet shill not be used. Electi-odes shall be redried no more
than one time.
Flux used f or submerged arc welding shall be non-hygroscopic, dry
and free of contamination ft ore dirt, mill scale, or other foreign material. All flux shall be pu rchased in moisture-proof packages capable o:I
beinp stored under normal cond iti ons for at least six months without
such storage affect in g its v\ eld ing ch aracter istics or vv eld properties.
Fltix from packages damaged in transit or handling shall be discarded
or shall be diied before use at a mi manure temperature of 250 F :f oi
one hour. Flux shall be placed in the d i spens ing system immediately
u pon opening a package. ID flux is used from an open package or an
open hopper that has been inoper ative for :four hours or more, the top
one inch shall be discarded. Fltix that has been wet shall not be used.
Flux fused in weld irig shall not be reused.
( 1) E lectrodes, and flux electrodes combinations.
Gas Metal -A re
AWS A6. 18
E70 S -ID , 2,3, G
FI ux Coro1 Arc
A .
AWS A 5. 1 or A 5.ii
E7 0 IG , 18 or 2 8
AWS A6 . 17
I'G 1 , 1C2, FG3
o r F64-EXXX
or E70U-1
WS AS. 1 or AS.5
E701fi, 18 or 28
AWS AS. 17
F71, F72, F73
or I? 4-E X X X
AWS A6. 18
705-113, 2,3, G
or E70U-1
AWS 5.20
E70T- 1. 5 o i Ii
AWS A 6 . 5
E 11018-M
Grade F110
Grade E110 S
Ct ade E110T
(1) In iolnts involving bssc ruetn]s o[ di de:ent yicli points ur struth, nHcr mts]
(2) Electrodes and Fluxelecti-ode combinations for unpainted applications. For exposed bare u npainted applications of
A 588 steel requ iring depos iled weld metal with atmospheric corrosion resistance and coloring characteristics similar to that of
the base metal, the filler metal shall conform to the requirements
listed in T:ible 4. 14 of AWS D1. 172.
prov ided the last three layers for shielded metal-arc, gas metal-arc,
or fluxcored arc welding or the last two layers for submerged-arc
w.eld ing are depos ited with one of the filler metals specified in the
above table.
This procedure may also be used where the weld is made from
one side on a backing strip which will be removed, providing the
same number of layers are deposited against the backing strip
with a filler metal specified in the I:ible above.
The weld shall be ground flush with the edge of the material.
C ON 5TRUC T I ON
I\I INI MUM PREHEAT
AND
INTEn
A sS TEMPERATURE '
\Velding Process
Shielded Metal-Arc Welding
Thickness of
Thickest Point
at Point of
Welding-Inches
Submerged A re
Arc Welding
Flux
AASHO M188
(ASTM A36) ;
AASHO M161
(AS'TM A242) ,
AASHO M188
(ASTM A441) ;
AASHO M22? ;
AASHO M222
ASTM
A614/517
welding with
Carbon Steel
Wire, Alloy
ASTM
A514/517
Welding shal I not be lone w hen the ambient temJerature is lower th:in 0 F. When th o bile
in otal is below the temio ritu re I is ted to r th c vv-eIcl in j J re cess bet nq us el :in I the th icIn ess of
in:rtcrial being wet ded , it sh all b c p r cheated ( excent as othe rivi se n roviIecl ) i n nich man ne r that
the en rface of th o ;a rts on vvh i ch vwI d metal is be i n I ep os itc'1 are at o r alirv'e the sp eei fioI
in in imum rem j oratu re Ior :i ilista n ce eg ua1 to th c th i ck n ess of the ja rt be i up wcI Ie1, 6 ut not
less th an 3 i n ches , both latera JIy an I i n cdv an ce of the weld i up. P reh eat an cl i ntcin:i.ss temi o natures run st be sufli ci ent to p revent crack to rmation . Temper:itu re abov e th c in in inn u in s hxv n
may be requi ro1 Kor h ighly res tra i ne it welds. For- Ali 14/A5l7 steel the mlx imum p rohopt :tnI
inter;ass tom jeraf ure shall n ct exceed 4 0 0 F to i' th i ck ne s see u i to UJ in. i net us iv o, a n I 4 6 0 fi
for reate r th i ck n es see. Heat in put whe n wet d mg ASI 4/A 51'? steel s hal I not ex :oc1 II: o steel
p roluce rs r-ccomm e n cI a tie n . T he use of str i rigor beads to avoi1 eve rh calm v is r ego mm en Jel.
Wei d ink s hall be c:irricI ccnt i n unit sI y to com pleti on or to :i io in I th:it w ill i n s u re I reeI inn I rom
crack my before the j o int is allowed to cool below th c in in inn nan sj ocified reheat :incI i n te r;:iss
tern p e ratu re.
tacker, anrl for each project, stating the name of the welder, welding
operator or tacker, the name and title of the person who conducted
the examination, the kind of specimens, the position of welds, the
resu Its of the tests and the date of the examination. Such a certification of prequalification may also be accepted as proof that a welder,
welding operator and tacker on held welding is qtial ified, iI the con
tractor who submits it is properly staff e1 and equipped to conduct such
an examination or if the examining and testing is done by a recognized
agency which is staffed and PQi11() ed f oi such purpose.
In addition, evidence must be presented, sati sf actory to the Engineer, that each welder, welding operator and tacker has hatl at least
three months satisfactory exper ience welding A 514 / AS 17 steel. In
lieu of such expei ience, each welder, welding operator and tacker shall
be instructed in welding AS 14/A517 steel. The instruction course shall
meet the approval of the Engineer as adequ:ite to result in a working
knowledge of the procedures for v'elding AS 14/ AS 17 steel.
IEJ
Procedure
Quolif!cotion
21023
GON STRUCT I ON
I FI
Inspection of Welds
( I )
Cenero I
(2)
R odiogr o p h ic Testing
PROCEDURE QUALFICATION
FILLET WELDED TEE JOINT TEST
inch
FI GUR E 2. IO. 3 A
2.10.23
CON STRUCTION
(c) Should a rdiograph indicate rejectable defects, the :ireas
on each side of the defect shall be radiographed to determine the extent of the defective work.
(d) Detective welds shall be rac1iogr:iphed after repair.
( e) The inspector shall view the making of the radiographs,
examine and interpret the radiographs rind the techni
cians i-eports, approve satisfactory welds, disapprove or
re.ject u nsatisf actory welds, approve sati sf actory methods
proposed my the contractor for i epaii ing di sapproved
welds and inspect the preparat ion and reweld ing of disappi oved welds. The in spector shall recoi d the location
and findings of all radiographic inspections, together with
descriptions of any repairs made.
of any repairs made.
( 3 ) /\/\ci (j rief ic Per rt ie I e Tesf i n(j
(a 4 For- A 514 / A 517 steel, fillet welds and all other welds ex
paragraph
2) above, shall be 100 %c magnetic particle
tested. Defective welds shall be retested after repair.
(b) The inspector shall view the making of the magnetic
particle inspections, examine and interpret the magnetic
particle p:itterns, approve satisfactory welds, disapprove
or reject tinsatisf actoi y welds, approve satisfactory methods pi oposed by the Contractor for repairing disapproved
welds, and inspect the preparation and rexveld i rig of disappi-oved welds. The inspector shall recoi-d the locations
of inspected areas and defects found by magnetic particle
inspection, together with a description of any repairs
made.
(3) Stu ds shall not be painted or galvan ized. The studs shall be
free from excessive rust, scale, rust pits and oil at the time of welding
as determined by the Engineer. The beam surface to which the studs are
welded shall be free from excessive mill scale, rust, d irt, paint, grease
or any other material wh ich might impair the quality of the weld. When
necessary to obtain satisfactory welds, the areas on the beam, girder
or plate to which the studs are to be welded shal I be wire-brushed,
peened, prick-punched or ground free of scale or ruet.
(4 ) Welding shill not be done when the ambient temperature is
below 0F, or when the surface is wet or exposed to rain or snow.
15 ) When the tempcratu re of the base metal is below 0F, preheating will be required in accordance wi th AWS Spec ification9 and two
studs in each 100 studs welded shall lie bent 45 in addition to the first
two bent as specified in paragraph IG ( 13) . Preheating must be to
70F and temperature of the preheated base metal shall be maintained
between 32F and 70F d uring the weld in g operation.
(6) While in operation the welding gun shall be held in position
without movement until the weld metal has sol idified.
(7) An arc sh ield Iferru Ie) of heat-resistant ceramic or other
material shall be furnished with each stud. The material shall not be
detrimental to the welds or cause excessive slag and shall have sufficient
strength so as not to crumble or break due to thermal or structural
shock before the weld is completed.
Ferrules furnished with shop welded studs shall be removed in the
shop prior to delivery, and ferrules furnished with field welded studs
shall be removed be:fore placing concrete slabs.
(8) Flux for welding shall be :f urnished with each stud, either
attached to the end of the stud or combined with the arc shield for
automatic application in the welding operation.
(9) Only qualified studs shall be used. A stud to be qualified shall
have passed the tests prescribed in Paragraph (12) of this article. The
arc shield used in production shall be the same as used in the qualification tests. Qualification of the studs, prior to use under the contract,
shall be at the expense of the manufacturer.
( 10) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer :for approval, before installation, information on the studs to be furnished as follows :
(a) The name of the manufacturer.
(b) A detailed description of the stud and arc shield.
(c) A certification from the manufacturer that the stud is
qualified as specified in paragraph (12) .
(d) A notarized copy o:I the qu ali fication test report ae certified by the testing laboratory.
( 11 ) The studs, after welding, shall be free :from any defect or
substance which would interfere with their :function as shear connectors.
( 12) Stud Weldabil ity Qualification Procedure
(at Purpose
The purpose o:I this procedure is to prescribe weldabil ity
tests that will qualify a shear connector stud for welding under
shop or field cond it ions. The tests may be performed by a
university, independent laboratory or other testing agency
2. 10.2?
C O N STRIJ CTI ON
H IGHW AY B RID GE S
STUD SHEAR
CONNECTOR
DIMENSIONS AND
TOLERANCES
64
M in.
2.10.23
CONSTRUCTION
FI CURE
2. IO. 23C
(13) The first two studs v'elded on each beam or girder, after
being allowed to cool, shall be bent 45 O by striking the stud with a
hammer. I:I failure occurs in the weld of either stud, the procedure
shall be corrected and two successive studs successfully welded and
tested before any more studs are welded to the beam or girder. The
Engineer shall be promptly informed of any changes in the welding procedure at any time during construction.
( 14) Studs on which a full 360 O weld is not obtained may, at the
option of the contractor, be repaired by adding a i'a fillet weld in place
of the lack o:I weld, usinp the shielded metal-arc process with lowhydrogen welding electrodes.
2.1 0.23
GONSTRUOTION
required at his expense to make such changes in welding procedure,
welding equ ipment and type of shear connector as necessary .to
Mill wale and extraneous matei ial shal l be removed from the torch
side of AS 14/A517 steel plates along' the lines to be flame cut, when
necessai y to obv itte exe cs swe notched.
All oxygen cutti m shall be in accord an ce with AWS II 1.172, except
thit occas ional notches or gouges in edges of A514 /A517 steel shall not be
repai red by wet d mg except under the lol lowing conditions :
n 1 Cutting defects not more than "i i: inch deep in plate edges
ivh ich will form the Eaces of a groove weld Joint and wh ich w ill
su bseq uentl y be comp letely fused with the weld may be repaired by
welding. Nonmetall ie sti in gers or pipes opening to these edges shall
be removed to a depth of ' inch below the surface by grinding or
ch ipping and the gouge rep i red by weld in g. Laminati on s opening
to these edges shall be i cmoved to a depth of '_ inch below the
st rf ace by grinding and chippiing and the gouge repai red by weld i up.
(b C utti n g defects not more than "i: inch deep in plate edges
vvh ich \v iil form a fillet-w eld ed cornei- .joint shall be i epai red by weldin g only on the pai 1 of the edge ivh ich will become the baying
s ii i-face for the j oint rind the Fusion zone of the fillet weld. The part
of the defect outside the toe of the completed fillet weld shall be
removed by machining or grind in g, and faired with the su rface of
the cut on a bevel of 1 to G or less.
machi n ing or grindi ng except that machine flame cut edges may be used
without such removal if the edges are softened after cutting : I a) by
heating the cut edge un iformly and progress ively to a i-ed heat, visible in
ord in:try shop light ( 1,150 to 1,250 F) to a depth of at least ?i inch ; or
I b) by means of a post heating torch attached to and followin g the cutting torch with the tips, gas pressure, speed of travel, and the distance of
the post heating torch from the kerf i-egulated to the thickness of the
steel. Bend test speci menu US inches wide and of the full thickness of the
material or with th ickness reduced to '?i inch in accordance with Para
graph 6.?. 5 of ASTM A6 and having edges flame cut and flame softened
in accordance with this Article shall meet the bend test requirements
ANSI
ANSI
2,000
1,000
ANSI
500
ANSI
ANSI
ANSI
250
125
15
brought to an even bearing. Where joints are not faced, the opening shall
not exceed Vi inch.
2.10.28
CONSTRUCTION
is required.
open joints.
At web splices, the clearance between the ends of the web plates shall
not exceed /8 inch. The cleara.nce at the top and bottom ends of the web
splice plates shal l not exceed '/i inch.
THICKNES 5 IN INCHES
41
NOTE : Low all or steel i n thicknesses ove r ' mav require hot benli rig: to r small radii.
about 3 times that for structural carbon steel. For brake press
forming, the lowei- die span should be at least 16 times the plate
thickness. Multiple hits are advisable.
ID a shorter i-adius is essential, the plates shall be bent hot at a
2.10.33
EYEBARS
Pin holes may be Pame cut at least two inches smaller in diameter
than the finished pin diameter. All e5'ebars that are to be placed side by
side in the structure shall be securely hastened together in the order that
they will be placed on the pin and bored at both ends while so clamped.
Eyebars shall be packed and match marked for shipment and erection. All
identify in g marks shall be stamped with steel stencils on the edge of one
head of each member after fabrication is completed so as to be visible when
the bars are nested in place on the structure. The eyebars shall be straight
and free from twists and the pin holes shall be accurately located on the
centerline of the bar. The inclination of any bar to the plane of: the truss
shall not exceed is inch to a foot.
The edges of eyebars that lie between the transverse centerline of
their pin holes shall be cut simultaneously with two mechanically operated
torches abreast of each other, guided by a substantial template, in such a
manner as to prevent distortion of the platee.
2. J 0.34
2. 10.34
2.10.39
PILOT AND DRIVING NUTS
Two pilot nuts and two driving nuts :for each size of pin shall be :furnished, unless otherwise specified.
2.10.TO
The Contractor shall give the Engineer ample notice of the beginning
of work at the mill or in the shop, so that inspection may be provided. The
term mill means any rolling mill or :foundry where material for the
work is to be manufactured. No material shall be manufactured, or work
done in the shop, before the Engineer has been so notified.
2.10.4 J
and workman',hip in the mill and shop, and the inspectors snall be aiiowed
free access tc the nece9sary parts of the works.
2.10.42
INSECTORS AUTHORITY
final.
2.J 0.43
WORKING DRAWINGS AND IDENTIFICATION
OF STEEL DURING FABRICATION
fA J Working Drawings
The Contractor shall submit copies of the detailed shop drawings to
the Engineer for approval. Any work done prior to the approval of
these plans shall be at the contractor's risk. When material must be
ordered in advance, specific approval of such an action shall be obtained
by the Contractor prior to placing the order. Shop drawings for eteel
structures shall give full detailed dimensions and sizes of component
part9 O:I the structure and details of all miscellaneous parts, such as
pins, nuts, bolts, rivets, drains, etc.
The Contractor shall expre9sly understand that the Engineers
approval of the working drawings submitted by the Contractor covers
the requirements for strength and detail, and the Engineer a9sumes
no responsibility for errors in d imensions.
IBI Idenfificotion of Steels During Fobricotion
CONSTRUCTION
Shop drawings shall spec ifically identify each piece that is to be
made of steel which is to be other than AASH O M 183 ( ASTM
A36) stPel. Pieces made of different grades of steel shall not be
given the s:true assemb ling or erecting mark, even though they are
of i dentical d i mens ions and detail .
The contractors system of assembly -marking ind ividual piecee,
348
TABLE 2.10.[3
IDEN TIFICATION COLOR CODE S
AASHO M161
AASHO M187
(A 242)
(A 440)
AASHO M223
A 514
A 517
( A 1572)
AAS HO M188
AA SHO M222
(A 441)
(A 588)
Blue
Brown
Yellow
Red
Red and Blue
Grade 42 Green
Grade 45 Green
Grade 6t1 Green
Grade 55 Green
Grade 60
Grade 65
and White
and Black
and Yellow
and Brown
In case it is specified that any part o:I the material is to be paid :for by
accord ance with the contract shall be paid for in accordance with Article
2.10.G4. The cost of testi ng inclu ding equ ipment, handling, supervision,
labor and incidentals for making the tests 9hall be included in the contract
price for the f abrication or fabrication and erection of structural steel,
whichever in the appl icable item in the contract, unless otherwise specified.
2. 10.46
CONSTRUCTION
PAINTING
U nless otherwise shown on the plans or specified, all iron and steel
surfaces shall be cleaned :ind painted in accordance with Section 2.14
PAINTING METAL STRUC i URE S.
ERECTION
2.10.48
IA J
ORTHOTROPIC-DECK BRIDGES
Protection of Deck Plote After Sond Blasting
limits for
orthotropic-deck
brid ge
members
2.10.48
HI GHWAY BRIDGE S
( 1 )
Flotness of Po nets
edges and n ot lii rther subd ivided by any such elements. The pro-
h o
44T
in h
where
II -the least d imens ion in inches along the boundary of the panel
and
T the minimum thickness in inches of the plate comprising the
j:inel
(2)
5tro ig hfness of
fo Co lculoted
The maximum deviation from cletailed straightness or curvature in any direction perpendicular to its length of a longitud inal
stiffener subject to calculated compressive stress, including each
orthotropic-deck rib, shall not exceed :
L
480
where
L= the length of the stiff enei- or rib between cross members, webs,
1 3 I Stroig htness of Tro n sverse Web Stiffeners o nd Of her 5fiReners
not Subject fo Co lculofed Com pressive Stress
The maximum deviation from detailed straightness or curvature in :iny di i cction perpendicu lai to its length of a transverse
web stiffener or other stiffener not s ubject to calculated compressive sti ess shall not exceed :
L
240
L the length of the stiff encr between cross members, webs, or
GONSTRUGTION
2. 10.49
2.10.49
ERECTION OF STRUCTURE
If the su bstructu re and superstructure are bu ilt under separate contracts, the Department will provide the masonry, constructed to correct
lines and elevations and properly finished, and will establish the lines and
elevations required for setting the steel.
The Contractor shall erect the metalwork, remove the temporary constr uct ion, and do all work requ i red to complete the bridge or bridges as
covered by the agreement, including the removal of the old structure or
structures, if stipu lated, all i ri accordance with the plans and these
specifications.
2. J 0.50 PLANS
If the fabrication and erection of the superstructure are done under
separate contracts, the Department will furnish detail plans :for the brid8e
or bridges to be erected, inclu ding shop detail9, camber d iagrams, erection
d iagrams, list of field rivets and bolts, and copy of shipping statements
The Con tractor shall provide the falsework and all tools, machinery
and appliances, incl ud ing drift pins and fitting-up bolts, necessary for the
exped it ions handling of the work.
shall be kept clean and properly drained. Girders and beams shall be
placed upright and shored. Long members, such as columns and chords,
shall be supported on skids placed near enough together to prevent injury
from deflection. If the contract is for erection only, the Contractor ehall
check the material turned over to him against the shipping lists and report
sible for the loss of any material while in his care, or for any damage
caused to it after being received by him.
2. J 0.54
FALSEWORK
The falsework shall be properly designed and su betantially constructed and maintained for the loads which will come upon it. The Con-
tractor, if requ ired, shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval,
plans for falsework or for changes in an existing structure necessary for
maintain in g traffic. Approval of the contractor's plans shall not be considered as relieving the Contractor of any responeibility.
safety of his method or equipment or from carrying out the work in full
accordance with the plans and specifications. No work shall be done until
such approval by the Engineer has been obtained.
masonry.
The strai ghten ing of plates, angles, other shapes and built-up
members, when permitted by the Engineer, shall be done by methods
(hat will not produ cc fracture or other injury. Distoned members shall
be straightened by mechan ical means or, if approved by the Engineer,
by the car-Cful pl anned and super-vised applic:ition of a limited amount
of local ized heat, except that heat strat ghten ing of AS 14/A517 steel
members shall be done only under rigidly controlled procedures, each
CONSTRUCTION
application subject to the approval of the Engineer. In no case shall
the maximum temperature of the AS 14/A517 steel exceed 1125F, nor
shall the temperaf u re exceed S50F at the weld metal or within G inches
Combering
2.10.58
ASSEMBLING STEEL
The parts shall be accurately assembled as shown on the plans and any
match-marks shall be followed. The material shall be cared u lly handled so
that no parts will be bent, broken or otherwise damaged. Hammering
which will inj ure or distort the members shall not be done. Bearing surfaces and surfaces to be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before the
members are assembled. Unless erected by the cantilever method, truss
spans shal l be erected on blocking so as to give the trusscs proper camber.
The blocking shal I be left in place until the tension chord splices are ful ly
riveted or bolted and all other trims connections pinned and bolted. Rivets
or permanent bolts in splices of butt joints of compression members :ind
rivets or permanent bolts in rat lings shall not be driven or tightened until
the span has been swu rig. Splices and field con nections shall have one half
of the holes filled with bolts and cylind rical erection pins (half bolts and
half pins) before riveting or bolting with high-strength bolts. Splices and
connections carryi n g traffic during erection shall have three-f ourths of
the holes so filled.
Fittingup bolts shall be of the same nominal d iameter as the rivets
or high-strength bolts, and cy lindr ical erection pins shall be '/sz inch larger.
2.10.59 RIVETING
Pneumatic hammers shall be used for field riveting, except when the
use o:I hand tools is permitted by the Engineer. Rivets larger than /8 inch
in diameter shall not be driven by hand. Cupfaced dollies, fitting the head
closely to insure good bearing, shall be used. Connections shall be accurately and securely fitted up bet:ore the rivets are driven. Drifting shall be
only such as to draw the parts into position and not sufficient to enlarge
the holes or distort the metal. Unfair holes shall be reamed or drilled.
HIGHWAY BRIDGE 5
2.10.59
Rivets shall be heated uniformly to a light cherry red color and shall be
driven while hot. They shall not be overheated or burned. Rivet heads
shall be full and symmetrical, concentric with the shank, and shall have
:full bearing all around. They shall not be smaller than the heads of the
shop rivets. Rivets shall be tight and shall grip the connected parts securely together. baulking or recu pping will not be permitted. In removing rivets, the surrounding metal shall not be injured ; if necessary, they
diately to the inspector and his approval o:I the method of correction
Department, and shall store the material in the immediate vicinity of the
bridge site as the Engineer may direct. ID: the old structure is to be re-
in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which may
have been damaged during the prosecution of this work, and shall leave
the bridge site and adjacent highway in a neat and presentable condition
satisfactory to the Engineer. All excavated material or falsework placed
21062
CON ST RU C TION
173.0
586.0
1536.0
UP.0
446.0
470.0
Lead, sheet
Zinc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450.0
A 6) .
(c) The weight of castings shall be computed from the dimen-
sions shown on the approved shop drawings, deducting for open holes.
To this weight shall be added 5 per cent allowance :for fillets and overrun. Scale weights may be subs-tituted for computed weights in the
case of castings or of small complex parts for which accurate computations of weight would be difficult.
(d) The w eight of temporary erection bolts, shop and field paint,
boxes, crates and other containers used for shipping, and material9
used for supporting members during transportation and erection,
shall not be included.
(e) In computing pay weight on the basis of computed net
weight the following stipulations in addition to those in paragraphs a,
b, c an d d above shall apply.
The weight shall be computed on the basis of the net finished
dimensions of the parts as shown on the approved shop drawing,
deducting for copes, cuts, clips and all open holes, except rivet and bolt
holes.
2.10. 63
The weight of all rivet heads, both field and shop, shall be in-
Inches
heads, pounds
4
%g
through of all high tensile strength shop bolts shall be included on the
basis of the following weights :
Diameter of Bolt
Inches
Bolts, pounds
The weight shall be figured on the basis of rectangular dimensions for all plates, and ordered over-all lengths for all structural
shapes ; except that (A) v'hen parts can be economically cut in multiples from material of larger dimensions, the computed weight shall
be that of the material from which the parts are cut, and (B) all
table :
$
30
50
100
1
150
IQ
250
l
326
2.10.43
CONSTRUOTION
Under contracts contain ing an item for structural steel, all metal
parts other than metal reinforcement for concrete, such as anchor bolts
and nuts, sh oes, rockers, i ollers, bearing arid slab plates, pins an d nuts,
expansion dams, roadway dra in s and scu ;pers, weld metal, bolts embedded
in concrete, ci adles and brackets, nailing and railing posts, blast plates and
water stops, shall be paid for as structural steel unless otherwise
stipulated.
Payment will be made on a pound-price or a lump 9um basis as requ ired by the terms of the contract, bu t unless stipulated otherwise, it shall
be on a pound-price basis.
The payment in poundprice contracts shall be based on the computed
net weight of metal in the fabricated and erected 9tructurlS Unless it is
provided that payment shall be based on computed gross weight or scale
weight.
For members comprising both carbon 9teel and other special steel or
material, when separate un it prices are provided for same, the weight o:I
each class of steel in each such member shall be separately computed, and
paid :for at the contract unit price therefor.
Full-size members which are tested in accordance with the specifications, when such tests are required by the contract, shall be paid :for at
the same rate as for comparable members for the structure. Members
which fail to meet the contract requ i rement9, and mClmbers rejected as a
result of tests, shall not be paid for by the purchaser.
Section \J
2.1 J .1 GENERAL
Plates shall be of the kind of metal specified in the special provisions
or as shown on the plans.
2. J 1.2 MATERIALS
IAl Bronze Bearing ond Expansion Plotes
tion for Bronze Hastings for Bridges and Tu rntables, AASHO M 107
form to the specifications for such material of the ASTM B 438, Grade
1, Type II or Grade 2, Type I.
Finishing of the rolled plates will not be fQU i red provided they have a
2.11.5 PLACING
Bearing plates shall be accurately set in correct position as shown
on the plans and shall have a u niform bearing over the whole area.
Provision shall be made to keep the plates in correct position as the concrete is being placed.
Payment shall be made at the contract price per pound. Payment shall
incl ude the furnishing of material and all labor and incidental work that
is required.
2.12.1
GONST RUCTION
Section J 2
floors Article 1.3.6. Before fab r mat i on or construction is und ertaken the
Contractor shall submit complete shop and assembly details to the Engineer :for approval.
Protective
Treotment
I Shop Coot I
Open type floors, p ref era bly, shall be ga Ivan ized in acco rdance wi th
the Spec i fi cat ion for Zinc ( Hot-Galvan ized ) Coati n gs on Pt-oducts Fab-
ricated from Rol led, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, P1ites, Ban, and
Strip, AASHO M 111 I ASTM A 123) .
In l ieu of galvanizing, the floor may be painted if specified in the
special prov is ions. The pa int shall be appl ied accord ing to the Specifications for Painti rig Metal Structu res, except that d i ppin g w ill be
permitted. The paint shall be as specified for metal s tr uctu res unless
paint of other type is requ ired by the special provisions.
I CJ
Concrete
All concrete in filled steel grid iloors shall conform to the speeifica-
il@gregatc
Skid Resistonce
The upper edpes of all members f o rmi rig the wearing surface Of
an open type grid floori rig should be fabricated or treated to give the
at the joints
over ther r
and size of the welds shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer, but
in no case shall they be less than the manufacturers stand ards.
The ends of all the main steel members of the slab shall be securely
fastened together at the side?s of the roadway for the f ull length of the
span by means of steel plates or angles welded to the ends of the main
members, o r by thoroughly encasing the ends with concrete.
2. J 2.7 WELDING
All shop and field weld ing shall be done in accordance wi th the current
Specification s of the American Welding Society for Welding Highway and
Railway B ridges unless these I AA SH O ) Speci fixation s conflict with the
AWS Specificat ions, in which case these ( AAS HO) Specifications shall
govern.
Surfaces to be welded shall be free from paint, grease, loose scale,
rust and other material that will prevent a proper weld. A th i n coating
of linseed oil, with out pigment, need not be removed. Any clinkers or
slag caused by flame cutting or other causes shall be removed before
welding.
2.12.8
CONSTRUCTION
with a torch to a su ffic ten I temperature so that all me tall ics in the paste
are melted when appl red to the heated s u rface. Extreme care shall be
taken to see that the galvan ized s urfaces are n ot damaged by the torch.
The flux in the pa.ste will cause a black substance to appear on the surface of th e coatecl parts, and th i s black s u bstance shall be removed by
wipin g off wi th waste or by the q u ick; app I icati on of cold water.
provided wi th bottom forms of metal or wood to retain the c one rete filler
without excess we leakage.
If metal form strips are used they shall fit ti ghtly on the bottom
flanges of the floor members and be placed in short len gths so :is to
extend only about 1 inch onto the edge of each s u pport, bu t in a 11 cases
the forms shall be s uch as w i 11 resu lt in adeq u ate bearing of slab on
the support.
The concrete shall be mixed, placed and cured in accordance with
the requ iremen is of Section 2.4. The concrete shall be thorough ly compacted by vi brati ng the steel grid floor. The v i brati n g device and the
manner of operating it shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
sary :for the sat1.s factory completion of the work. Payment wi 11 be made
on the basis of the number of square feet of steel grid floor complete in
place, unless otherwise spec i fied.
Section 13
RAILINGS
2.13.1 GENERAL
Railings for bri dges sha Il include all work constructed above the top
H IGHW A Y
8G2
II 1t119tiL i:5
retain ing walls shall include all work above the top of wall, or if used, top
of cu rb or top of s i deivalk. The item shall incl ude the fu rn ishing of all
material, equ ipment, tools, supplies and labor' necessary for the proper
construction of the raili n g as shown on the plans or as provided in the
special provisions. Payment w ill be as shown on the plans or in the special
prov isions.
METAL RAILING
2.1 3.4 CONSTRUCTION
Fabr ication and erection shall be done in accordance with the requ mements of Section 2.10. In the case of welded rat l in gs, all exposed
joints shall be fin ished by grinding or filing after weld in g to give a neat
appearing j ob.
Metal rail i rigs shall be carefully ad j us ted prior to fixing i n place to
shop
shall
CONCRETE RAILING
2.1 3.6 GENERAL
the
span
sell
2. 13.8
C ON STRU C'TI ON
JOINTS
for
the
par-
ticular class of work involved. The woi k shall be lone in acco rdance with
the detailed plans, the woi kmanship shall be first class in ever ' Jiirticu far,
and the fin ished construct ion sh all le neat in appea rance and true to line
an d grade.
WOOD RAILING
2.1 3.J 3 GENERAL
Wood railings shall be cont trusted according to the requ irements of
Sections 2.20 and 2.21.
Section
2. 1 4. 1 GENERAL
2. J 4.2 MATERIAL
IAJ
Shop Coot
I Prime Coot J
The shop or prime coat of paint for metal shall be a red lead paint
and shall conform to the Specification for- Red Lead
Ready-Mixed
Paint M 72.
Red lead plgment in the dry (orm or as a paste in oil shall conform
to ASTM D 83. The 97 grade shall be specified for dry pigment.
2.14.2
CON ST RU C TI O N
As en alte rnative
or graph ite paint, or colored green, brown or dark gray, the first field
coat shall be a red lead par nt as specified for the shop coat, I inted 1ig ht
broWn as reQu i rel, with lamp lilaek i n an amount not to exceed '/ po und
per gallon of l i nseed or l.
When the fin ished coat is to be wh ite or g ray, a fi rst field coat
c onto rant n g to thi' Spec ificat i on to r Wh ite and T in ted Ready-M ixed
Paint ( Lead and Zinc Base) , AASHO M 70 may be used in lieu of red
lead paint. The paint shall be tinted as d irected by the E ngineer.
ICI
than two field coats, is speci fied in At-ticle 2.14.2. The color shall be as
sufficientl)'
Spraying
Power spraying equ ipment shall apply the paint in a fine, even
spray without the addition of any thinner. In cool weather, the paint
may be warmed to red uce the v i scosity for use. Such warming shall be
accompl ished by heating the paint containers in water or by placing
is ready
2.14.9
CONSTRUCTION
faces for ;ainting, the par nting shall be deferred as long as possible
Before pa i n tin g galvan i zed su rfaces they shall be trea ted as fol low.s
In 1 gallon of soft water dissolve 2 ounces each of copper
chloride, copper nitrate, and real cmmon iac, then add 2 ounces of
commerci a l mu r iat ie ac id. Th is should be done in an earthen or
glass vessel, never in tin or other metal receptacle. Apply the solu-
tion with a wi cfc flat bru sh to I h e gtilvan ized su rface, after which it
Generol
Surfaces of metal to be pa in ted shall be thoroughly cleaned, re-
other foreign
su bstan ces. Un ie.ss clean m g is to be done by blast clean ing, all weld
areas, before clei n mg is begu n, shall be neutral ized with a proper
chem ical, after which it shall be the roughly rinsed with water
Th ree methods of clean in g are ;rovided herein . Any of these
method s may be used u nless otherwise spec ified.
Method A Hond Cleaning
The rem va1 of rust, scale and dirt shall be done by the use of
metal brushes, sci-ape re, ch reels, hammers or other effective means. Oi I
and grease shall be i emoved by the use of a suitable effective solvent.
Bristle or wood fiber brushes shall be used for removing loose d ust.
IB J
IC J
blast method. The blast clean ing shall remove all mi 11 scale and other
substances down to the bare metal. Special atten tion shall be given to
the clean ing of corners and reentr:int angles. Before painting, ail
metallic shot and prit or sand shall be removed from the su rfaces. The
cleaning shall be approved by the Engineer pi-ior to painting. The material shall be par uted before rust forms.
Blast clean ing should be performed with SAE No. 5-330 shot or
smaller, SAE No. G-25 grit or smaller, or dry sand passing through a
16 mesh screen, U.S. sieve series.
IDI Method C Flome Cleaning
Unless otherwise provided in the su pplemental spec ificati ons, all
metal, except the inside surfaces of boxed members and other surfaces
which will be i nacccssible to the flame cleaning operation after the
368
ivh ich have an oxygen to acetylene ratio of at least one. The inner
cones of these flames shall have a ratio of length to port diameter of
at least 8 and shall be not more than 0. 15 inch center to center. The
oxyacety lene flames shall be traversed over the surfaces of the steel
i n such manner an d at such speed that the surfaces are dehydrated ;
and d irt, rust, loose scale, scale in the form of blisters or scabs, and
st milar fore ign matter are breed by the rapid, intense heating by
the flames. The flames shall not be traversed so slowly that loose
scale or other foreign matter is fused to the surface of the steel.
The nu mber, arran ge ment and manipulation of the flames shall be
such that al I parts of the surfaces to be painted are adequately
cleaned and dehydrated.
(3) Pt-omptly after the applic at ion of the flames, the surfaces
of the steel shall be wire brushed, hand scraped whe rever necessary,
and then swept a nd dusted to remove all free material an d foreign
particles. Compressed at r shall not be used for this operati on.
(4) Paint shal I be applied promptly at ter the steel has been
cleaned an d wh il e the temperature of the steel is .stil1 above that of
the su rrou n d i ng atmosph ere, so that there w ill be no recon densati on
of moisture on the cleaned surfaces.
IE I Surfaces lnoccessible After Assembly
Unless therw i se provided, the inside surfaces of boxed members
2. 14.11
CONSTRUCTION
pi ven
one
coat
of
approved paint after i I has been accepted by the in spector and before it
is sh ipped from the plant.
Surfaces n ot i n contact but inaccessible afte r assembly or erect ion
shall be pa i n ted th reo coats. The shop contac I su rf aces sh all n ot be
painted. Field contact s urfaces shal l rece we a shop cost of pa int, except
contact en rfaces of h Uh streng th bol ted, friction type joints, and ma in
spt ices for chords of tru rics and large girder spl ices involv ing run ltiple
th i ckn ess e s of material vv here a shop Coat of par nt won Id make erection
d ifficu It. F ield contact ski rf aces n ot painted w i th the shop coat shall be
given a coat of approved lacq uer o r other p roteet we coating if i t is
expected that there will be a pro longed per rod of exposu re before erection.
Su rfaces wh ich w ill be in cntact vv ith cone rete shall n ot be painted.
Structural steo I wh ich is t u be welded shall not be painted before
weld i rig is complete. I I i t is to be welded on I y in the tab ricati n g shop
and s u bseq u e ntly erected by bolting, i I shall rece we one coat of par nt after
shop weld ing is fin i shed. Steel xvh ich is to be field welded shall be given
one coat of boil ed l in seed oil or other approved protective coating at ter
shop weld i n g an d shop fabricat i on i s completed.
Su rfaces of i ron an d steel castings, ei ther milled or fin ished, shall
be given one coat of par nt.
With the except i on of abu It i rig joints and base plates, mach incmi shed su rf aces shall be coated as soon as practi cable after be i rig accepted, wi th a hot mixtu re of whi te 1ea1 and tillow or othc r approved
coating, before removal f rom the sh op.
Erection man:s for the field ident i fic at ion of members a nd we ight
marks sh al I be pa i nted upon su rface areas piev iou sly pa in ted w ith the
shop coa t. Material shall not be loaded for sh ipment u ntil it i s thor
oughly d ry, and in any case not less than 24 hours after the paint has
been applied.
2.1 4.1 2 FIELD PAINTING
When the erection work is complete, i nclu d ing a 11 rivcti rig, weld i rig,
boltih g and strat ghten i rig of bent metal, all :id hen n g ru st, wale, d i rt,
grease or other to reign material shall be rcmov ed as spec ifi ed u nder
Article 2. 14.10.
As soon as th e i nspector hac exim i nol and approved all field rivets
and bol ts, the heads of s uch rivets and bolts, a ll welds and any surfaces
from wh ieh the shop or first coat of par nt has beco me worn off or has
oth e rwi se become d e feet i ve, shal I be cleaned and thorou phly covered wi th
one coat of sh op -cost paint.
Contact s urf aces to be riveted or bol ted and su if aces wh ich w ill be in
contact w i th concrete shall not be painted. Surfaces v'h ich wil I be inic
cess ible at ter erection shall be painted with such field coats as are cal led
for on plan s or authorized . When the pa int appl red f or retouch ing the
shop coat has thoroii gh ly dried and the field clean ing has been sa tis
factori ly comp letcd, such field coats as are called for on the plans or are
authorized shall be applied. In no case shall a succeed ing coat be applied
until the previous coat has dried throughout the ful l thickness of the paint
film. All small cracks and cavities which vv e re not sealed in a waterti ght
manner by the first field coat shall be filled with a pasty mixtu re of red lead
and linseed oil before the second coat is applied.
The follow in Ja rovis ion shall apply to the appl ication of both field
co:its. To seen re i maxi mu in coati rig on edges of plates or shapes, rivet
hearts :ind othe r pirts su b jected to special wear and attack, the edges
shtll firt be striped with a ton g i tit d i n at motion anl the rivet heads
w ith i rotary motin of the bi ush, followed immediately by the general
pa inti n g of the whole en rfaec, i nclu ding the edges and rivet heads.
If, in the opinion o:I the E n g ineer, traffic produces an objectionable
amount of dust, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, allay the dust
for the ri eeessiiy d istance on each s ide of the bridge and ttke any other
precau tion s n oe cs sii y to prevent du st :ind d i i I from coming in contact
with I resh ly Jn intod s ii rf :ices or wi th su i faces before the p:t int is applied.
The app tic a ti on of the secon d field coat shall be def e i red until adjoining concro te v'oi-k has been p1iccl and fin i shed. If concreti ng operati one
have ditmagod the par nt, the .su rd:in ,shl1 be reel em ed and repai nted.
The Contractor shall protect pedestrian, v eh icular and other traffic
upon or u n c1eineath the bridge, and a lso all porti one of the bridge super
structu re and sti bstru ctu re, agiins I damage or disfigu rement by spatters,
splashes and smirchPs of p:t int or paint m u t u -ials.
reasonably
MATERIAL
2.15.2 MATERIALS
All stone, regardless of use, shall be clean (free from organic
matter) durable, angular with f iactured faces, nearly rectangular in
shape w ith a breadth or thickness at least one-third its length and have a
gradation dependent upon maximum size as determined by the Engineer.
CONSTRUCTION
Project plans or specifications will state the size and quality requirements of stone to be used for the various classes of work. Sizes shown
in the follow in g table are recognized by these specifications.
MINIMUM PERCENTAGE LARGER THAN
Classes
Filter
ROCk
Size
8 Ton
4 Ton
2 Ton
8
Ton
4
Ton
60
95
50
95
2
Ton
0
5tl
1
Ton
_'
Ton
)
Ton
Light
Facing
50
95
0
btl
95
0
6Il
9
50
76 Lb.
90
150
90
90
No.
2
0
60
95
0
90
1 Ton
/z Ton
/ Ton
200 Lb.
5 Lb.
No. 4
No. 200
No.
1
The table above sets out minimum requ moments for the large stone
per class. It is understood that the Contractor will furnish miiterial well
graded w ith smaller stones to the extent that :i homogeneou s blanket of
riprap will result with all i nterstices reason:ib1y well filled with rock.
Quality requ i rements for rock to be furnished under these specifications
shall be checked prior to use by the stipulated tests and at :ippropriatP
times throughout the life of the project as determined by the Engineer.
CONSTRUCTION
2.J 5.3
th icknesse s shown on the drawing will be allowed in the fin ished surl'ace
of the riprap protection, except that either extreme of such tolerance
shall not be conti nuous over an area greater than 200 square feet. The
tolerance limit will be determined on the basis of the average su rf ace
elevation within two square feet. The desired distribution of the various
sizes of stone throughout the mass may be ob tained, at the option of
the Contractor, either by selective loading at the q uai ry, or controlled
dumping of successive loads during placing, or by :i combination of these
methods. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer,
the riprap
protection shall be placed in conjunction with the construction of the
embankment v'ith only sufficient lag in construction of the riprap protec-
2. J 5.4
will lay up with a true and even surface and a minimum of voids. These
stones shall be placed first and roughly arranged in close contact, the
largest stones being placed near the base of the slope. The spaces
between the larger stones shall be filled with stones of su itable size,
leaving the surface smooth, reasonably tight and conforming to the
contou i requ ired. In general, the stone shall be laid with a degree of
care that will insure for plane su i faces a maximum variation from a
true plane o:I not more than 1c inches in 4 feet. Warped and curved
en rf aces shall have the same general degree of accu racy as specified
above for plane surfaces.
As each of the larger stones is placed, it shall bc surrounded by
fresh mortar and adjacent stones shall be shoved into contact. After
the larger stones are in place all o:I the spaces or openings between
them shall be filled with mortar and the smaller stones then placed by
shoviri g them into position, forcing excess mortar to the surl'ace and
in su ring that Pach stone . is carefully and firmly bedded laterally.
After the work has been completed as above described, all excess
mortar for ced u p shall bP spread unifoi-rely to completely fill all surface
voids. All s u rf ace joints shall then be roughly pointed up either with
flush joints or with shallow, smooth raked joints.
Weep holes shall be provided through the riprap cover as shown on
the plans or as d irected by the E ngineer.
Mortar shall const st of one part cement complying with Article
2.4.2 (A) (1 ) and three parts sand complying with Article 2.4.2
thorou ghly mixed with water to have a thick creamy consistency.
shall not be placed in f t-eez ing weather. During hot, dry weather the
work shall be protected from the sun an d kept moist for a minimu in of
throe d:t s after pliicement.
Rock shall be kept wet du ring placing of the mortar.
GONSTRUOTION
2.1 5.5
and
When placed under water free dumping will not be permitted iv ithout
of the Engineer.
Placement shall
2.15 .
rope
be
by controlled
baskets
lowered
2.J 5.7
with
MEASUREMENT
2.15.9 MEASUREMENT
(a) Loose Riprap for Slopes. Loose riprap for slopes may be
measured for payment on either a squat-e yard, cubic yard or weight
basis as specified. If measured on a squ:me yard basis, the quantity
measured will be that actually placed to the limiting di mensions shown
on the plans or as the plan dimensions may be revised by the Engineer.
2. 15.9
CONSTRUCTION
(b) Mortar Riprap for Slopes. Mortar riprap for slopes will be
measured for payment on a sjuare yard basis. The quantity measured
will be that actually placed to the limiting dimensions shown on the
plans or as the plan dimensions may be revised by the Engineer.
c) Stone Riprap for Foundation Protection. Unless otherwise
Specified, stone riprap will be measured for payment on a weight (ton)
basis. Weighing shall be done in the presence o1 on inspector in the
hauling vehicles either at the quarry or at or near the point of placement
as may be directed by the Engineer. The quantity measured for payment
will be that actually placed in accordance with instructions given by the
Engineer.
(d) Concrete Riprap in Bags. Unless otherwise specified concrete
riprap in bags will be measured for payment on a volume (cubic yard)
basis. The quantity measured will be that actually placed to the limiting
dimensions shown on the plans or as the plan dimensions may be revised
by the Engineei-.
(e) Concrete Slab Riprap. Preparation of Slopes will be measured
for payment on a square yard unit. The quantity measured will be that
:ictually prepared for coverage by riprap as required by plan dimensions
or as plan dimensions may be revised by the Engineer. Excavated area
for toe trenches or curbs, if required, will be included in these limiting
dimensions.
Concrete Slab Riprap will be measured for payment on a square
yard unit. The quantity measured will be that actually placed within the
limiting dimensions called for on the plans or as plan dimensions may
be revised by the Engineer. Curbing, if required, will be included in
these limiting dimensions.
(I) Filter oi- Bedding Material. Filter or bedding material will be
measured for payment on a cubic yard, square yard, or vve1ht basis as
called for in the project specifications. The quantity measured will be
that actu:illy placed to the limiting dimensions shown on the plans or as
the plan dimensions may be revised by the E ngineer. Measurements on
a square yard basis shall be measured parallel to the finished surface.
PAYMENT
2.J 5.JO PAYMENT
(a) Loose Riprap for SlopesLoose riprap for slopes measured in
accord:once with Article 2.15.9 (a) will be paid for at the price bid per
square yard, per cubic yard or per ton as set forth in the project
specifications.
(b) Mortar Ripi-ap for SlopesMortar riprap for slopes measured
in accordance with Article 2.15.9 (b) will be paid for at the price bid
per square yard.
let Stone Riprap for Foundation ProtectionStone riprap for foundation protection measured in accordance vv'ith Article 2.15.9 (c) will be
paid for at the price bid per ton unle.ss otherwise specified.
Ptyment for- concrete slab riprap \\ i]l be at the unit price bid per
sJu:iie yard therefor, wh ich price and payment shall be in 11 compensation
for Iu rnish in g all male r ial s, incl nding libor, eqti ipment, tools and inc i den tale necessa ry to complete the work.
(f FiltPr oi Bedding MaterialFilter or bedding material me ash red
in :iccordance v ith Article 2. TO. 9 if) will be paid for on the cubic yard,
sqtii re yt id or weight bas is as called for in the project speci fixations.
tions.
Secfion i 6
CONCRETE CRIBBING
2.16.1 GENERAL
The ccanst ruct ion of cone i etc cribbin g shall cons i st of the l'urn ish ing
the i ia t i to r fi I I in g in a tc i ia!s. The crib members shall be cast in thP proporticn s and in cn foi ma ri cc with the penei'a l reju i cements set forth for
proj.Est con ci-ete bean n piles. Dovve Is, where used shal I be of wrou ghtiron or galva n ized s tee I not less th:in 1 inch in d iameter and of the requ ired
length.
' isi rips f r dowels sh a 11 be of galv an ized steel or ii-on pi pe not less
th an 1 ' i i nc- he's i n rl i a meter.
The I c'ta i 1s of thi' c ri b mcm be re and the i r at-iin gement sha 11 be as
5 1 II\\'li d ii the plaia s. If s;ec i fic dola i ls foi rat ii No rcemen t a re not shown
on the plans, or i f the Contractor is permitted to purchase the crib
member .s f r in in.in It Iac t u re i-s , he shal l su bin it detai led specific a tions and
plans for the approval of the Engineer, and such plans must be approved
bet or' rl r I i veiy of I he matoi i.il i s beu n.
A 11 m mbc re sha 11 be' f t-ee from Iepress ions and spi fled, patched,
or pl.i.s ts'i ed s ii i fac s or edgPs, or .i ny' other defcets vv'h i ch mi v i mpai i-
CONSTRU GTION
2.161
be rejected.
2.16.2 CONSTRUCTION
The fou n elation or bed for the cribb i n g shall be firm and shall be
approved by the Engineer before any of the crib work is placed. In
ge ne i-a l, tran sve no concrete will me mbPi s shal l be up sed to support the
lower cri bbing cou i se. Crib members sh all be ca rofully handled and
erecte1 i n su eh ma nne r a s to avo id any- in j u ry due to -shock or impact.
materials, eq u ipment, tools, and labor inc idental to the satisf actory erection of the cri bbi n g, inclu ding necessa ry excavation. The volume to be
paid for will be the actual net vol u me of the concrete in the crib members
as shown on the plans. The fil ling for the interior of the crib will be paid
for at the contract pr ice per c ubic yard for ci-ib filling in place.
Section 17WATERPROOFING
2. J 7.1 GENERAL
When specified on the plans or i n the special provisions, su rf aces
shal I be wate rJn oofed as specified herein.
2. J 7.2 MATERIALS
I AJ
Mortor
Mortar for the prte't we ecu i se sh all conform to the prov is ions of
Article 2. 6.2 (B) .
I BJ
Asphol t
Waterproofing asphalt shall conform to the Specification for Asphalt for Dampproofing and Waterproofing, AASHO M 115 (ASTM
D 449) . NOTE : Type A is for use below ground and Type B for use
above ground. Unless otherwise specified, Type B shall be used.
Primer for use with asphalt in waterproofing shall conform to the
Specification for Primer for Use With Asphalt in Dampproofin g and
Waterproofing, AASHO M 116.
I CJ
Pifch
Waterproofing pitch shall conform to the Specification for CoalTar
Pitch for Roofing, Dampproofing and Waterproofin g, AASHO M 118
(ASTM D450) . Type B pitch shall be turn i shed unless otherwise
specified.
Primer for use with coaltar pitch in dampproofing and waterproofing shall conform to the Specification for Creosote for Priming
Coat with Coal-Tai Pitch in Dampproofing and Waterproofing, AASHO
M 121 (ASTM D 43) .
I D I Fn bric
'The fabric shall conform to the Speci fixation for Woven Cotton
Fabrics Saturated with Bituminous Substances for Use in Waterproofing, AASH O M 117 (ASTM D 173) .
I EJ
Treatment
1.030 to 1.100
2. 17.2
CONSTRUCTION
379
jo int fil ter, to xvh ich h as been added 20 per cc nt, by we ight, of asbestos
fiber. The i nco rpo ra I i on of the asbestos fi ber w ith the asphalt shall be
done at the factory of the man uf actu rer to insure a un iform distribu tion of the fiber th rou gho u t the mix.
IHJ
inspection
ond
Del ivery
All waterp roofin g materials shal l be tested before sh ipment. Unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer, they shall be tested at the place
of manu factu re, and, when so test eel, a copy of the test rent I ts shall
and on vertical su rf aces not less than 15 gallons shall be used. The work
shall be so re pu lated that, at the close of a days work, all cloth that is laid
shal I have received the final mopping of asphalt or tar. Spec ial ca re shall
be'.aken at all laps to see that they a re th oroughly sealed down.
CONSTRUGTION
2.17.6
be done with separate sheets lapping the main membrane not less than
12 inches. Flashing shall be closely sealed either w ith a metal counterflashing or by embedding the upper edges of the flash ing in a groove
poured full of joint filler.
Points wh ich are es se nti ally open j oints but which are not den gned
to provide for exp ans ion shal I first be caulked with oakum and lead
2. J 7.7 DAMAGE
PATCHING
2.17.8 PROTECTION
COURSE
The con str u ction of the protection course shall follow the vs aterproofing so closely that the latter will not be exposed without protection
for more than 24 hours.
Section 18
2. J 8.1 GENERAL
DA MPPROOFING
2.18.2
llltiH W A Y OlllLl Ci ES
2. J 8.2 MATERIALS
The material u sed for dampproofin g shall be tar or asphalt as requ ired
by the speci at prov is ions.
Tar for absorptive treat.ment (or primer) , tar seal coat, and asphalt
for primer and seal coat shal l conform to the requ me ments of Article
2.17.2.
be
applied
shall le cleined of all loose and forei gn material and dirt and shal.l be
dry. When necessary the Engineer may requ ire the surface to be scrubbed
with water and a stiff bru sh, af ter which the surface shall be allowed to dry
before appi mation of the primer.
Care shall be taken to confine all paints to the a rea?> to be waterproofed and to prevent d isfigu remcnt of any other parts of the structu re
by dripping or spread ing of the tar or asphalt.
Section 19
NAME PLATES
otherwise
price for the s u perst ructu re shal I incl ud e the cost of such name plates.
No permanent plates or markers other than those shown on the
plans or approved by the Engineer wi 11 be permitted on any structure.
GONSTRUGTION
220.1
Sawn lumber and timber sham conform to the Speci ficati ons for
Structurol
Shopes
wrought-
I DI
Hnrdwcire
2.20.1
Paint Lead and Zinc Base) , AASHO M 70. The paint as specified is
Com position
Max iiriuiii
Jiei cent
Pi Intent
L iJ u id ( ci rite i n in g at least 80 pe r
cent I i nsee d oi I )
Min imum
per cent
68
Water
Coa ise part ie les ari d sk ins ( tota I ies idu e ieta tried o n N o. '32
sie v e based on p i gment)
Weight per
9.0 lbs.
( b)
(c)
ga llon,
not
I ess
than
Pigment
Veh icle
2.20.1
(d I
Reo dy - Mixed
Po in t
I FJ Timber
Connectors
( \ ) Genero I
220.1
circle and sh all be parallel to the axis of the ring. The central band
shall be welded to f u fly develop the stren gth of the band. All sizes, 2
inch, 2's-inch, 3?s inch and 4-inch d iameters, shall have an over- all
depth of .fi4 inch and a depth of fillet of .25 i nch.
(J I
and tvv o
smaI I pe rforati ons on opposite sides of the hole and midway from
the center and circu reference.
Mall e.ah Ie. I rn T ijp:. Malleable iron shear-plates of 4inch
diameter shall be man u factured accord ing ter AA SHO M 106
I ASTM A 47) , Grade No. 35019, for real leable i ron cast in ps.
Each casting shal I cons is t of a pe rfo rated rou nd plate with a flange
arou nd the edge extending at righ I angles to th o face of the plate
and projeeti n g from one face only, the plate portion having a cen tral bolt hole reamed to s ize with an integral h u b consent ric to the
bolt hole and extend ing from the same face as the flange.
15I
Spike-Grid
Con nectors
C i rcu far grids of 3' 'i d iameter shall consist of 8 oppos ing
spikes eg u ml l y spaced around the ou ter ct re u reference and held in
place by con rice I in g fil lets a roun d the outer d iameter an d rad rat
fi llets p roject in g to a ee n tral c i rcu far fil let wh ich forms a boI t h ole
open ing of Ui. Fi llets in cross section sha 11 be d iamond shaped
except that the inner c irc u lar fil let may be flattened on one side to
prov ide for man u facturer ident ificat i on.
manufacturer. The toothed ring and the spike grid shall be forced
into the contact surfaces of the timbers joined by means of pressure
'
h'
a (
h n
In s i de d iamete r
Dpth
TOO THED R I N GS
Toothed rin g :
Dh k ess of metal
::
th of fillet ( in in i in nan )
Bolt hole :
Dia mets r
. 94 1. 23
1.59
.99
SHEA R PLA T ES
4
P resscd
D iameter of pI ate
o b
oIe
Th ick ness of
a
Dep th or fla nge
.
.
0. 4 2
L igh I
.
.
0. 35
.
0.6 2
4
. 4
.
0. 6 2
'
ror 6oi
4.03
0.94
0. 4 5
0. 2 5
3.49
dianneter
097
0:22
9.69
3.4 9
Thickness
Square plate:
Length of s ide
T h i ck ness
2.58
CONSTRUCTION
2202
eqn ipment. All con nectors of this type at a joint shall be embed dcd
simu ltaneou sly and un iformly.
Fabricati on of all structures using connectors sha II be done prior
to treatment. When prefabricated fi ore templates or shop deta its, bolt
holes shall not be more than ir inch from requ i red placement. Bolt holes
shall be Zn i nch larger than bolt diameter. Bolt holes shall be bored perpendicu lar to the face of the timber.
T imber after jab r ication shall be stored in a manner wh ich will
prevent changes in the di men sions of the members before ass e mbly.
not
otherw ise
specified shall
2.20.4 WORKMANSHIP
Won:man ship shall be fiist class
throughout.
N one
bu I competent
ping, break ing of ou ter fibers, br u is i rig or pen etrat i n g the s u rface with
tools. It shall be hand led w ith rope slings. Cant hooks, peaveys, pi kes
or hooks sh at I not be u sed.
IBI Froming ond Boring
avoided.
fram ings
below
h igh
water
e1evat on
sha 11 be
220.6
ICI
ID I Boil Holes
All bolt holes bored after t reat me nt shtl1 be t rented iv ith creosote
oil by mean s of an app roved press ure bolt hole
treate r.
Any
unfilled
Temporory
Atfochment
fol lowi ng
su rfaces
shal l be
thorou ghly eoa ted with two coats of hot creosote oil before assembl ing :
end s, tops an d al l contact s u i faces f sil ls, c:ips, floor beams ind stri n gers ,
and all ends, joi rite, and contact su rfiees of brac ng a rid truss members.
The back faces of bu lkheads and al I other ti mber wh ich is to be i n contact
wi th eirth, metal r other timber shall be s inn i la rly treated.
Bolts passing th rough nonresin ous wood shall preferab l y be gal
van ized.
2.20.7 TREATMENT OF PILE HEADS
I AJ
Generol
Pi Ie heads, after cutting to receive the caps, and prior to placing
the caps sh all be treated to prevent deCay.
Immed iatel y a fter making final cut-off on treated timber fou n elation
piles, the cut are:i shall be given two liberal appl ieat ions of preservative
f ollow'ed by a heavy application of coal-tar pitch, or other approved
sealer. 'Treated timber pi les wh ich w ill have the cutoff exposed in the
structure shall be further protected by one of the follow ing methods, as
spec i fled on the plans. If not otherw i so specified, Method B shall be used.
IB J
thorough ly brush coated with three appl matrons of ht creosite oil and
covered with hot roofing pi tch. Before pl pci ng the cup, a sh eet of 12
gauge (.028-inch) zinc shall be placed on each pile head. The sheet
2.20.7
CON ST RUCTION
391
zinc shall be of suffic rent size to project :it least 4 inches outside of the
pi le, and it shall be bent down, neatly Inmined and secu rely fastened
to the faces of the pile, with large headed galvan ized roohng nails.
IC I Method B Fobric Covering
The head s of all piles shall be covered with alternate layers of hot
pi tch and loosely woven f abri c s imilar to membrane wate rproofi ng,
using fou r a ppl mation s of pitch and three layers of fabric. The cover
shall measure at least 6 inches more in dimens ion than the diameter of
the pile and shall be neatly holded down over the pi lo ind secu i ed by
large headed p a Ivan ized nails or by binding or serv ing w ith not less
than seven complete turns of galvan ized w i re securely held in place by
largeheaded galvan ized nails and staples. The edges of the fabric
projecting below the wire wrapping shal I be trimmed to present a
workmanlike appearance.
The heads of untreated p iles shall be g iven one of the follow inp
treatments, as may be specified or directed by the Engineer :
( 1) The sawed surface shal I be tho rou ghly brush coated w ith
(2) The sawed surface shall be heavily coated w ith red lead
paint, after which it shall be covered w ith cotton duck, of at least 8
ou nce weight, which shall lie folded down over the sides of the pile
and firmly secured thereto with large-headed roofin g n.t i ts. The edges
of the luck shall be trimmed to give a iv or kmanl ike ap- pearance. The
rluck shall then be wate rproofed by being thoroughly satu rated und
coated wi th one or more appl matt ons of red lead
'lie inch less in d iameter than the bolt or dowel to bP u sed. The d iameter
of holes for square drift-bolts or dowels shall be eq u al to the least d imension of the bolt or dowel.
Holes for michine bolts shall be bored with a bit the same d iamete i
as the bolt, except as othe rw i se provided in Article 2.20. 2.
Holes for rods shall be bored with a bit 'lii. inch greater in diameterthan the rod.
Holes f or lag screws shall be bored with a bit not larger than the
body of the screw at the base of the thread.
2.20.10 COUNTERSINKING
All recesses in tre:ited timber, formed for countersi nking shall be
painted with hot creosote oil. Recesses likely to collect injurious mater rats
shall be filled with hot pitch.
Hf GHWAY
BRIDGE 5
2.20.11
2.20. J J FRAMING
Al I I u mber and timber shall be accurately cut and framed to a close
fit in such mxnne r that the joints will have even bearing over the entire
contact su rfaces. I\tort ises shal l be true to size for their ful I depth and
tenons shal l fit sn ugly. No shimming will be permitted in making joints,
nor will open joints be accepted.
Mud bills
Concrete Pedesfols
Concrete pedestals for the support of framed bents shall be careful ly fin ished so that the s i 11s or posts wil l take even bearing on them.
Dowels of not less than 'i-inch d iameter and projecting at least 6 inches
above the tops of the pedes tale, shall be set in them when they are cast,
ter anchoring the st lls er pot ts.
tals. They shal I be drift-bolted to mud st lls or piles with bolts of not
less th an '?;-inch diameter and extend ing into the mud sills or piles at
least 6 inches. When possible, all earth shall be removed from contact
with sills so that there will be free air circulation around them.
Posts shall be fastened to pedestals with dowels of not less than /iinch d iameter, extending at least 6 inches into the posts.
Posts shall be fastened to sills by one of the following methods, as
GONSTRUGTION
2. 20.13
2.20.14 CAPS
Timber caps shall be placed, with ends aligned, in a manner to
secure an even and uniform bearing over the tops of the su pporting
posts or piles. All caps shall be secured by drift-bolts of not less than /iinch diameter, extending at least 9 inches into the posts or piles. The
drift-bolts shall be approximately in the center of the post or pile. (See
Article 2.20.13 (E) ) .
2.20.1 5 BRACING
The ends of bracing shall be bolted through the pile, post or cap
with a bolt of not less than /s-inch diameter. Intermediate intersections
shall be bolted, or spiked with wire or boat spikes, as ind icated on the
plans. In all cases spikes shall be used in addition to bolts.
2.20.1 STRINGERS
Stringers shall be sized at bearings and shall be placed in position
so that knots near edges will be in the top portions of the stringers.
Outside stringers may have butt joints with the ends cut on a
taper, but interior stringers shall be lapped to take bearing over the
full width of the floor beam or cap at each end. The lapped ends of untreated stringer9 shall be separated at least '/_ inch for the circulation
of air and shall be securely i'astened by drift-bolting where specified.
When stringers are two panels in length the joints shall be staggered.
Cross-bridging between stringers shall be neatly and accurately
framed and securely toe-nailed with at least two nails in each end. All
cross-bridging members shall have full bearing at each end against the
sides of stringers. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, crossbridging shall be placed at the center of each span.
Unless other w ise spec ified, they shall be surfaced four sides (S 4 S) .
Single plank floors shall consist of a single thickness of plank supported by stri n gers or joints. The planks shall be laid heart side down,
with '/i-inch openings between them for seasoned material and with tight
joints for unseasoncd material. Each plank shall be securely spiked to
HIGHWAY
BRIDGE 5
2.20.17
least 3 feet. If the top flooring is placed parallel to the centerline of the
roadway, special care shall be taken to securely fasten the ends of the
flooring. At each end of the bridge these members shall be beveled.
strip.
Slob Spons
Where the tensile strength of wood and the compressive strength
of concrete are to be used compost tely, the joining of the two materials
shal I be such as to res wet all horizontal shear at that plane, and provi sion shall be made to prevent separation of the materials.
The horizontal shear may be resisted by metal devices set into and
projecting above the top of the la minated strips, or by fabricating the
upper edge of the strips in a serrated manner.
Separation of the materials may be resisted by nails driven at an
angle in the upper edge of the str ips, or by certain su itable devices, or
by grooves or other working of up stand ing strips.
I B J T Beoms
Spans consisting of concrete slabs placed on wood stringers may
be des igned as T beams when the two materials are su itably joined
so as to res ist horizontal shear at their j uncture and the materials are
bonded permanently together.
A horizontal shear Joint may be made using metal (devices or by a
serrated working oi the tops of the stringers.
CONSTRUCTION
395
metal devices, or by grooving the sides of the str in gers near the top,
or other workin g of the wood, and then forming the concrete into the
2.20.21 TRUSSES
Trusses, when completed, shall show no irregu larities of
Chords shall be str aight and true from end to end in horizontal
line.
pro-
jection and, in ve rtical proj ection, shall show a smooth curve throu gh panel
points conform ing to the correct camber. All bearing surfaces shall fit
accurately. Un even or rough cuts at the points of bearing shall be cau se
for rejection of the piece con ta ini n g the defect.
shall be bu ilt af tei the removal of the Tal sework and the adj ustment of
2.20.24 PAINTING
Rails an d rail posts (f u ntreated timber, shi 11 be painted with three
coats of paint.
Parts of the structu re, other th:in rails and rat l posts, which are to
be painted, shall be de si gn ated on the plans or in the special provis ions.
Metal parts, except h ardware, shall be given one coat of shop paint
and, after erection, two coat.s of field paint as specified in Section 2.14.
22025
remain ing in the fin ished structure, i ncluding the cost of at l hardware.
Computations of the amount of In mber and timber in the structure shall
be based on nominal sizes and the shortest com mercial length wh ich cou ld
be used. No other allowance for waste will be made.
Metal parts, other than hardware, shall be paid for at the contract
price per pound, the weight being computed in the same manner as specified for steel structures, Article 2. 10.63.
2.21.2 MATERIALS
Piling shall conform to the reqti irements of AASHO M 168. Timber
and lumber shall conf oi m to the requ memento of AASHO M1G8. Only
wood species for which treatment requ i rements are listed in AASHO
M 133 may be specified. All v'ood species so listed are not equally
treatable and therefore all species are not equally acceptable under severe
exposure cond itions. Care shouIi be exercised to select those species in
AASHO M 133 wh ich are acceptable for the intended application.
Timber preservatives and treatment method shall conform to AA SHO
M 133. The type of preservative fu rnished shall be in accordance with
that specified in the special provisions or as noted on the plans. When
selecting a preservative and a preservative retention, it shou Id be noted
that AASH O M 133 dest gnates the preservatives and retentions recommended for Coastal Waters and in marine structures and further that
timber for use in ground or water contact has req u ireinents that differ
from ti mbers for use not in ground or water contact. In some instances
there is a range of retentions offered wh ich provides for d ifferent degrees
of exposure based on climate or degree of insect infestation. Unless the
higher retentions are epecified, not lese than the minimum retention is
requ ired.
Timbers expected to be painted should be treated with water-borne
salts or pe ntachlorophenol carried in a volatile organic solvent.
indicating the name of the Greater and the specification symbol or specifi-
CO N STRU C'I'I ON
mine that the contract requirements are met. The Engineer reserves the
right to retest all materials after delivery to the job site and to reject all
materials which do not meet the requ irements of the conti-act ; provi ded
that, at the job site re in spection, conformance within five percent of
contract requ me ments shall be acceptable. Rein spection at the job site
may include assay to deterred ne retention of preservatives and extracti on
and analysis of preset-vative to determine its quality.
caps, posts, sills, etc. If treated ti mber is used, al I hardv are shall be
galvanized or cadmium plated.
IB I Logs
Logs used for cribbing shall conform in quality to the requirements
specified for timber piles in AASHO M 168.
2.22.2 PREPARATION
When timber or logs are to be treated, all framing sha II be completed before treatment .ind all surfaces cleaned of di rt and grease.
All timber and log framing shall be done in a ivo rkmanlike manner
and true to line and angle.
2.22.3 DIMENSIONS
IA I Timber
When cribs are constr ucted of sawed timber, no ti mber shall be
less than 8 inches in least d imen st on. The face timber in the base tier
shall be not less than 10 inches in least dimension.
I BI Logs
When cribs are constructed of logs, no face log shall have a d iameter
at the small end of less than 10 inches and tie logs shall be not less
than 8 inches in d iameter at the small end. The lace log in the ba.se
tier shall be not less than 12 i nches in diameter :it the small end.
All logs for cribbi n shal l be selccted Ii om the logs ava i l aule w i th
as small an amou nt of I aj e i its possible. The length cf logs u sed shall
be
u ;n I he tapei-.
2.22.4
2.22.4 CONSTRUCTION
I Al
Foundotion
The foundation or bed for the ct-ibb i n g shill be excavated to exact
I BI Mud Sills
When mu d st lls are u scd, they Shal I be set at right angles to the
face of the cribbing and firmly and evenly bedded in the fou nd at ion
materi a 1.
Mud sil 1s sh:il l be not let s t h a n 12 by 12 inch cs in squared c ros
section a l d true us ion s and not loss than I feet in length. They shall be
spaced not more than 4 feet apai t.
Log or t i mber mii d s i lls sha 11 be leveled to fit the first tier re st i n g;
upon them. In no case shal I thei e be less tha n 100 eqn a i e i riches of
flat contact su if ace betv een the face log and each mud sil 1.
Fou ndation material shall be I h oi-o u ghly tamped a t-ound all mud
sills.
ICI
the base shall be as lon g as p ract icabl e an d pref e ri bly, shall extend the
Ties
The length of ties shall be s uffic ie nt to develop the i eq u ired anchor
age against overturn mg, and i n no case shal l the length of ti c extend-
ing into the fill be less than twoth itd .s of the height of fi 11 above the tie
in juest ion.
Ties sh all be anchored to the face iv'alls by tram ing, ei ther dove
tailed or by su flic ie n I proj ection beyond the face of the en b to form the
proper anchorage. T res shall be anchored at the fill end to cross pieces
fastened to them at right angles by driftbolts or other su itable means.
Ties shall be spaced not more than 8 feet center to center in any
horizontal tier and shall be staggered with the next md jacent tier of
ties. Tiers of ties shall be not more than 3 feet apart vertically.
IE J
Fastening
F?nch en ccessivc tier of I ops or timbers shall be d rift-bolted to the
one u ; on \vh ich it rests by drifts not less than "i inches in diameter
:ind of s tifhcicn t. Jength to extend through 2 tiers and not less than 4
GON 5T RUCTION
2.224
2.22.5 FILLING
Fill in g inside and around cribs shall be
of the
material
specified
necessary for
the
exca-
vation, c rib erect ion, .ind filling, complete i n place, in accordance with
the plans and these spec ifications. Payment for timber and logs shall
include the cost of drift-bolts and othei in iscellaneous hardwai e.
E' xcavation for ci ibb in g shall be par d f oi at the contract price per
cubic yard for mater-ml actually removed except that in no case shall this
be computed to include water ial moi e than 1 foot outside of vertical planes
through the ext.re me ne:it lines of the fin ished crib or its supports. The
contract price for excavation shall include a yardage of back-fill e Qu ivalent
to that excavited between the neat l ines and the pay lines.
T imber shall be paid for at the contract price per 1,000 feet board
measure (MBM ) for material rema i n i ng in the fin ished str uctu re.
Logs shall be paid for at the contract price per linear foot, f oi each
size speci fied, for material re ma in ing in the fin ished structure.
Bill ing mate rial shall be paid f oi at the contract price per cubic
yarcl for the actu al volu me placed.
Plates shall be formed to provide lap joints. The bolt holee shall be
so punched that all plates having like dimensions, curvature, and the
same nu mber of bolts per foot of seam shall be interchangeable. Each
plate shall be curved to the proper radi us so that the cross-sectional
dimensions of the fin ished structure will be as indicated on the drawings or as specified.
Unless otherwise specified, bolt holes along those edges of the plates
that form longitu dinal seams in the fin ished structure shall be in two
rov's. Bolt holes aton g those edges of the plates that form circu referential seams in the fin ished structu re shall provide for a bolt spacing of
not more than 12 inches. The min imum distance from center of hole to
edge of the plate shal l be not less than 1i times the d iameter of the
bolt. The diameter of the bolt holPs in the longitudinal seams shall not
exceed the diameter of the bolt by more than one-eighth ( ) inch.
Plates for form ing skewed or sloped ends shall be cut so as to give
the angle of skew or slope spec i fled. Bumed edges shall be Iree from
oxide and bu rrs and shal I present a workmanl ike fin i sh. Legible identification nu merals shall be placed on each plate to designate its proper
position in the finished structure.
I BJ Corrugated Metol Pipe
Punching and forming of sheets shal l conform to AASHO M 36.
fCJ Elo ngotion
If elongated structu ral plate or corrugated metal pipe is specified or
cal led for on the plans, the plates or pipes shall be formed so that the
finished pipe is elf Optical in shape with the vertical d iameter approximately five (5) per cent greater than the nominal diameter of the pipe.
Pipe-arches shall not be elongated. Elongated pipes shall be installed
with the longer axis vertical.
2.23.3
ASSEMBLY
CONSTRUC TION
similar manner to corrugated metal pipe with special care in handling to
avoid damage to coatings. Paved invert pipe shall be installed with the
2.23.4 BEDDING
When, in the opinion of the Engineer, the natural soil does not provide a suitable bedding, a bedding blanket conforming to Fi Bure 2.23A,
shall be pros'ided. Bedding shall be unit:orm for the full length of the pipe.
2.23.6 SIDEFILL
Sidefill material within one pipe diameter of the sides of pipe and
not less than one foot over the pipe shall be fine readily compactible soil
or granular fill material. Sidefill beyond these limits may be regular embankment fill. Job-excavated soil used as backfill shall not contain stones
used for sidefill more than 3 feet from sides of pipe. The sidefill shall be
placed and compacted with care under the haunches of the pipe and shall
be brought up evenly and simultaneously on both sides of the pipe to not
less than 1 foot above the top :for the full length of the pipe. Fill above this
elevation may be material for embankment fill. The width of trench shall
be kept to the minimu in width required for placing pipe, placing adequate
bedding and sidefill, and safe working conditions. Ponding or jetting of
sidefill will not be permitted except upon written permi9sion by the
2.23.7
BRACING
2.23.8
CAMBER
The invert grade of the pipe shall be cambered, when requ ired, by an
amount sufficient to prevent the development of a sag or back 91Ope in
the flow line as the foundation under the pipe settles under the weight
of embankment. The amount of camber shall be based on consideration
of the flow-line gradient, height of fill, compressive characteristics of the
supporting soil, and depth of supporting soil stratum to rock.
2.23.9
2.23.9
GONSTRUGTION
D j >e,e z
""""
In all caees the filling material shall be thoroughly but not excessively
tamped. Puddling the backfill will not be permitted.
Uneven laps.
be measu red in linear feet, installed in place, completed, and accepted. The
nu mber of linear feet shall be the average of the top and bottom centerl ine lengths for pipe, the bottom centerline length for pipearches, and the
average of springing line lengths for arches.
plete this item, but for arches shall not constitute payment for concrete or
masonry headwalls and foundations, or for excavation.
2. 24.2
40C
,
Moteriol
Placement
Inspection
Section 25
ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS
2.25.1 DESCRIPTION
Elastomeric bearings as herein specified shall include plain bearings
(consisting of elastomer only) and laminated bearings (consisting of
layere of elas tower restrained at their interfaces by bonded laminates.) .
2.25.2 MATERIALS
The elastomer portion of the elastomeric compound shall be 100 *
virgin natural polyisoprene (natural rubber) meeting the requirements of
Table A or 100 o virgin chloroprene (neoprene) meeting the requirements of Table B, as specified by the Engineer. Compounds of: nominal
hardness between the values shown may be used and the test requirements
interpolated. When test specimens are cut from the finished product a
10 o variation in Physical Properties will be allowed.
TABEA
ASTM
Standard
50
Physical Properties
ASTM D 412
Ultimate elongation, min. 9
60
'70
Duro
Duro
Duro
2500
450
2500
400
2500
300
+ 10
+ 10
+ 10
25
25
25
Heat Resistance
D573
70 hr.
@ 158 F
2Q
25
25
Compression Set
D395
Method B
D1149
No
No
No
Cracks Crack9 Clacks
Adhesion
D429,B
40
40
40
ASTM
D746
Pt-ocedure B
B i ittleness at 40F
No
No
No
Failu re Failure Failure
407
CONSTRUCTION
TABLE B
ASTM
Standard
50
Duro
50 5
60
Duro
60 5
70
Duro
705
2500
400
2500
350
2500
300
+ 15
+ 15
+ 15
15
15
15
Physical Properties
Hardness ASTM D2240
A STM D 412
D573
70 hr.
@212 F
40
40
40
Compressive Set
D395
Method B
Ozone
D1149
No
Cracks
No
No
Cracks Cracks
D429,B
40
40
40
ASTM
D746
Procedu re B
B rittleness at 40F
Duro
No
No
No
Failure Failure Failure
Lami nates shall be rolled mild steel sheets confoi ming to AASHO
M188 (ASTM A36) or A 245, Grade C or D unless otherwise specified by
the Engineer.
2.25.4 TOLERANCES
Tolerances, relative dimensions, finishes and appearance, flash, and
the Rubber Handbook, 2nd Edition, published by the Rubber Manufacturers Association, Inc., 444 Madison Avenue, New York 22, N.Y.
Symbol Requirement
A3
F3
T.063
B2
Grade 2
23.
Page 25.
(b) The shear resistance of' the bearing shall not exceed 30 psi for 50
durometer, 40 psi for 60 durometer or 50 psi for 70 durometer,
TABLE A compounds ; nor 50 psi for 50 durometer, 75 psi for 60
d urometer or 110 psi for 70 d urometer TABLE B compounds at
25o strain of the total effective rubber thickness after an extended fourday ambient temperature of 20 F.
2.26.1
C O N ST RU G TI O N
are intended to
cox'er the
i n stallati on of tunnel
nated on the plans by the E n gineer, and in conformity with the lines
and grades established by the E ngineer. The completed liner shall consist
of a series of steel liner plates assembled with staggered 1ongitudin:it
joints. Liner plates shall be fabricated to fit the cross section of the
tunnel. Liner plates herein de-scribed wrist meet the Sectional Properties
seams. Bolt spacing at flanged ton gitud inal seams shall be in accordance
with the manufacturer's stan dard spacing. For lapped ton gitu dinal seams,
bolt size and spacing shall be in accoi dance with the manufacturers
standard hut not less than that required to meet the longitud inal seam
strength requ irements nd Article 1.13.4.
2.26.4 INSTALLATION
All linei- plates :for the full length of a specified tunnel shall be of
one type only, either the flanged or the lapped seam type of construction.
Liner plates shall be assembled in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions.
bru ising, scaling, or breaking of the coating. Any plates that are damaged during handling or placing, shall be replaced by the Contractor at
his expense, except that small areas with minor damage may be repaired
by the Contractor as directed by the Engineei .
When and as designated by the Engineer, voids occuring between
the liner plato and the tunnel wall shall be f orce-grouted. The grout shall
be forced through the grouting holes in the plates with such pressure
that all v oids will be completely filled.
FuI I compensation for back packing or grouting shall be considered
as included in thP contract price paid :f or tunnel and no separate payment
will be made therefor.
2.26.5 MEASUREMENT
The length of tunnel to be paid for will be the length measured on
the tunnel liner plate invert.
2.26.6 PAYMENT
Payment for the footage of each size of tunnel as
determined under
measu rement shall be at the contract un it prices per lineal foot bid for
the various sizes, which payment shall include full compensation for
in rnishing all labor, materials, tools, eq u ipment and
incidentals to
complete th is item, including removal and d isposal of material resulting
from the excavation of the bore and forcegrouting voids.
App. A
411
APPENDIX A
LOADINC H 15-44
TABLE OF MAX I MU M MOMENTS, 5HEARS A ND REACTION 5.UI MPLE
Spxu
J0.0(b}
240(b)
44
46
48
50
3&.0(b]
24.0(b)
Moment
Moment
reaction ( a )
2893()
304 3(b)
319.2(b)
334.2(b)
...
.......
6
...
b)
8.
o lb)
66 0!b
14
.
)
b)
24
b
8
.
.
9 8
1 10
. . . . I , 097.3
170
180
190
2.307.8
2,551.5
2.80 7.3
2 00 , ,
3,07 $.0
d7.9
603
65.1
7T.1
pCon cen Irated load Is cons ide red placed at the en piort. Loade used a re those st in ulated
for sh .
I b ) Ma inn nan value determined bv Sten dard T ruck Loading. Otherw ise the Standard Lane
Loediug Boverns.
App. A
LOADING H 20-44
TABLE OF MAX IMU M MOM ENTS, S HEARS A ND REACTIONS.HM PLE
multiple lanes.
Impact not included.
En d shear
Moment
endewd
reecWon (e)
Span
42
Moment
66.9tbJ
39.4
40.1
41 4
12
48.0(b)
ti6.0(b)
32.0(b)
32.0 (b)
4 3.3
620 b)
80:0(b)
320 !b)
32.0(b)
44.6
9 6.0 ( b )
32.0 I b )
36
18
b
b
4 b!
.4 b
62
64
66
70
586.5
675."
645.5
6
7:0
95
. . 1, 14 9.5
,4
!20
4S.8
46.5
47.1
.
.
2.
428
6
2 6
2
b)
()
150
160
2,475.0
2,76b.0
0 !
i8o
34ozo
246b(b
190
74.0
77.2
80.4
3/743:0
90.0
96.4
36
( a ) Con cert I rated tea d is co n s idered nlaced at the sup nort. Lea de u sed a re those str pulated
for sheen
(b) Maximum va!ue detennined by Stenderd Truck Loading. Otherwise the Stenderd Lane
Loedins governs.
App. A
LOADING HS J 5-44
TABLE OF MAX I vi v u Mon rNTS, 5HEART A ND REACTIONS. SI M PLE
SPA NS, ONE LA NE
Spans in feet ; moments in thou sands of foot pou nds ; shears and
react ion s in thousan d s of pou n ds.
These val ues are su bject to spec i fication reducti on for load i rig of
multiple I anes.
Impact not included.
En
Moment
d ..d
reaction (a)
6.0(b]
3640(b)
24.0(b)
7 2.O(b)
24.0(b)
390 7(b)
44
4444
470 9.(6)
6.
. (b)
4 . b)
)
4:(B)
24.
4.
2 .
2 4.
b)
b)
44.?(b)
0(
4
)
46.6(b)
14
5. b
.
b6
b
. b)
b)
. (b
166.6(b
2
2
.
.
2 0
b
b)
38.3(
2577(b)
2?0 9( b]
302(b)
3S:6(b)
91.5
40
)
d a
o s
S
b
La
a d
. (
HS
).
4i4
LOADING HS 20-44
ABLE
F MA
MU M M M LN S
SP NS,
M PLE
LANE
Moment
b)
(b)
. (b)
44
663.6(b]
59. I ( b )
59. 6 ( b )
735.l(b)
60)
60 b ( b )
(?0..)(b)
.8(
b)
6 :$b)
62 !
624b)
14
63. (b)
b
144 0(b)
36 0 (
110.O(b)
4L6(t)
39.1 (b)
l'2.t(b)
40.4( b)
. b)
. ( )
. (b)
4 . b)
7(b)
4 (b)
4
.
22 .
4 4
64
4b
. ( )
6 .
b)
(b)
b
)
b).8 (b
6 .
6(b
2,476.1
.
b)
2bb
b
4 . b)
2.
96.4
40
Standbrd LaneLoa
g$
.:., '
App. B
APPENDIX B
TRUCK TRAIN AND EQUIVALENT LOADINGS I955 SPECIFICATIONS
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY OFFICIALS
H - 20 -35 LOADING
H - IS - 5 5
LOAOIN G
TON THUGE
H - I O - 35 LOAD I NG
H - 20 - 35 LOA DING
H - 15 - 35 LOADING
H - 10 - 35
LOAD I NG
EQUI VALEN T
LANE
W I OTH
LOAD I NG
10 F EE T
HI GH WAY B RIDGE S
App. C
APPENDIX C
FORMULAS FOR STEEL COLUMNS *
The perm iss ible average u n it stress for steel colu runs shall be :
(A )
1.80 for carbon steel (A36) , low alloy steel (A 572 with 45,000 and 65,000
yield points) , and high yield strength quenched & tempered steel (A1514/
A 517 with 90,000 yield strength ) .
1.82 for low alloy steel (A242, A440, A441, A 672 and A 588 with 50,000
yield point) and high yield strength quenched & tempered steel (Afi14/
A517 wi th 100,000 yield strength) .
1.84 for low alloy steel (A 242, A440, A441 and A588 with 46,000 yield
point and A 572 with 55,000 and 60,000 yield points) .
1.87 for low alloy steel (A242, A440, A441, A572, and A588 with 42,000
yield points) .
d istancc I rom neutral axi s to the extreme fibei in compression.
L
L
7 "/o of the total length of a col umn having riveted encl conncctins.
87. /r of the tot a I length of a col umn h av Ing p in ned en d con nect ions.
E = in od u I u s of eI as tic ity of steel
= 2!l,0(J0,000 lbs. pe r sq. i n.
ecce nf r ie ity of ap p l red load at the end of col u run having th e gieater comp ute1 moment, i n inches.
e. = ccccntiic ity at opposite en d.
col rim n sh:ill be i n ves tipated f o r th e c:tee of a ln colu in n con cc n I ri cally load ed, h a v ing a g reater
App. C
the peim i ssi blc f . shal I be deterred ned from the formula :
When the values of end moments are not computed but cons idered
negli g i ble in amou nt, shall be assu med equal to + 1.
shall be assumed eg u al to + 1 for a member subject to bend ing
stresses in duced by the components of externally appl ied loads acting
perpend icu la r to its axis. For this case the general formu la becomes :
(E)
d = deflect ion due to the transve rse com pone n ts of exte r na 11 y applied loads,
in inches.
I = moment of inertia of section about an axis pei pend i cular to the plane of
bending, in ( inches )
M = women t due to the transverse com ponents of ex te rn ally appl red load, in
inch pounds.
The val ue of 0.25 in the above for run Ias p rov ides for' inheren t
and un k nown eccen tric ity.
GRAPHS
between
App. C
419
420
HltiH WAY
J3 HIl3ti i I:
421
111(iT1 W A Y 13 HIDiE 5
App. G
App. C
424
HIGHWAY
BRIDGE S
App. C
426
HI GHWAY BRIDGE S
App. C
427
App. C
430
HIGH\VAX BRIDGES
App. C
431
App. C
4O
60
App. D
APPENDIX D
POSITION AND DIRECTION OF NEUTRAL AXIS *
When the plane of bending does not lie on a principal axi s of
colu run section or when the point of appl i eat i on of the resultant
does not li e with in the kern area of the g:ross trans f or med section,
pos it ion and d i rection of the neutral ax i s may be determined by
following formula :
the
load
the
the
M,
A
P load par a llel to the ax is ct the colu run in po un de
A transfo rmed a rea o f cracked section in square inches
M,= M, I
M,
,
I,'=: I,
M,
( I..)
I,
M,
M,
X,, Y ,,
I,
mome nt of i ne i tia of c racked Ira n sfor me d sec tion about the centroid aI
trio me nt of i ne i-tia of c iacked t iansfo rmed section about the cen t roi da l
X ax is
section
Y axi s
the
neutral
axis determined,
the maximum un it strew in the concrete shall be comp uted with the
formula :
M',
I,
X,
in which
cli sta rice I rom the neutia1 ax is to the extieme fibe r in compress ion
measured pa rallel to the centioida1 Y ax is
INDEX
A
Article
Page
Ab utments :
Backfill
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.8 ...................................249
Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.7 ..................................... 62
Drainage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.7D . . . . . . . . . . . . fi3
Overturning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.7A ..................................... 52
Pile bent
. . .
. . . . .. .. . . .
. 1.10.8 ............................... 230
Plain concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.7A . . . . . .
. . . fi2
Rein:forcement cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.fi.6B ..................................... 61
S cour protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.2C ........................................ 2
Stone masonry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.7A ..................................... 62
T'emperature reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.7B ..................................... 53
Wing walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.7C ......................................53
A dmixtures for concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.2B ................................... 264
Aggregates :
INDEX
Allowable stresses, contd.
Article
Page
Reinforcement, compression . .
... .
. . . . 1.fi.7
......64
Retaining walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1 ..................................... 40
Steel
Substructures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1 . .
40
Anchorage
Zones
.. . . .
. ....
Shell
Ashlar
masonry
Article
Page
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 2.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . 29fi
Arches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.1fi .
.
299
Copings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.14.................................. 299
Cores and backing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.8 .................................. 297
Dowels and cramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.13................................ 298
INDEX
Bearing piles, contd.
Article
Page
spurie
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .s.so. .
. . . . . . ss8
Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2fi2
Storage anil handling
.
. .
. 2.?.9, 2. .14.
256, 2d8
Test piles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 8.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 fi
l3earin g plates :
(Se c nl.s o Beaiings )
Allowable stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.6, 1.7.7 . . . . . . . . 124, 12fi
Bronze or copper-nlloy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 2.11 ............................... 868
Erection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 10.fi6 ................................ 852
Measurement and payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . ?fi8
Placement
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 11.fi . . . . . . . . . . . . 8fi8
Surface
finish
..
. .. .
. . . . . . 2.10. 25 .......................... 842
Bearing stiffeners :
Connections
.
.
. 2.10.19, 2.10.2d . .
32tl
Hi gh strength , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10.8A . . . . . . . . . . . . 30ti
Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 6
Pipe-structural plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ilo
Tinny ber stiucf ures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10.4, 2.20.9 . . . . . , . . 2?0, 391
Weight
. .
.
.
.
. 2.10.U3 . . .
355
Bond :
Allowable stresses
Slabs
Spiead Foofings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.6E .
Box girders :
Load distribution
. . 1.3.1, 1.7.108 .
(See u /so Concrete box girders and composite box girders, steel)
I3racing :
Bents and towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.fi4 . . . .
1fi9
67
Bracing, contd.
Article
Page
Minimum size of fillet weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.2G ............................ 132
Outstanding legs of angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.1ii ................................ 128
Pile and framed berits
Portal, sw-ay
Camber :
Plate girders
Steel gritl
Ti usses, steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.79 .
Trus.ses, timbei
.
. . . 1.10.9F
Cantilever slabs :
. ..............1ii2
...................233
Railing loadings
Canvas, for beldirig masonry plates
13 2H
2 103K
.....L4.6D.
Storage
..
..
......... 46
Centrifui:al" foi-ces
. .
.1.2.21: '28
Channel changes . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1 ..................................... I
Channel, Jr reservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1.2. ........................... 247
INDEX
Article
Page
.. ..
64
70
58
67
Modular ratio n.
. .
Columns, steel :
Columns, Timber
Combined stresses :
..
.. .. . ..
Fastener's
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.5 .................................. 121
Steel members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.1 i ..........................................128
Article
Page
Compost te I-girders, steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.96 to 1.7.1111 . . . . . . . . 10-16ii
Continuous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.99 ............................... 161
Creep effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.96
.................................................................................................................................................................... 160
Deflection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , 1.7.101
................................................................................................................................................................... 165
Depth ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . 1.7.10. . . .
. 12ti
Effective flange width
.
1.7.98.
161
Fatigue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.1011
................................................................................................................................................................... 162
Horizontal shear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . , . . . . . . . . . 1.7100
.................................................................................................................................................................... 162
Modulai- ratio. n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. t .il6.
lGtl
heai- onnectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.97, 1J 00 . . .
. 161, 2
Composite structures, ju estressed cone-ete . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.14 .
10fi
Composite xv-ool-concrete members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1i
. 38
Compression choi-cfs :
Lateral bracin g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.21 .
TU
Ti'usses . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.7G
.................................................................................................................................................................... 151
Com pression membei-s :
F"asteners . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.37
.................................................................................................................................................................. 1315
Limiting length
1.7.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12fi
Pitch of fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.86 . .
lii
Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.1iI
.................................................................................................................................................................... 128
Thickness of metal
.
.
.
1.7.88.
1511
Concrete :
(See ritso Concrete structui-es)
Gompiessive strength
. 1.5.1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.14 .
iiG
27ti
. 280
Delvery
.......................
..........249H.
...................................................... 271
Exposettosea
water
...................
.....24.16.
........................................................ 277
Kascu'ork
278
.................................2418.
F:nshing
..............................24.14.
........................................................ 282
47
441
Concrete, contil.
Article
Sec 1 6, 2 4 33
Page
9G, 287
concrete)
lieinfoi-cement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sec. 2.5 .............................. 291
(See use Reinforcement)
2 4 15
247.
antl testing
27'i
1ii12C .
. . 73
Shrinkage reinforcement
74
. .... . . ....
. 1.3.TB .
30
Concrete ct-ibbing
. Sec. 2.IG. ............................376
Concrete desi;;n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sec. 1.Ii . . . .
Gfi
Concrete flooring, wheel load distribution . . .
. . . .1.3.TB .
.
80
Concrete masonry
.
. . . Sec. 2.4 ............................. 262
Concrete piles:
(Sc Piles)
Concrete slabs :
(See Slabs)
Concrete structures :
Arches
.
.
.
. 1.5.10 . .
71
Bearin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.ii.13 . . . . . . . . . . . . i5
Bents . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . 'i2
"xse C n$rete box girders)
Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.G.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . iiG
Columns
1 ii II
G7
(,5e fso, Columns, concrete)
152
ii8
Deflection
154
..
Expansion
145
..
Footings
Moment of inertia
.
. .
.
.1.ii.2.
ii8
Piers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.il, 1.5.2. . . . . . . . . . 54, 58
"i=> eoiienre of concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.1 ............................... 12
Page
.. 271
96
Slabs :
(See Slabs)
Span length
T-beams
26
60
Concrete T-beamp s :
Construction .joints
.
a
d d's pbution
D: sh' at
iiaph
.. .
.
'
. 1.5.aE . . . . . . . . . . .
12
'
G1
2s
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.fi.6G ....................................63
. . . 1.3.1 .................................29
Eyebars
Fillet s
INDEX
443
54
b
pan on beai-ings
::
: : ' $$77o7 .. . : . 128
S!$ding
Copper bearing steels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 30ti
. . . . . 200, 399
Bracing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23.7................................ 402
Materials . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8.1 , , . . .
2011
Multiple
Payment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23.13
....
404
Counters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.7f . . . . . . . . . . . . lb I
444
Article
Page
Ci-oss frames :
Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.21 .............................. 131
Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.21, 1.7.55 . . . . . . . . 131, 140
Culverts:
2410B
handling and
Dead loads
Distribution reinforcement
loads
Distribution of
1 3 2E
1 22B
Shear in
..
37
Ii0
..
.. 14
opening
114
2
Curbs
.
.
.1.1.8. .................... 5
Depressed roadways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.16C .
lfl
Height . .
Loading
.
.1.2.HB.
21
Tunnels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1iiC............................ 10
. 1.1.17C. ....................... 12
1.1.15, 1.1.16, 1.1.17 . . . . . . . . . , 9, 10
Underpasses
Width
D
ilampproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sec. 2.18. ...................... 381
Dead loads .
.
. .
.
. 1.2.2........................12
Deck ti-usses :
(See Trusses)
Deflection :
i3omposite girders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.101 . . . . . . . . . . . . 16ii
Concrete structures, modular ratio n
Elastomeric bearing pads ..................................... 1.7.50.
1726
132
Minimum size of hllet
Spacing, steel structures . . . . . . . . . . . .1.7.21, 1.7.59, 1.7.107. . . . 131, 140, 170
Trusses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.78 . .
1$2
Distribution reinforcement, slabs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.2E .......................... 35
Distribution of loads:
Cantilever slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.2H . .
35
Com posite xvood-concrete members . . . . . . . . .
Compost te box girders, steel
Concrete slabs
. 1.8.ii .......................... 38
16
17103.
44ii
Distt-ibution of loads, contd.
Article
Pagc
Slabs supported on 4 sides . . . . . .
. . . . . 1.3.21 .
3G
Steel griJ flooring . .
. . . 1.3.ti. .............................. 39
Through earth fills .
.
..
.1.3.3.
37
Timher flooring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.4 ................................. 37
1 4 6G. 1.ii.6E
Dowels, cmledment
.
Z 6.13
In-ainage :
14 7D
ii3
Abutments
1 48G
54
Retaining
Rigitl frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.1fl .................................. 27
Roaclxx-ay
,1.1.10. . . .
8
Spanlrel fills, conci-ete arches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.ii.1IlF .
72
Steel box gii-ders
.
. I.7.1flil . , ......................... 170
In wing nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10.3il . . . . . . . . . . . . 34fi
. . .
E
12
37
27
52
Alutments
Culx'erts
Retaining: walls .
Earthtjuake stt esses
Edge beams, longitudinal
Effective width :
148A
1220
..
13 2D
..
..
60
End blocks
Erection :
. . .2.10.ii6. . . . .
3ii2
Dehveryof materials
Fa!sework
Pin
Plans
Removal of old
and
354
4W
INDEX
@rticle
Erection, contd.
Page
Straightening bent material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10.57
. 352
Structural plate pipes, pipe-arches, and arches . . . . . 2.23.3. ........................... 400
Structural steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10.49 to 2.10.64 . . . , ......... 351-357
Excavation :
Classification . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.11 .
250
Foundation and substructure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . 2.1.1 . . . , . , ............... 247
Inspection
Measurement and
.2.1.12. .
250
Expansion :
Concrete structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.$.4 ............................ 60
Packing
Timber trusses
. . 1.7.47 .
Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.18 .
278
INDEX
447
Fasteners, cont'd.
Article
Page
Lacing bars
.
..
. ..
. . 1.7.83
.
163
Long rivets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.89 .
.
136
Number in connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.19, 1.7.20, 1.7.21 ......................128-13 1
Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.36, 1.7.37 . . . . . . . . 134, US
Pitch in compression members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.86 .
155
Riveted flange angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.69 ...................................143
Size
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.8fi
. .
134
Sealing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.37 .
135
Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.36 .................................. 134
Stitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.37 .
.
. 136
Through filler plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.19 ...................................128
W eight, pay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10.63 .................................. 855
Fatigue, composite girders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.100 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1G2
pat
e design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ . 1.7$3 . . . .
ie.d coat, meta structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.2, .14. 2 . . . . . . . . 36 , 369"
T"ield connections, subpunchin g and reaming . . . . . . . . . 2.10.10 ................................ 317
Fillers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.19 .
.
128
Fillets, concrete
..
. ..... . . . .
. 1.5.3 . .
. 69
'illet \vells, allowable stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . TU
(See o/so Welding)
Filter Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15.8...................................374
I"inishing concrete surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.24 to 2.4.3 1 . . . . . . . . 282-28fi
me stops, timbei structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10. 1 .................................. 234
Flame cleaning, metal sur:faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.10D . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Ii7
Flanges, plate girders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.69 .
.
143
Flange angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.69 ................................ 143
Elangc plates, built-up compression members . . . . . . . . . 1.7.88 . . . . . . . . . . . . 15G
Flange splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.19 ................................... 128
F'1ange width :
Composite girders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.98 ..................................... 161
Box girders, concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.fi.12A ..................................... 73
T-beams, concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.SA
.
GO
T-beams, v ood-concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.SA.........................................38
Floor system :
Floorbeams
(See Floorbeams)
446
Article
Page
Footings, contcl.
.
1ii1
..
Bond stress
Critical sections
146E
..
Culverts . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . 1.4.6A ................................. 50
Depth
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.6A , , . . .
ii0
Design . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.6E .
50
Distribution of pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.6C ................................ 50
Elevation of
. . . ........... . 4
Preparation of
424
Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.6P .
52
Retaining wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.8B ................................53
1 4 6F .
Slabs
E . . . . . . . . . . . . SU
Spread
Stepped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.6D .
5fl
Stress transfer, columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.6G . . . . . . . . . . .
G2
Forms:
Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.19 . . , ......................... 278
Removal
2 4 20
2711
value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.2. . .
40
F' oundation,
Foundation seals
248
Framed bents
Friction losses, prestressing steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.7A . . . . . . . . . . . . S9
Friction piles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.4C, D, F, G . . . . . . . 43, 44, 4Ii
(3eafsoP!!es)
Galvanizing :
Steel :
Group loalings . . . . , . . . .
. .1.2.22.
28
I See Trusses)
INDEX
Article
Hammers :
H loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.SB
. .
HS loadings . . . . . . . . . . .
. . .
.
. . . 1.2.FC . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Factors
Prestressed
Concrete
lfi
IG
. . . 1.6.5..................................... 97
Reinforced
Concrete
.
.
. . . . 1.fi.1'?
. 79
Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.123 . . . . . . . . . . . . 17G
Load Factor Design
Concrete
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.fi.14 . . . . . . . . . . . . 7fi
Minimum loading
.. .
.....
. . . . . . 1.2.i5F . . . . . . .
18
Position of live load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.6 ...................................... 18
Traffic lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.6 ......................................18
High-tensile-strength prestressing reinforcement . . . . . 2.4.33J ................................ 289
H loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.SB . . . . . . . . . . . . lfi
IIoles :
Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10.11, 2.10.12 ............................... 817
Bolt holes
.
. .
. .. .
. . . . 2.10.7, 8 & 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Bolts; timber members
.. . .
..
. . . . 2.20.8
..
891
Dri:fting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10.1o . . . . , . . . . . . . 3111
Reamed or drilled
. 2.10.9
31G
Ice pressure,
Impact
Impact, composite wood-concrete members. . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.SB . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insiiection of structural steel. mill and shop . .
27
22
3P
. 2.10.41 . . . . . . . . . . . . 84G
Article
Page
J
Jetting bearing piles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.4G
Joints :
nearing type
(See Connections)
Brick masonry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9.8 ...............................304
Contraction, retaining walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.8F
. 54
Expansion and fixed in concrete structures . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.23.............................281
Expansion type
( See Expansion joints)
Friction type
(See Connections)
I\Iortar rubble masonry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.6, 2.7.8 . . . . . . . 301, 302
Structural steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10.26 ........................... 342
Timber members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10.9A .............................. 231
Joint fillers :
Premolded expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.23C
Refined oil-asphalt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17.2G
INDEX
Live loail, contd.
Article
Minimum
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.OF . . .
Page
18
..
30
Loadings :
Application
Buoyancy
...
... . . ..
..
. 1.4.2 .................................... 40
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . 1.2.8 ..................................... 19
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.18.....................................27
28
Curb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.HB . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
Combination railing . .
. ..
. .
. . . . . 1.2.11C
Combinations ................................................................................................... 1.2.22 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Continuous spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.8D . . . . . . . . . . . .
De:id loads .
. . .
..
.. .. ...
. . 1.2.2 . .
Drift ...................................................................................................................... 1.2.17 . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
28
19
12
27
Earth pressure
1.2.19 .. . . . 27
Earthquake
stresses ..........................................................................1.2.20 . . . . . . . . . . . 27
.....
Electric railway .............................................................................. 1.2.10
20
Ice
Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.12
2.17 . load
. . . ................................................................................................................
..
Live
1.2.3 . . .
(ice nIs o Highway loading and Live load)
Longitudinal forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
, . . .1. 22
. 14
. 1.2.13.................................. 23
14
Sidewalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.11A .
.
20
Stream current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.17 .
27
Thermal forces . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.10 . . .
2G
Timber structures . .. .... . . .
.
1.10.1
207
Traffic waiting .. .............. .. ..... .. l.2.l1C. ............ 21
upiiii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i.2.ic . . . . . . . . . . z6
Win4
Loads
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.14 ..................................... 24
. .. .
..
. .. ... .
. Sec. 1.2
of
.......
12
3fi
Longitudinal
Longitudinal
Longitudinal
Loop bars .
TO
Lumber
(See Timber)
383
12f
Article
Page
Concret
steel
.1.5.2
58
Concretewooil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . 1.3.SG . . . . . .
38
135C
38
SteelWood
Moment of
152
?8
Mortar:
Ashlar masonry
. . 2.6.2B, 2.6.0. . . . . . . . 295, 297
Measurement and
2434. ....... 250
Pneumatically applied . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.32
285
Name plates
.2.19.1.
:I82
Overload provision
... .
.1.2.4 . .
14
21412
2.14.il .
365
. 3G7
159B
17 11
..
..
fi8
1 4 9A
..
Orientation
ii8
1217
113
.
..
Scour protection
Skewed
Spacing . . . . . .
2
. 1.1.3 . .
. ..
58
Allowable loads
Batter
14.4G.
Group loading
Load carrying
Loading tests
144G
. 1.4.4C,
46
48
.. 4B
43, 44
41
48
due to backfill
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.2
40
Piles, contd.
Article
Page
46, 50
Tapered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.SG .
47
Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . 1.4.51
. .. .. .
48
Spread footings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . 1.4.6E .
50
Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.4E, 1.4.51 . . . . . . . . . . 45, 48
(See else Steel piles)
Thickness
metal
1.4.11
Timber
(See also Timber piles)
48
4
Trestle
Untreated timber
1.4.SB .
46
4ii
Pilot nuts
.
. 2.10.39. ...........................346
Pin nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.44 .............................. 137
Allowable stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.4 .
117
E'.rection
Length
Location of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,7.41 . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Manufacture ........................................................................................ 2.10.35 . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Pelestals and shoes ........................................................................... 1.7.56 . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Pilot and driving nuts
.
.2.TG.3S . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Pin plates ................................................................................................ 1.7.43
137
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , .................................................................. 1.7.42 . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Size, eyebars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.4G . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Pipe, Corrugated metal
(Sec ilso Coxrugnted metal and Structui-at plate pipes and Pipe-arches)
Pipe, structural plate
(See iitso Corrugated metal and Structui-at plate nipes and Pipe-arches)
Bolts
.
.
.
.
. 1.8.5 .
205
Reinforcing skewed ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8.7 .......................... 207
Pipe-arches
(See also Corrugated metal and Structural plate pipes and Pipe-arches)
Plank floors . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20.17 .......................... 393
Plate arches
(Sei Arches, sti-uctural plate)
Plate cut edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . .2.10.2?'. . , . . . . . . . . . 32ii
Plate girders
(See cilso Steel structures)
Bearing stiffenei-s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.73 ............................. 149
Camber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.74 .
. . 1$0
Cover plates
Design
1.7.69.
143
INDEX
Plate girders, cont'd.
Article
Page
Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.69
... 143
Longitudinal stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.72 ................................... 148
l'ransverse stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.71, 2.10.32 . . . . . . . 146, 344
\\'el plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.10, 2.10.80 . . . . . . . . 144, 343
Plug welds, allowable stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.2 .
. .. lfi
Pneumatic placing of concrete
.
. 2.4.11
... 276
Pointing stone joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.16, 2.7.9 . . . . . . . . 299, 802
Portal bracing :
Prestressed concrete
....
..
.. .
.. .. . Sec. 1.6... .
..
95
. .
... .... .
..
9G
I()1
289
98
. . 288
102
. . 289
. . 104
106
. . 288
102
. . . . . . 1.G.1GB ..............................107
Temporary stress
Ultimate stress
Procedure justification
97
1 6.6
Railinits:
Combination . . . . .
.
. . 1.1.9, 1.2.HC . . . .
ii, 21
Co11ciete
. . . 2.13.II to 2.13.1 .
. . . . 362-36?,
ExJiansion joints . . . . . . . .
. . 2.13.11
.................... 363
Materials
. 2.13.2 ...............................362
Metal j . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13.4 .
362
Peilestrian
.
1.1.9, 1.2.11C . . .
ii, 21
Precast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13.9
..363
Stone aricl brick
. 2.13.12 . . . . . , ................. 364
Timber structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20.20 . .
39ii
Trafhc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.9, 1.2.HC . . . . . . . . . . . G, 21
\Vood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10.10H, 2.13.13 . . . . . . . . 234, 364
Reactions, standard ! ading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. A . . . . . . . . . , . . 411
Reactions, end, position of loads . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . 1.3.TA .
29
Rei lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10.3K, 2.14.2 . . . . . . . . 313, 3G4
.iteinforcement:
(Sec rifso Reinforcing steel )
1.5.10D .
Arches, concrete
Bai mats
, . . .2.5.TC.
. . 2912
oncrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.56.
6!
3ii
Plungesbox
74
Fahhcaton
......................
girders
INDEX
Reinforcement, contd.
Article
Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.9
Minimum, columns
1.6.9A
Page
... 294
Negative
Substitutions
.. .
..
. . ..
Article
Page
. .
Stirrup embedment
15 6D, . .8D . . . . . . . . . . 6 , 6
Stirrups
Ties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.6D
62
Web, Spacing, Prestressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.13 ........................... 104
Welded splices
. . 1.fi.6C . . . . . .
61
Yield strength . .
. . . .
.1.5.1.
56
Belief bridges, xvaterway opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.2. ................................ 1
Retaining walls ,
Sec 1 4
411
Base or footing slab
148B
53
148G
54
148A
53
Expansion joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . 1.4.8F ................................. 54
1 ?6B
61
Reinforcement cover
Temperature
148E
?4
54
Rigil ft-awe :
373
Materials . . .
.
.2.15.2. ...........................370
Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . 2.15.9. ............................374
Mortared, for slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15.4.
372
Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1G.10. . . . . . . . . . . . 37ii
Stone . . . .
.
. .2.15.5. ........................... 373
Rivet steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.10.3A ............................. 306
Riveted gii-dei-s
(See Plate girders)
Rivets :
(See rifso Fasteners)
Field riveting
. .
. 210159
353
Fuimishirg field
2 10 18
;31s
Heating and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10.21 ..............................324
Holes
Size
\Veight of rivets and t-wet heacls . . . . .
. . . 2.10.63 . . . .
35ii
ndvay.
Bridges
. .. . ....... . .
Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
. . . . . . . . . 4,,
. 1,.1..7,, . . , . ,
INDEX
459
Article
Page
Sandblasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.10C .
.
.
367
Scour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1, 1.1.2, 1.1.3, 1.1.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Scour, piles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.61 . . . . . . . .
48
Seal, foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.5 .................................... 248
Seal weld
(Sec Welding)
Secondary members :
819
318
Structural steel .................................................................. 2.10.14
Shop coat, metal structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.2A, 2.14.11 . . . . . . . . 8G4, 869
Shrinkage, composite structures, prestressed . . . . . . . . . 1.6.14E . . . . . . . .
Shrinkage, coefficient
.
. .
.
.
. 1.fi.1. . . . . . . .
Shrinkage, reinforcement
.
.
.. .
.
. 1.fi.6H.
TOP
fi6
G3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.HA . . . . . . .
20
Article
Page
. ... . .. .. . ... ... .., . ... . . .. .. ... . . . , . . . . . .. . . .. . . .
Sidewalks
1 2 HA
..
Cantilever
F$nish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , ..............................................................2.4.31 .
Live load . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.HA
Sills and mud sills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10.8C, 2.20.13C .
Skid resistance, floors .
8, 359
Slab design .
lii, 17, 32
1.2.SA,
Slabs :
Bending moment
34
Cantilever
Footings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.6F . . . . . . . . . . .
ii2
Median
132].
37
Placement
2410G
274
Ra|ling loads
.
. . . . . . . . . . 1.3.2H .
Reinforcing cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . 1.5.6B, 1..16A .
106
Shear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.2F .
35
Span lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.2A . . , ...............................32
Supported on 4 sides
.
.
. 1.3.21
3G
Truck loads, cantilever
. . . . 1.3.2H .
35
Unsupported edges
. 1.3.2G................................ 35
Sleeve nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.'i.76 .
IU
Slenderness ratio
. 1.7.II ..............................126
Soils:
Angles of repose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.3 ............................... 41
Bearing power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.2 .
40
Sole plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . 1.7.53 ................................ 139
Spaced columns. timber, design . . . .
. 1.10.2E ................................224
Span length :
Concrete structures
. 1.G.3 .
iiil
Butt-welded
Fasteners,
Reinforcement
of
1 7 3 1 " 19
115 128
1 7 19.
2.5.C . . . . . . . . . 61, 293
INDEX
Page
Article
Steam curing, prestressed concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4.33E .
. 288
Steel beams, wheel load distribution
.
. . . . 1.8.TB .
Steel box girdei-s
(See Composite box girders, steel)
Steel design
(See Structural steel)
Steel grid flooring
Arrangement of sections
Concrete filler . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12.9.
................................................................................................................................................................... 361
Connection to supports . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . 2.12.Ii. . . . . . . . . .
3Gtl
Field assembly
.2.1Z.5.
. . . ..
3G0
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12.2
.....................................................................................................................................................................359
Measurement and payment
Protective treatment .
. .2.12.2Ii.
3lill
Provision for campbei- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.12.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3tO
Repairing galvanized coatings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12.8. . . . . . . . . .
3G9
Skid resistnnce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12.2i1 . . . . . . . . . . . . :lGil
\\'elding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . 2.12.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3fti
Y\'heel
distribution
..1.3.6.
Steel piles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.4B .
41
(See also Piles)
Allowable stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . 1.4.4C
43
Bond stress
1.5.TC . . . . . . .
57
Caps . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.51
48
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.SK ................................ 49
Design load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.4E . . . .
45
Splices
1451
48
Thickness
metal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.iiI ..............................48
Tip reinforcement . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . 1.4.4E . . . . . . . . . . . . 4ii
Steel structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sec. 1.7, 2.10 . . . . . . . . 111, 306
(See otso Structui-at steel)
Accessibility of parts . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.23 ............................. 132
Anchor bolts
. . 1.7.ii'o............................... 135
Eents and tower-s
1 7 91 to 1 7 95
159-1G0
(See also Bents and towers)
Gleaning surfaces for painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.14.10. . . . . . , . . . . . 3fi7
Closed sections and pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.24
132
Combined stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.17 .
128
Composite I-girders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.56 to 1.7.101 . . . . . . . . 160-1Iii
Composite box girders. steel . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.102 to 1.7.1(1Il .................... 165-170
Connections
(See Connections)
Continuous
Eccentric connections . . . . .
'" * "'""
. . 1.7.18.
128
1?1
131
Links
136
..
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.40 . . .
137
Painting
(See Painting metal structures)
Pedestals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.55 ................................140
Peiforated cover plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.11, 1.7.83 . . . . . . . . 126, 153
Rollers
Shoes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 18il
. 1.7.VG .
1411
2G
Fit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.71 . . . . . . . . . . . . 14fi
Anch orago
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.fi. 8 E .
5tii rups :
INDEX
Stirrups, cont'd.
463
Article
Page
Painting
172?
\Vcldable
132
2 23.7 . . . . . . . . . , . . 402
Material
Tensile properties
Welding
Substructures
Superelevation
1111
8
Surface finish
2 10 2ii
342
Sway bracing :
Trusses, steel
1 7.81
Trusses. timber
Tunnel liner plates , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sec. 1.13, 2.26. . . . . . . . 240, 4118
T
T-beams
ii4
. 127
Temperature reinforcement :
Tension members :
Fasteners
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.37 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:in
INDEX
Tension members, cont'd.
Article
Page
Thermal
coefhcient
. . ..
.. ....
.
. 1.5. 1 .
fiG
Thermal forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.10 . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Thermal stresses, conciete
.
... .. . ..
. 1.fi.4
611
Thermal movement, steel structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.TG ................................... 128
Thickness of metal :
Angles in compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.88
IV6
Be:iring stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.78
149
Corepression members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.88 ...................................... 156
Tied columns
(Sec Columns, concrete)
Ties :
Radii of ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.6D, 2. fi.4 . . . . . . . . . ti2, 292
Spacing in columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.fi.GI, 1.fi.9D . . . . . . . . . . G4, G9
T imber :
Al1ovxab1e stresses
. . . . . . 1.10.1, 1.10.2
Preservative treatments Koi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sec. 2.21
Timhci 1eams, horizontal shear . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,3.TA, 1.10.2A
207, 209
2 2G
29, 209
140
143
142
3T
30 37
Timber piles :
Article
fi 6
41
INDEX
T
T
a d
4GT
AiPa
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2........................................... 8
i
o
t
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . , . . . . . , . , . . . . 2.4. ........................................... 2
u k oad n , a
s ss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.8D . . . . . . . . . . .
uss s :
151, 152
. 131
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.12 ...................................126
ep'hpra o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177$ . . . . . . . . . . .
122
Fastena
stch iiiends of compression members'
1 7 86 ' 11515
Fillers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.19 ............................... 128
Floorbeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.58 ................................... 140
. US
Unit stresses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.17 .
Article
Page
377
Application
. 2.17.ii, 2.17.6. . . . . . . . 375, 380
Concrete arches
.1.ii.10E . .
72
Joint fillers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . .2.17.2G . . , .....................378
Ilf aterials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17.2 .........................377
Measurement and payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17.9........................381
Preparation of surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.17.4 ...........................375
Protection couise . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.17.8.
381
Storage of fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17.3. ..................... 379
Water pressure, piers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.17 .
27
Water stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.23E ......................... 281
Waterv-ay openings :
Bridg s ....................................................................................... 1.1.2. . . . . . . . . . . .
1
Julverts g. .................................................................................. 1.1.4 . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
Relief bridges . . . . . . , ........................................................... 1.1.1 . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
\Veai-ing surfaces
. . 1.2.2, 2.24.1 . .
12, 404
Web members, trusses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.76 . . . . . . . . . . . . J.51
Web plates:
17 104
1G6
, steel .. .
1788
156
compression
Plate girders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.70, 1.7.71, 1.7.72, 2.10.30 144, 146, 148, 343
Ribbed arches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.911.
1ii8
Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.15 . . . . . .
128
Web i-einforcement . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.ii.8 ............................... 615
Weights
Computel
2.10.63.
Matei-ials
Welded girders
llii
!NDEX
469
Article
Page
13 i
..
Wheel load distribution
Composite wood-concrete members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.ii .
38
Steel grid flooring
.
. . . .1.3.6.
3s
Through earth hlls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.3.
....
37
Timber flooring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.4 ............................ 37
\Vheel load, position :
Yiell strength :
Reinforcing steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.ii.ID . . . . . . . . . . . . ii'l
Spin-al reinforcement
. 1.5.9C .
68
Structural steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.1 . . . .
111
Zinc, sheet